1 Americans have always had great faith in education

Document Sample
1 Americans have always had great faith in education Powered By Docstoc
					1              Americans have always had great faith in education. They believe that
all citizens must have some 21 in order to understand economic and political
matters and 22 wisely. They also believe that education is essential to progress
and prosperity, and that every person is entitled to as much education as he can
23 .
The public schools of the United States are not controlled by the national government
but by the 24 communities, with state laws setting educational standards and
ruling on compulsory attendance.
  Among the most active in establishing free public education were the labor unions.
From the 1830's on, public school 25 developed and they have been growing rapidly
ever since. In addition, there are also various private and religious schools.
Today they have a great variety of types of colleges and universities, 26 the
world-famous Massachusetts Institute of Technology. Besides, there are many kinds
of commercial and 27 training. Students are allowed a choice of subjects. There
are 28 public schools for the handicapped, too. American schools are equipped
with a large variety of up-to-date learning aids such as closed-circuit television,
audio-visual equipment etc. State governments, special foundations and the colleges
themselves grant many scholarships to students with special 29 . The goal is to
make higher education 30 to everyone who is willing and capable.

    21        答案:               D
A             culture
B             learning
C             training
D             education
    22        答案:               A
A             vote
B             elect
C             select
D             choose
    23        答案:               B
A             take
B             absorb
C             digest
D             swallow
    24        答案:               A
A             local
B             central
C             native
D             limited
    25        答案:               B
A             units
B             systems
C             structures


                                                                                    1
D              organizations
  26           答案:                C
A              containing
B              included
C              including
D              involving
  27           答案:                C
A              service
B              career
C              vocational
D              employment
  28           答案:                D
A              strange
B              special
C              surprising
D              specialized
  29           答案:                C
A              conduct
B              behavior
C              abilities
D              performance
  30           答案:                C
A              open
B              acceptable
C              available
D              convenient
2                 Christmas is actually a home and family festival. As Christmas
approaches, those who live away try to get back home. Besides, the big shops,
beautifully 21 and brightly lit, stay open long after dark. Everyone is buying
Christmas presents for friends and 22 arents try to give the children everything
they want.
The home is decorated with     23 paper chains, leaves of holly and 24 greeting
cards received through the post from friends. In the corner there may be a Christmas
tree, its branches decorated with shining stars and colored lights and sometimes 25
with gifts.
In the evenings, children may be heard outside the house, 26 Christmas songs
called carols.
Christmas Eve comes 27 . When the children go to bed, they often hang up a large
28    or pillowcase to receive the presents. Quietly the parents go and 29 the
presents near their bed.
     On Christmas Day people usually have a wonderful dinner. In the evening the family
will sit round the fire, eating nuts, sweets and fruit, talking, or watching TV, or
playing 30 .
  21           答案:                C


                                                                                      2
A        painted
B        displayed
C        decorated
D        celebrated
    22   答案:            A
A        relatives
B        relation
C        relationship
D        related ones
    23   答案:            B
A        color
B        colorful
C        colored
D        coloring
    24   答案:            C
A        worthless
B        cheap
C        attractive
D        unused
    25   答案:            B
A        put
B        hung
C        placed
D        located
    26   答案:            D
A        sing
B        to sing
C        sung
D        singing
    27   答案:            C
A        soon
B        lastly
C        at last
D        eventually
    28   答案:            D
A        hat
B        cage
C        glove
D        stocking
    29   答案:            D
A        take
B        carry
C        find
D        leave


                            3
    30         答案:               A
A              games
B              roles
C              parts
D              tricks
3              The main purpose of this greeting is to 21 a good relationship
between the people concerned, and each language usually has 22 set phrases which
can be used for this purpose. Sometimes, though, there can be 23 differences in
the type of phrases which can be used, and cultural misunderstandings can easily
24   . The following is a true example.
A young British woman went to Hong Kong to work, and at the time of her 25 she
knew nothing about the Chinese culture or language. When she was at the bank to get
some money, the bank clerk asked her if she had had her lunch. She was extremely
surprised 26 such a question because in the British culture it would be regarded
as an indirect invitation to lunch. After this she proceeded to school and was even
more surprised when one of the teachers asked her the same question. By now she
realized that it could not be an invitation, but was puzzled 27 why they asked
it. In the following days she was asked the same question again and again, and she
spent hours trying to 28      why so many people kept asking her this. Eventually she
came to a     29    : the people must be concerned her health. She was somewhat
underweight at the time, and so she concluded they must be worrying that she was not
eating properly! Only much later     30 that the question had no real significances
at all-it was merely a greeting.

    21        答案:               B
A             build on
B             build up
C             build into
D             build out
    22        答案:               A
A             a number of
B             the number of
C             the amount of
D             an amount of
    23        答案:               C
A             considered
B             considering
C             considerable
D             considerate
    24        答案:               B
A             raise
B             result
C             arouse
D             lead


                                                                                    4
 25            答案:                D
A              arrive
B              arrived
C              arrives
D              arrival
  26           答案:                B
A              on
B              at
C              to
D              with
  27           答案:                B
A              with regards
B              as to
C              as if
D              as far as
  28           答案:                D
A              work at
B              work on
C              work with
D              work out
  29           答案:                D
A              reason
B              target
C              finish
D              conclusion
  30           答案:                C
A              she discovered
B              she did discover
C              did she discover
D              does she discover
6              "Move ahead or 21 behind" is the American attitude that leads to
researching, experimenting and exploring. Time is a 22 and precious resource to
them, so every minute must count. City people are always hurrying to get where they
are going, seeking attention in a store and 23 others out of way as they try to
complete their tasks. Brief conversations, little exchanges with strangers, relaxed
business chats over coffee or a welcoming cup of tea don't 24 because people hate
"wasting" too much time. Americans assess others professionally rather than socially,
so they start talking business immediately 25 they are always conscious of time.
Because they work hard at      26    time, they have meetings     27   communication
equipment like television screens and telephones rather than personal contacts. In
America, telephones save time and energy because telephone service is excellent 28
mail is less efficient. Usually, the more important a job is, the 29 effort will
be poured 30 it to "get it moving".



                                                                                    5
    21   答案:           B
A        feel
B        fall
C        felt
D        fell
    22   答案:           C
A        really
B        indeed
C        real
D        much
    23   答案:           D
A        pulling
B        drawing
C        keeping
D        pushing
    24   答案:           A
A        occur
B        occurrence
C        happens
D        hold
    25   答案:           D
A        although
B        so
C        but
D        since
    26   答案:           B
A        save
B        saving
C        waste
D        wasting
    27   答案:           D
A        in
B        for
C        at
D        through
    28   答案:           A
A        whereas
B        moreover
C        therefore
D        furthermore
    29   答案:           C
A        most
B        much
C        more


                           6
D              many
  30           答案:                B
A              onto
B              into
C              for
D              to
7              After I had been waiting there for more than ten minutes, I felt certain
I must have missed the bus. There was only one thing I could do about that: I should
just have to walk home. Of course it was entirely my own fault. Jane had told me the
last bus always 21 at Stutton at ten thirty and it was now ten to eleven.
It would 22 me at least an hour and a half and maybe more to walk to my room in
Forest End. But there was a 23 moon in the sky and I was quite used to walking
much 24 than that. Perhaps I 25 better not take the short cut through the
woods, I might easily 26 my way in the darkness.
I was halfway home when I heard a car moving slowly behind me. Could it be my
imagination 27 was it actually following me down the hill? Why ever should it
be making such slow progress? I decided to 28 what was the matter, so I stood
still 29 it stopped just near me, the door opened and a man got out, who said
anxiously, "Have you any idea where we can get petrol at this time of night? We've
just 30 out completely."
  21           答案:                C
A              crossed
B              past
C              stopped
D              passed
  22           答案:                C
A              spend
B              cost
C              take
D              use
  23           答案:                D
A              empty
B              complete
C              white
D              full
  24           答案:                B
A              far
B              farther
C              further
D              fast
  25           答案:                A
A              had
B              would
C              did


                                                                                      7
D              should
  26           答案:               D
A              see
B              find
C              notice
D              lose
  27           答案:               A
A              or
B              and
C              but
D              while
  28           答案:               B
A              work out
B              find out
C              put out
D              make out
  29           答案:               D
A              even if
B              as if
C              though
D              until
  30           答案:               B
A              driven
B              run
C              came
D              going
8              While I was waiting to enter university, I saw in a newspaper a teaching
job wanted at a school about ten miles from where I lived. Being very short of money
and wanting to do something useful, I applied, fearing as I did so, that without a
degree and with no 21 of teaching my chances of getting the job were 22 .
However, three days later, a letter arrived, calling me to Croydon for a meeting with
the headmaster. It was clearly the 23 himself that open the door. He was short
and round.
"The school," he said, "is made up of one class of twenty-four boys between seven
and thirteen." I should have to teach all the subjects except art, 24 _ he taught
himself. I should have to divide the class into 25 groups and teach them in turn
at three different 26 . And I was disappointed at the thought of teaching maths,
a subject at which I wasn't very 27 at school. Worse perhaps was the idea of 28
to teach them on Saturday afternoon because most of my friends would be enjoying
themselves at that time.
Before I had time to ask about my salary, he got up to his 29 . "Now," he said,
"you'd better meet my wife. She is the one who really 30 this school."
  21           答案:               B
A              material


                                                                                      8
B        experience
C        means
D        books
    22   答案:           D
A        nice
B        great
C        helpful
D        slight
    23   答案:           B
A        teacher
B        headmaster
C        student
D        door-keeper
    24   答案:           A
A        which
B        that
C        what
D        this
    25   答案:           C
A        one
B        two
C        three
D        four
    26   答案:           C
A        classes
B        subjects
C        levels
D        places
    27   答案:           D
A        poor
B        interested
C        weak
D        good
    28   答案:           B
A        forcing
B        having
C        forgetting
D        managing
    29   答案:           B
A        letter
B        feet
C        hands
D        wife
    30   答案:           A


                           9
A              runs
B              stars
C              observes
D              likes
9              Mr. Smith was a wealthy industrialist, but he was not __21__ with life.
He didn't sleep well and his food did not agree with him. The situation lasted for
some time. Finally, after a __22__ of sleepless nights, he decided to consult his
doctor. The doctor advised a change of surroundings. "Go abroad," he said. "But I'm
not good at foreign languages" said Mr. Smith. "It doesn't matter," said the doctor,
"It won't __23__ you to talk a little less. Start on a voyage. Try to reduce your
weight. _ 24__ rich food". Mr. Smith went to Switzerland. He did not know French or
German, and had to communicate through gestures. He attended a physical training
course. The instructor made him __25__ his arms and shake his head rapidly. He had
to lie on the ground and __26__ his right and left legs alternately. After a time
his __27__ grew hard and firm. He almost put aside his financial worries and nearly
forgot the importance of __28__ more money. He even began to notice individual trees
and individual birds. He ate and slept well. __29__ he returned home. But
unfortunately his improvement was temporary. Soon he was worried about his __30__,
his profits, his savings, his success in a competitive society, and things in general.
  21           答案:                C
A              good
B              interested
C              satisfied
D              healthy
  22           答案:                A
A              series
B              course
C              amount
D              few
  23           答案:                B
A              stop
B              hurt
C              help
D              prevent
  24           答案:                C
A              Eat
B              Prepare
C              Avoid
D              Try
  25           答案:                A
A              move
B              turn
C              remove
D              open


                                                                                    10
 26           答案:               B
A             rise
B             raise
C             remove
D             extend
  27          答案:               A
A             bones
B             figure
C             remove
D             extend
  28          答案:               C
A             creating
B             producing
C             making
D             taking
  29          答案:               D
A             Luckily
B             Finally
C             Reluctantly
D             Pleasantly
  30          答案:               A
A             property
B             health
C             food
D             fame
10            Eastern Europe is considered the most polluted of all the world's 21
areas because heavy metals   22 coal mining have contaminated the area's waters.
Many rivers, land, and forests are biologically       23    from pollution. Ghana's
forest protection program has succeeded        24      strengthening the country's
agricultural base and 25     a new source of wealth to 26 . It remains to be seen
27   these measures will have enough impact to       28    the rate of removing the
forests. Indonesia is facing the 29 problems of providing enough food, shelter
and employment for its large population, and 30 birth control.
  21          答案:               C
A             industries
B             industrialist
C             industrialized
D             industrialize
  22          答案:               B
A             leading to
B             from
C             with
D             like
  23          答案:               A


                                                                                 11
A              dead
B              died
C              death
D              die
  24           答案:              D
A              on
B              for
C              at
D              in
  25           答案:              B
A              destroyed
B              bringing
C              brought
D              destroying
  26           答案:              C
A              valley
B              villager
C              villagers
D              village
  27           答案:              D
A              weather
B              what
C              which
D              whether
  28           答案:              A
A              slow
B              promote
C              make
D              rise
  29           答案:              D
A              series
B              service
C              servers
D              serious
  30           答案:              B
A              exercise
B              encouraging
C              stopping
D              reduce
11             Last night, a fire broke out in Ann's house in Manchester.
Ann's 21 were out of town for the weekend when something wrong in the room caused
the fire to start in the middle of the night. The 22 was waken up by the family
dog, Danny, who was barking loudly in the back garden. Ann smelled something 23
_. She 24 and 25 ran through the smoke-filled house to wake her old brother,


                                                                               12
Frank.
When Frank would not wake up, Ann got some help from the dog. Frank's unconscious
body was far too    26   for the little girl to move alone , but the    27   girl
brought the dog 28 and tied the dog's lend(牵狗的皮带)to Frank's left ankle.
She then held her brother's right ankle, and together the girl and the dog     29
Frank to safety.
The 10-year-old girl, Ann, 30 her big brother from death.
  21          答案:               A
A             parents
B             brother and sister
C             friends
D             classmates
  22          答案:               C
A             child
B             boy
C             girl
D             dog
  23          答案:               D
A             delicious
B             bad
C             burn
D             burning
  24          答案:               C
A             stood up
B             woke up
C             got up
D             put up
  25          答案:               A
A             at once
B             at first
C             at last
D             at that moment
  26          答案:               D
A             big
B             small
C             light
D             heavy
  27          答案:               C
A             careless
B             busy
C             clever
D             careful
  28          答案:               A
A             inside


                                                                               13
B              outside
C              back
D              near
  29           答案:               B
A              pushed
B              pulled
C              carded
D              made
  30           答案:               D
A              was received
B              got
C              was saved
D              saved
12              American inventor Thomas Edison's manufacturing facilities in New
Jersey were heavily 21       by fire one night in December 1914. Edison lost almost
$1-million worth of equipment 22 the record of much of his work.
The next morning, talking about the charred embers(灰烬) of his hopes and dreams,
the 23 man said: "There is value in disaster. All our mistakes are 24 . Now
we can start anew."
Edison understood a great     25 of living: almost any situation-good or bad-is
26    by the attitude we bring to it. Tough-minded optimists approach problems with
a can-do philosophy(哲学) and emerge stronger 27 tragedies(悲剧). Indeed,
recent studies suggest that optimistic people earn more money, do 28 in school,
are healthier and perhaps even live longer than pessimists.
                   (               ,                              (
As a psychotherapist 心理治疗专家) I've studied 29 motivates 激励)optimists,
analyzing the lives of several hundred people over the years. While many suffered
                                                                (沮丧) and keeping
terrible setbacks, all learned techniques for defeating dejection
their enthusiasm high during difficult periods. I believe that if you, too, 30
these time-tested ideas, you will get more from life.

    21        答案:               B
A             met
B             damaged
C             spoiled
D             disturbed
    22        答案:               A
A             and
B             but also
C             while
D             or
    23        答案:               D
A             67 year old
B             67-years-old
C             67 years' old


                                                                                 14
D               67-year-old
  24            答案:                C
A               burned away
B               burned low
C               burned up
D               burned off
  25            答案:                A
A               principle
B               prince
C               province
D               profession
  26            答案:                D
A               effected
B               acted
C               reflected
D               affected
  27            答案:                D
A               to
B               apart
C               in
D               from
  28            答案:                C
A               slower
B               harder
C               better
D               worse
  29            答案:                A
A               what
B               that
C               which
D               where
  30            答案:                B
A               adapt
B               adopt
C               admit
D               admire
13              Your boss has a bigger vocabulary than you have. That's one good reason
21    he's your boss.
   This discovery has been made in the word laboratories of the world. Not by
theoretical English professors, 22 by practical, hard-headed(精明的) scholars
23    have been searching for the secrets of success.
   After a host of(许多) experiments and years of testing they have found out that
if your vocabulary is limited your chances of success are limited and that one of
the easiest and quickest ways to 24 is by consciously building up your knowledge


                                                                                     15
of words.
   Your words are your keys for your 25 . And the more words you have 26 your
command,the deeper, clearer and more accurate will be your thinking.
   A command of English will not only improve the processes of your mind. It will 27
give you assurance; build your self-confidence; lend colour to your personality;
increase your popularity. Your vocabulary is you.
   If you consciously increase your vocabulary you will unconsciously              28
yourself to a more important station in life, and the new and higher position you
have won will,      29 , give you a better opportunity for further          30   your
vocabulary. It is a beautiful and successful cycle.
  21            答案:               A
A               why
B               what
C               which
D               that
  22            答案:               B
A               nor
B               but
C               instead
D               or
  23            答案:               D
A               whom
B               which
C               where
D               who
  24            答案:               C
A               get through
B               get over
C               get ahead
D               get together
  25            答案:               A
A               thoughts
B               pictures
C               plans
D               dreams
  26            答案:               B
A               in
B               at
C               with
D               on
  27            答案:               D
A               too
B               again
C               however


                                                                                   16
D               also
  28            答案:                B
A               rise
B               raise
C               arise
D               praise
  29            答案:                C
A               in brief
B               in conclusion
C               in turn
D               in time
  30            答案:                B
A               enabling
B               enriching
C               encouraging
D               encountering
15              Many people may fail to notice it, but as a matter of fact, most women
are serious about their work. On the job, they 21 equal pay for equal work. Work
gives a man identity and status. The same often holds 22 for a woman. They want
their husbands to take their jobs as 23 as they take their own.
In one instance, a registered nurse followed her sales-executive husband 24 the
country as he climbed the corporate ladder(争取晋升). Each time he was 25 , the
wife quitted her previous job and found a new position for herself without saying
anything. Because the family focused more strongly on the father's career, he tended
to think that his wife's jobs were just jobs. It wasn't 26 she received an award
from her hospital during Nursing Recognition Week, and he heard her tearful acceptance
speech, that he realized how emotionally 27 she was to her profession.
"I felt embarrassed", the husband recalled. "Everyone was applauding (鼓掌) and 28
for a woman I didn't know at all." Now the executive makes a 29 of really listening
when his wife talks about her work. Not surprisingly, their relationship has grown
30    the improved communication.
  21            答案:                C
A               explain
B               explore
C               expect
D               excuse
  22            答案:                D
A               real
B               right
C               tight
D               true
  23            答案:                B
A               carefully
B               seriously


                                                                                    17
C              easily
D              hardly
  24           答案:                A
A              around
B              above
C              on
D              beyond
  25           答案:                B
A              translated
B              transferred
C              transformed
D              transmitted
  26           答案:                A
A              until
B              then
C              when
D              till
  27           答案:                C
A              admitted
B              liked
C              attached
D              inclined
  28           答案:                B
A              fighting
B              cheering
C              weeping
D              cheating
  29           答案:                D
A              rule
B              tradition
C              start
D              point
  30           答案:                C
A              in that
B              because
C              because of
D              since
16             When Beethoven was 28, he began to notice a strange noise in his 21 .
As it grew worse, he went to see doctors, and was told that he was going deaf. This
was too much for any composer to 22 . Beethoven was in despair; he was sure that
he was going to die. He went to the countryside 23 he wrote a long farewell letter
to his brothers, describing 24 sad and lonely his deafness made him. He longed
to die.
   In fact, Beethoven did something braver than dying. He gathered his courage and


                                                                                 18
went on writing music, though he could hear 25 he wrote more and more faintly.
He wrote the music for which we remember him best 26 he became deaf. This music
was very different from any that had been composed before. 27 the elegant(优
雅的) and grand music that earlier composers had written for their wealthy listeners,
Beethoven wrote stormy, exciting music which reminds us          28 his troubled and
                                     (
courageous life. His Heroic Symphony 交响曲)and Fifth Symphony both show his courage
in struggling with his fate.
     In time he went completely deaf, but he wrote more gloriously(辉煌地) than ever,
for he could "hear" his music in his mind. He was lonely and often unhappy, but 29
this, he often wrote joyful music. Because of his courage and strong 30 , his
music has given joy and inspiration to millions of people.
  21            答案:                B
A                eyes
B                ears
C               nose
D                mouth
  22            答案:                D
A                understand
B                keep
C                catch
D                bear
  23            答案:                C
A                which
B                what
C                where
D                when
  24            答案:                A
A                how
B                so
C                such
D                very
  25            答案:                B
A                which
B                what
C                that
D                all
  26            答案:                B
A                until
B                after
C                before
D                later
  27            答案:                C
A                in addition to
B                on the contrary


                                                                                  19
C              Instead of
D              by comparison
  28           答案:               A
A              of
B              about
C              in
D              from
  29           答案:               D
A              in view of
B              in relation to
C              in regard to
D              in spite of
  30           答案:               B
A              mind
B              will
C              heart
D              strength
17             In its home country of Germany, the hot dog was called the frankfurter.
It was named 21       Frankfurt, a German city. Frankfurters were first sold in the
United States in the 1860s. Americans called frankfurters "dachshund sausages". A
dachshund is a dog from Germany 22 a very long body and short legs. Dachshund
sausages first became popular in New York, especially at baseball games. At games
they were sold by men who kept them 23 in hot-water tanks.
   As the men walked     24   the rows of people,they yelled, "Get your dachshund
sausages! Get your hot dachshund sausages!" People got the sausages on buns, a special
bread.
     25 in 1906 a newspaper cartoonist named Tad Dorgan went to a baseball game.
26    he saw the men with the dachshund sausages, he got an idea as a cartoon. The
next day at the newspaper office he 27 a bun with a dachshund inside --         28 a
dachshund sausage, but a dachshund. Dorgan 29 how to spell dachshund. Under the
cartoon, he wrote "Get your dachshund sausages!"
     The cartoon was a sensation, and so was the new name. If you go to a baseball
game today, you can still see sellers walking 30 with hot-water tanks. As they
walk up and down the rows they yell:"Get your hot dogs here! Get your hot dogs!"
  21           答案:               B
A              with
B              after
C              by
D              of
  22           答案:               D
A              by
B              of
C              at
D              with


                                                                                    20
 23           答案:              C
A             cool
B             hot
C             warm
D             cold
  24          答案:              B
A             sometimes
B             up and down
C             someday
D             here and there
  25          答案:              D
A             A day
B             Any day
C             Certain
D             One day
  26          答案:              A
A             When
B             While
C             If
D             Whether
  27          答案:              C
A             called
B             made
C             drew
D             bought
  28          答案:              C
A             no
B             without
C             not
D             for
  29          答案:              A
A             didn't know
B             wonders
C             was sure
D             never knows
  30          答案:              B
A             over
B             around
C             fast
D             all day
18                Most people have no idea of the hard work and worry that go into
the collecting of those fascinating birds and animals that they pay to see in the
zoo. One of the questions that is always asked of me is 21 I became an animal
collector in the first place.The answer is that I have always been interested in


                                                                                21
animals and zoos. According to my parents, the first word I was able to say with any
22    was not the conventional “mamma” or “daddy”, but the word “zoo”, which
I would 23 over and over again with a shrill voice until someone, in groups to
24    me up, would take me to the zoo. When I was growing a little older, we lived
in Greece and I had a great      25 of pets, ranging from owls to seahorses, and I
spent all my spare time 26 the countryside in search of fresh specimens to 27
to my collection of pets. Later on I went for a year to the City Zoo, as a student
aide to get experience of the large animals, such as lions, bears, bison and ostriches,
which were not easy to keep at home. When I left, I successfully had enough money
of my own to be able to 28 my first trip and I have been going 29 ever since
then. Though a collector's job is not an easy one and is full of disappointments,
it is certainly a job which will appeal to all those who love animals and 30 .
  21           答案:                A
A               how
B               where
C               when
D               whether
  22           答案:                A
A               clarity
B               emotion
C               sentiment
D               affection
  23           答案:                D
A               recite
B               recognize
C               read
D               repeat
  24           答案:                B
A               close
B               shut
C               stop
D               comfort
  25           答案:                C
A               many
B               amount
C               number
D               supply
  26           答案:                D
A               living
B               cultivating
C               reclaiming
D               exploring
  27           答案:                C
A               increase


                                                                                     22
B              include
C              add
D              enrich
  28           答案:                D
A              pay
B              provide
C              allow
D              finance
  29           答案:                B
A              normally
B              regularly
C              usually
D              often
  30           答案:                B
A              excursion
B              travel
C              journey
D              trip
19             Art is not limited to literature. It 21 as building designing, as
music, and certainly as paintings, water colors, oils, and other 22 . The pictures
on the following pages, as well as the art collections, throughout the text, are meant
to help you realize that certain things are 23 to all art forms. Once he has
decided whether he will write, build or paint, 24 must choose material, shape
it, and aim it to 25 his artistic purpose.
    You will find, too, that Man's strong wish or hope to picture his surroundings,
his thoughts, and his feelings is not 26 to any age or culture. The 27 of
art passed down from their great grandfathers' grandfathers is used as a supply to
which artists may turn for     28 common to all men. Suppose you wanted to paint a
picture that would, somehow, suggest a folk-tale. Would your characters be modern
or would they be simple? Careful 29 _ of art works in Part Six of the book will
help you to answer these questions, and to see how the         30   of one art form,
literature, can be changed to those of another art form, paintings.
  21           答案:                A
A              appears
B              looks
C              seems
D              serves
  22           答案:                D
A              shapes
B              sizes
C              colors
D              forms
  23           答案:                A
A              common


                                                                                    23
B              the same
C              shared
D              public
  24           答案:               A
A              an artist
B              a man
C              a student
D              anyone
  25           答案:               D
A              finish
B              complete
C              get to
D              achieve
  26           答案:               C
A              controlled
B              led
C              limited
D              fixed up
  27           答案:               B
A              collections
B              wealth
C              streams
D              life
  28           答案:               A
A              subjects
B              helps
C              characters
D              feelings
  29           答案:               D
A              test
B              watching
C              experiment
D              examination
  30           答案:               B
A              quantities
B              qualities
C              numbers
D              amount
20             删除 A land free from destruction, plus wealth, natural resources, and
labor supply-all these were important factor in helping England to become the center
for the Industrial Revolution. 21 they were not enough. Something else was needed
to start the industrial process. That "something special" was men 22 individuals
who could invent machines, find new        23     of power, and establish business
organizations to reshape society.


                                                                                  24
The men who create the machines of the Industrial Revolution            24    from many
backgrounds and many occupations. Many of them were 25 inventors than scientists.
A man who is a pure scientist is primarily interested in doing his research accurately.
He is not necessarily working 26 that his findings can be used.
An inventor or one interested in applied science is all trying to make something that
has a concrete use. He may try to solve a problem by using the theories 27 science
or by experimenting through trial and error. Regardless of his method, he is working
to obtain a      28 result: the construction of a harvesting machine, the burning
of a light bulb, or one of 16 other objectives.
     Most of the people who developed the machines of the Industrial Revolution were
inventors, not trained scientists. A few were both scientists and inventors. Even
those who had 29 or no training in science might not have made their inventions
30    a groundwork had not been laid by scientists years ago.
  21            答案:                A
A               But
B               And
C               Besides
D               Even
  22            答案:                D
A               generating
B               effective
C               motivating
D               creative
  23            答案:                B
A               origins
B               sources
C               bases
D               discoveries
  24            答案:                A
A               came
B               arrived
C               stemmed
D               appeared
  25            答案:                C
A               less
B               better
C               more
D               worse
  26            答案:                D
A               now
B               and
C               all
D               so
  27            答案:                C


                                                                                    25
A              of
B              with
C              to
D              as
  28           答案:               A
A              single
B              sole
C              specialized
D              specific
  29           答案:               C
A              little
B              much
C              some
D              any
  30           答案:               A
A              as
B              if
C              because
D              while
21              删除 Many teachers worry about the effects of television on young
people. According to studies, 21 children spend more time watching television
than they spend in school. Because 22 so much viewing, children may not 23 the
habit of 24 and the ability to enjoy 25 .No one worries much about the radio
programs young people listen to, although radios can be very  26 . Teachers also
wonder about the effects of television commercials. 27 one year the 28 child
will see 25,000 television commercials, all planned and 29 written by grown-ups
to make children want things that they don't 30 need really.
  21           答案:               B
A              any
B              some
C              no
D              none
  22           答案:               C
A              that
B              for
C              of
D              to
  23           答案:               A
A              develop
B              be develop
C              be developed
D              develops
  24           答案:               D
A              read


                                                                              26
B              reads
C              to read
D              reading
  25           答案:               B
A              him
B              themselves
C              them
D              they
  26           答案:               C
A              noise
B              quiet
C              noisy
D              calm
  27           答案:               C
A              On
B              In
C              At
D              For
  28           答案:               C
A              average
B              rare
C              more
D              special
  29           答案:               A
A              written
B              write
C              wrote
D              writes
  30           答案:               C
A              really
B              rarely
C              quite
D              specially
22             The air surrounding us is important to everyone. Without air, we could
not 21 . Everyone understands that. But air is necessary in many other ways that
are not always so 22 or widely known.
For example, if we did not have air, there would be no sound. Sound travels through
air. 23 there is no air, there is no sound. Without air, there would be no fire.
There would be no automobiles, 24 motors need air in order to operate.
Without air there would be no wind or clouds. There would be no 25 , as we know
it. The night time would be very cold, the days very hot. We would be 26 to seek
shelters from the sun, as there would be no atmosphere to protect us from the sun's
27   rays.
The atmosphere is all the air surrounding the 28 . Atmosphere pressure is the


                                                                                   27
weight of all the air against the surface of the earth. If we did not have        29
pressure, we could not have automobile tires. The tires would swell or burst if they
did not have the pressure of the atmosphere 30 their surface.

    21        答案:               C
A             living
B             lively
C             exist
D             alive
    22        答案:               A
A             obvious
B             obviously
C             clearly
D             knowingly
    23        答案:               C
A             What
B             Which
C             Where
D             Why
    24        答案:               B
A             however
B             since
C             but
D             and
    25        答案:               C
A             air
B             breeze
C             weather
D             climate
    26        答案:               D
A             forcing
B             forceful
C             force
D             forced
    27        答案:               A
A             deadly
B             dead
C             dying
D             death
    28        答案:               B
A             floor
B             earth
C             land
D             ground


                                                                                  28
    29         答案:                C
A              the atmosphere
B              atmosphere
C              atmospheric
D              atmospherics
  30           答案:                D
A              under
B              above
C              beneath
D              against
23             The United States is a land of many cultures. Its people have come from
different homelands and have 21 their own customs from all parts of the world.
Although thy live and work in a modern 22 society, they want to preserve their
traditions and pass them     23 to their children. So, in their daily lives, many
Americans continue to speak their native languages as well as English. they cook
traditional foods. They practice their own religions and have their own way of
thinking 24 life and death. In addition, they set aside time to celebrate the
important occasions of their native culture 25 special ceremonies.
Every part of the United States has special celebrations, depending on the particular
national groups that live in the area. In Hawaii, America's island state in the Pacific
Ocean, there are 26 people of Asian ancestry. Many of these Asians are of Japanese,
Chinese, or Polynesian 27 . Immigrants from China and Japan arrived in Hawaii in
great numbers during the past century. The early Polynesians came to Hawaii from South
Pacific islands more than a thousand years 28 any other people. The Asians left
rich traditions for their    29 to follow. Today Hawaiians honor the memory of their
ancestors 30 special feasts and festivals.

    21         答案:               D
A              borrowed
B              had
C              developed
D              brought
    22         答案:               A
A              changing
B              excited
C              exciting
D              changed
    23         答案:               C
A              off
B              through
C              on
D              in
    24         答案:               D
A              out


                                                                                    29
B              of
C              for
D              about
  25           答案:                B
A              on
B              with
C              by
D              in
  26           答案:                D
A              much
B              little
C              most
D              many
  27           答案:                A
A              descent
B              dessert
C              desert
D              decency
  28           答案:                B
A              in front of
B              before
C              ago
D              ahead
  29           答案:                C
A              residents
B              delegates
C              descendants
D              representatives
  30           答案:                D
A              on
B              under
C              for
D              with
24             Before the 20th century the horse provided day to day transportation
in the United States. Trains were used only for long-distance transportation.
Today the car is the most popular 21 of transportation in all the United States.
It has completely replaced the horse as a means of everyday transportation. Americans
use their cars for 22 90 per cent of all personal travel.
Most Americans are able to    23 cars. The average price of a recently-made car was
$2,500 in 1950, $2740 in 1960 and up to $4750 24 1975. During this period American
car manufacturers set about improving their products and work efficiently. As a result,
the yearly income of the 25 family increased from 1950 to 1975 faster than the
price of cars. For this reason 26 a new car takes a smaller part of a family's
total earnings today.


                                                                                    30
In 1951 27 it took 8.1 months of an average family's income to buy a new car.
In 1962 a new car 28 8.3 months of a family's annual earnings. By 1975 it only
took 4.75 months' income. In addition, the 1975 cars were technically     29   to
models from previous years.
The influence of the automobile extends throughout the economy 30 the car is so
important to Americans. Americans spend more money keeping their car running than
on any other item.
  21           答案:              C
A              kinds
B              types
C              means
D              sort
  22           答案:              B
A              hardly
B              nearly
C              certainly
D              somewhat
  23           答案:              A
A              buy
B              sell
C              race
D              see
  24           答案:              B
A              on
B              in
C              behind
D              about
  25           答案:              B
A              unusual
B              average
C              interested
D              biggest
  26           答案:              D
A              bringing
B              obtain
C              bought
D              purchasing
  27           答案:              A
A              proportionally
B              clearly
C              percentage
D              suddenly
  28           答案:              A
A              cost


                                                                               31
B              used
C              spent
D              needed
  29           答案:               C
A              famous
B              fastest
C              superior
D              purchasing
  30           答案:               D
A              then
B              which
C              so
D              as
25             There are more than forty universities in Britain-nearly twice as many
as in 1960. During the 1960s eight completely new ones more founded, and ten other
new ones were created 21      converting old colleges of technology into universities.
In the same period the number of students more than doubled, from 70, 000 to 22
than 200,000. By 1973 about 10% of men aged from eighteen to twenty-one were in
universities and about 5% of women. All the universities are private institutions.
Each has its 23 governing councils, including some local businessmen and local
politicians as 24 as a few academics(大学教师). The state began to give grants
to them fifty years ago, and by 1970 each university derived nearly all its 25
from state grants. Students have to pay fees and living costs, but every student may
receive from the local authority of the place 26 he lives a personal grant which
is enough to pay his full costs, including lodging and food unless his parents are
27 . Most students take jobs in the summer 28 about six weeks, but they do not
normally do outside work during the academic year. The Department of Education takes
29   for the payments which cover the whole expenditure of the universities, but it
does not exercise direct control. It can have an important influence         30   new
developments through its power to distribute funds, but it takes the advice of the
University Grants Committee, a body which is mainly composed of academics.
  21           答案:               B
A              with
B              by
C              at
D              into
  22           答案:               A
A              more
B              much
C              less
D              fewer
  23           答案:               C
A              self
B              kind


                                                                                   32
C              own
D              personal
  24           答案:               D
A              good
B              long
C              little
D              well
  25           答案:               D
A              suggestions
B              grades
C              profits
D              funds
  26           答案:               C
A              what
B              which
C              where
D              how
  27           答案:               D
A              poor
B              generous
C              kindhearted
D              rich
  28           答案:               D
A              at
B              since
C              with
D              for
  29           答案:               A
A              responsibility
B              advice
C              duty
D              pleasure
  30           答案:               C
A              at
B              to
C              on
D              form
26             Rumor is the most 21 way of spreading stories-by passing them on
from mouth to mouth. But civilized countries in normal times have better 22 of
news than rumor. They have radio, television, and newspapers. In times of stress and
confusion,    23 , rumor emerges and becomes widespread. At such           24    the
different kinds of news are in competition, the press, television, and radio versus
the grapevine. Especially rumors 25 spread when war requires censorship(审查,
检查) on many important matters. The customary news sources no longer give out enough


                                                                                 33
information. Since the people cannot learn      26   legitimate(合法的,正规的)
channels all that they are anxious to learn, they pick up "news" 27 they can and
when this happens, rumor thrives.
     Rumors are often repeated 28 by those who do not believe the tales. There
is a fascination about them. The reason is that the cleverly designed rumor gives
expression to something deep in the hearts of the victims-the fears, suspicions,
forbidden hopes, or daydreams which they hesitate to 29 directly. Pessimistic
(悲观的) rumors about defeat and disasters show that the people who repeat them
are worried and anxious. 30 rumors about record production or peace soon coming
point to complacency(满足,自得) or confidence-and often to overconfidence.
  21           答案:              A
A              primitive
B              important
C              impossible
D              outstanding
  22           答案:              C
A              means
B              ways
C              sources
D              resource
  23           答案:              B
A              and
B              however
C              so
D              therefore
  24           答案:              C
A              time
B              the times
C              times
D              the time
  25           答案:              A
A              do
B              did
C              are
D              were
  26           答案:              A
A              through
B              by
C              in
D              across
  27           答案:              A
A              wherever
B              where
C              whatever


                                                                               34
D              what
  28           答案:                B
A              ever
B              even
C              forever
D              much
  29           答案:                B
A              act
B              voice
C              behave
D              do
  30           答案:                C
A              Bad
B              Pessimistic
C              Optimistic
D              Good
27                  Men usually want to have their own way. They want to think and act
21   they like. No one, however, can have his own way all the time. 'Society' means
a group of people with the same laws and the same 22 of life. People in society
may make their own decisions, but these decisions ought not to be unjust or 23 to
others. One man's decisions may so easily harm another person. For example, a motorist
may be in a hurry to get to a friend's house. He sets out, driving at a full speed
like a competitor in a motor 24 . There are other 25 and also pedestrians on
the road. Suddenly there is a crash. 26 are screams and confusion. One careless
motorist has 27 another car. The collision has injured two of the passengers and
28    the third.    29    many road accidents happen     30   the thoughtlessness of
selfish drivers.
  21           答案:                A
A              as
B              as even
C              as though
D              as if
  22           答案:                C
A              approach
B              route
C              way
D              road
  23           答案:                A
A              harmful
B              harmless
C              harm
D              harmfully
  24           答案:                B
A              run


                                                                                    35
B               race
C               racing
D               running
  25            答案:               D
A               tools
B               trucks
C               bicycles
D               vehicles
  26            答案:               A
A               There
B               They
C               Where
D               Which
  27            答案:               C
A               beat
B               hitted
C               run into
D               punch
  28            答案:               B
A               murdered
B               killed
C               assassinated
D               executed
  29            答案:               D
A               A great deal of
B               Much
C               So
D               A great
  30            答案:               A
A               through
B               by
C               by means of
D               on
28              Many people would agree that stress is a major problem 21 modern
life. It is certainly true that worry and quarrel can cause all kinds of illnesses,
22    backache to severe headaches, or even more serious complaints such as high blood
pressure.
     Many of us think 23     stress as 24 that other people impose 25 us. We
often complain about how other people put us 26 pressure. But we should try not
to let such pressure 27      us. We should not forget that we are largely responsible
for some of the stress ourselves. We sometimes take 28 more work than our bodies
and our minds can handle. We should learn to 29 our limitations. We should 30
of which things are really important and which are not.
  21            答案:               B


                                                                                    36
A        on
B        in
C        with
D        under
    22   答案:          A
A        from
B        for
C        in
D        of
    23   答案:          B
A        about
B        of
C        out
D        in
    24   答案:          C
A        some thing
B        anything
C        something
D        any thing
    25   答案:          D
A        for
B        in
C        of
D        on
    26   答案:          A
A        under
B        in
C        of
D        for
    27   答案:          B
A        effect
B        affect
C        to effect
D        to affect
    28   答案:          B
A        out
B        on
C        off
D        in
    29   答案:          C
A        get
B        receive
C        accept
D        obtain


                          37
 30            答案:                A
A              be aware
B              know
C              understand
D              notice
29             The birth rate in Europe has been in a steady decrease since the 1960s.
European countries, realizing crisis is at hand, are providing great encouragement
for parents to create more babies in the 21st century.
Affairs Ministry concluded last year that, 21 the cash encouragement, some women
just don't want to be     22 holding the baby. "What we know is that it's good for
the 23 if men and women share the burden of having children," says Soren Kindlund,
family policy adviser at the Swedish ministry. 24 Swedish parents can take their
paid leave as they wish, men use a mere 12% of it; 60% of fathers do not take even
a(n) 25 day off work.
Experts fear that the tendency for women to use most of the parental leave could make
employers 26 to give young women the permanent jobs they need to qualify for paid
maternity leave(产假). In January, Sweden decided to allow new fathers two months'
paid leave, with a warning: use it or 27 it.
Kindlund admits that men are under 28 to stay at work, even though parental pay
comes out of the public purse. "It's not popular among bosses and perhaps with other
men in the workplace," he says. "But it's good for the father and for the child if
they can 29 a relationship."
In Norway, a(n) 30 policy has worked wonders. 70% of dads in Norway now take
parental leave, and the birthrate of 1.8 children per woman is one of the highest
in Europe.
  21           答案:                A
A              in spite of
B              at the cost of
C              in addition to
D              due to
  22           答案:                B
A              sent
B              left
C              caught
D              seen
  23           答案:                A
A              birthrate
B              income
C              health
D              spirit
  24           答案:                C
A              Just as
B              Only if
C              Even though


                                                                                    38
D              Now that
  25           答案:               D
A              one
B              mere
C              only
D              single
  26           答案:               B
A              willing
B              reluctant
C              likely
D              unable
  27           答案:               D
A              reserve
B              misuse
C              ignore
D              lose
  28           答案:               D
A              discussion
B              attack
C              control
D              pressure
  29           答案:               C
A              make out
B              add up
C              build up
D              set aside
  30           答案:               B
A              impersonal
B              similar
C              severe
D              global
30             Farmers, as we all know, have been having a hard time of it lately,
and have turned to new ways of earning income from their land. This involves not only
planting new kinds of crops, but some 21 ways of making money, the most unusual
of which has got to be sheep racing. Yes, you heard me      22 ! A farmer now holds
sheep races on a regular basis, and during the past year over 100, 000 people have
23   to watch the race. "I was passing the farm on my way to the sea for a holiday,"
one punter(赛马经纪人)told me, "and I thought I'd have a look. I didn't believe
it was serious , to tell you the truth." According to a regular visitor, betting on
sheep is more interesting than betting on horses."At proper horse races everyone has
already studied the form of the horse 24 , and there are clear favorites. 25
nobody has heard anything about these 26 ! Most people find it difficult to tell
one from another in any case." I stayed to watch the races, and I must admit that
I found it quite 27 . In a usual sheep race, half a dozen sheep race down hill


                                                                                   39
over a course of about half a mile. Food is waiting for them at the other end of the
28   just to give them some encouragement, I ought to add! The sheep run surprisingly
fast, 29 they have probably not eaten for a while. Anyway, the crowd around me
were obviously enjoying their day out at the races, 30 by their happy faces and
the sense of excitement.

    21        答案:               B
A             common
B             strange
C             swift
D             illegal
    22        答案:               D
A             honestly
B             surprisingly
C             completely
D             correctly
    23        答案:               C
A             showed off
B             brought up
C             turned up
D             looked forward
    24        答案:               C
A             behind time
B             in progress
C             in advance
D             in time
    25        答案:               A
A             But
B             Therefore
C             Moreover
D             Otherwise
    26        答案:               B
A             horses
B             sheep
C             races
D             stories
    27        答案:               A
A             exciting
B             dangerous
C             boring
D             peculiar
    28        答案:               C
A             race
B             hill


                                                                                   40
C               track
D               field
  29            答案:               D
A               if
B               so
C               yet
D               although
  30            答案:               B
A               observing
B               judging
C               considering
D               inferring
31              The British love to think of themselves as polite, and everyone knows
how fond they are of their "please"and "thank you". Even the simplest business such
as buying a train ticket requires 21 seven or eight of these. Another 22 of
our good manners is the queue. New-comers to Britain could be forgiven for thinking
that queuing rather than football was the 23 national sport. Finally, of course,
motorists generally stop at crossings. But does all this mean that the British should
consider themselves more polite than their European neighbors? I think not.
Take forms of address (称呼)for example . The average English person - 24 he
happens to work in a hotel or department store -would rather die than call a stranger
"Sir"or "Madam". Yet in some European countries this is the most basic of common
address. Our 25 "you" for everyone may appear more democratic, but it means that
we are forced to seek out complicated ways to express 26 . I am all for returning
to the use of "thee" and"thou"(Thee and thou are old-fashioned poetic words for "you");
"you" would be 27 for strangers and professional relationships.
And of course, the English find touching and other shows of friendship truly
terrifying. Have you noticed how the British 28 ever touch?
Personally, I find the Latin habit of shaking hands or a friendly kiss quite charming.
Try kissing the average English person, and they will either take two steps backwards
in horror, or, if their escape is 29 , you will find your lips touching the back
of their head. Now what could be 30 than that?

    21         答案:               A
A              at least
B              at most
C              less than
D              not more than
    22         答案:               C
A              signal
B              scene
C              sign
D              sight
    23         答案:               A


                                                                                    41
A              true
B              original
C              superior
D              advanced
  24           答案:               D
A              if
B              whether
C              when
D              unless
  25           答案:               A
A              universal
B              unique
C              regular
D              normal
  26           答案:               A
A              politeness
B              gratitude
C              democracy
D              consideration
  27           答案:               B
A              ordered
B              reserved
C              offered
D              stocked
  28           答案:               C
A              highly
B              mostly
C              hardly
D              nearly
  29           答案:               D
A              confirmed
B              assured
C              jammed
D              blocked
  30           答案:               B
A              better
B              ruder
C              more polite
D              more frightening
32             Mary and Peter were having a picnic with some friends near a river when
Mary shouted, "Look! That's a spaceship up there and it's going to land here."
Frightened by the strange spaceship, 21 of the young people got into their cars
and drove away as quickly as possible. Peter loved Mary and always stayed close to
her. They, more 22 than frightened, watched the spaceship land and saw a door


                                                                                    42
open. When nobody came out, they went to look 23 it, In the center of the floor,
there was a pile of food. Peter followed Mary into the spaceship and did not 24
the door close behind him. The temperature fell rapidly and the two young people lost
their 25 .
When they came to, they were 26 to see that they were back by the river again.
The spaceship had gone. 27 car was nearby.
   "What happened?" asked Mary. Peter scratched his head, saying slowly, "Don't ask
me. Perhaps we had a 28 . Come on. It's time to go home."
After driving about fifty meters, they found their way blocked by a thick wall made
of something like 29 . On the other side of the wall, a few strange beings stopped
to look through it and read a notice which, translated into English, said: "New
arrivals at Zoo: a pair of 30 inhabitants in their natural surroundings with
their house on wheels."
  21           答案:               D
A              both
B              all
C              several
D              most
  22           答案:               B
A              tired
B              curious
C              confused
D              astonished
  23           答案:               C
A              at
B              for
C              into
D              around
  24           答案:               A
A              hear
B              watch
C              let
D              make
  25           答案:               D
A              way
B              weight
C              speech
D              consciousness
  26           答案:               C
A              pleased
B              disturbed
C              surprised
D              disappointed
  27           答案:               C


                                                                                   43
A               A
B               Another
C               Their
D               No
  28            答案:               B
A               game
B               dream
C               mistake
D               problem
  29            答案:               A
A               glass
B               stone
C               wood
D               steel
  30            答案:               D
A               city
B               space
C               land
D               earth
33              Why is setting goals important? Because goals can help you do, be, and
experience everything you want in life. 21 just letting life happen to you, goals
allow you to make your life happen. Successful people 22        how their life should
be and set lots of goals. By setting goals you are 23 your life. It's like having
a    24   to show you where you want to go. Think of it this way. There are         25
drivers. One has a destination (目的地) in mind (her goal) which can be found on
a map. She can drive straight there without any 26 time or wrong turns. The other
driver has no goal or destination or map. She starts off at the same time from the
same place as the first driver, 27 she drives aimlessly around, never getting
anywhere, just 28         gas. Which driver do you want to be?
   Winners in life set goals and follow through on them. They decide what they want
in life and then get there by making 29 and setting goals. 30 people just
let life happen by accident. Goals aren't difficult to set ad they aren't difficult
to reach. It's up to you to find out what your goals really are. You are the one who
must decide what to achieve and in what direction to aim your life.
  21            答案:               B
A               Because of
B               Instead of
C               In spite of
D               In addition to
  22            答案:               A
A               imagine
B               discuss
C               experience
D               show


                                                                                    44
 23            答案:                B
A              going on with
B              taking control of
C              getting along with
D              taking advantage of
  24           答案:                C
A              guide
B              friend
C              map
D              sign
  25           答案:                A
A              two
B              such
C              some
D              good
  26           答案:                D
A              free
B              dull
C              fixed
D              wasted
  27           答案:                C
A              or
B              for
C              but
D              so
  28           答案:                B
A              thinking of
B              using up
C              turning off
D              paying for
  29           答案:                A
A              plans
B              money
C              friends
D              maps
  30           答案:                D
A              Lucky
B              Young
C              Ordinary
D              Unsuccessful
34             One day a woman got into her car and started driving home after work.
Suddenly, 21 saw a yell car behind her. 22 was a man. When she turned left,
the yellow car turned left. When she turned right, the yellow car turned right, 23 .
When she stopped 24 the traffic lights, the yellow car stopped behind her. The


                                                                                 45
woman was afraid, so she drove 25 to the police station. She was very 26 when
she found the car stopped behind her. At that time, a young man was standing outside
the police station. The woman was very happy to see him. She knew that he was a
policeman 27 he was wearing a police uniform. She jumped 28 her car and ran
to the policeman. She asked him to arrest the man in the yellow car, so the policeman
walked to the man.
The man 29 to run away when he saw the policeman. He just smiled 30           said to
the woman, "I want to give this purse back to you, madam. I think you dropped it on
the street."
  21           答案:               C
A              he
B              her
C              she
D              we
  22           答案:               B
A              The worker
B              The driver
C              The man
D              The policeman
  23           答案:               C
A              also
B              either
C              too
D              slowly
  24           答案:               D
A              in
B              on
C              to
D              at
  25           答案:               A
A              quickly
B              easily
C              happily
D              casually
  26           答案:               C
A              exciting
B              excited
C              surprised
D              surprising
  27           答案:               B
A              when
B              because
C              after
D              with


                                                                                   46
    28          答案:               C
A               open
B               locked
C               out of
D               out
  29            答案:               B
A               refused
B               didn't try
C               tried in vain
D               failed
  30            答案:               D
A               but
B               so
C               or
D               and
35              Consider these situations: You have just read an excellent book and
want to tell a friend about it. You have seen an exciting movie and want to 21 your
instructor to go to see it. You have heard an inspiring lecture, and want to 22
your newfound knowledge with a roommate who didn't attend the lecture.
How to give this type of __23__? You could tell everything you __24__ about the book,
movie, or lecture, but you will probably just want to select the __25__ points and
tell these to your listener. This, of course, is called summarizing.
To create a good summary-one that is both accurate and brief-you need to follow two
steps. First, __26__ information by reading, taking notes, or listening carefully
so your summary is as brief as possible but still accurate and __27__. Your audience
will help you decide how thorough you need to be. If you give your summary to __28__,
perhaps for an examination, it will need to be extremely complete __29__ accurate.
You will need to keep in mind any __30__ your instructor might have given you during
the lecture to indicate what he or she considers especially important. If you are
summarizing a movie for a friend, you can be less thorough. Part of the task of
summarizing is knowing what to include and what to leave out.

    21        答案:               C
A             request
B             remind
C             persuade
D             expect
    22        答案:               A
A             share
B             talk
C             show
D             discuss
    23        答案:               B
A             knowledge


                                                                                   47
B              information
C              instruction
D              technology
  24           答案:               B
A              write down
B              remember
C              believe
D              prepare
  25           答案:               D
A              leading
B              impressive
C              chief
D              major
  26           答案:               C
A              send
B              analyze
C              receive
D              gather
  27           答案:               D
A              readable
B              related
C              complete
D              acceptable
  28           答案:               C
A              an instructor
B              a friend
C              your family
D              your audience
  29           答案:               C
A              but
B              or
C              as well as
D              instead of
  30           答案:               B
A              talks
B              passages
C              clues
D              stories
36             An old woman suddenly went blind. She gave a doctor a lot of money if
he could make her 21 again. "If you fail," she said, "You will get 22 ." The
doctor agreed.
The doctor soon discovered    23 was wrong with her eyes, but he decided not to cure
her right away, 24      each time he visited, he secretly took some of her things.
When he had taken everything, he was going to cure her blindness and set a large bill.


                                                                                    48
Now when the old woman could see again, she noticed that all her things had gone and
she 25 to pay the bill, so the doctor took her to a judge.
  " 26 the doctor says is true," she said to the judge, "but I am not well 27
because I still 28        any of the things in my house."
The old woman 29 the case and the doctor went angry unhappily 30 getting his
pay.
  21           答案:               A
A              see
B              to see
C              look
D              to look
  22           答案:               B
A              anything
B              nothing
C              something
D              everything
  23           答案:               C
A              which
B              that
C              what
D              it
  24           答案:               C
A              sticks
B              fans
C              wings
D              flags
  25           答案:               D
A              hands
B              feet
C              head
D              shoulders
  26           答案:               C
A              Well
B              Differently
C              Instead
D              Hopefully
  27           答案:               C
A              had
B              made
C              took
D              got
  28           答案:               A
A              If
B              When


                                                                                  49
C              After
D              Since
  29           答案:               B
A              go
B              fly
C              blow
D              flow
  30           答案:               B
A              went
B              fell
C              jumped
D              blew
37             Man has always wanted to fly. Even as long as eight hundred years ago,
an Englishman had tried. He made a pair of 21 from chicken feathers and fixed
them to his 22 . Then he jumped from a tall building. As you can imagine, he did
not fly very far. 23 , he fell to the ground and broke several bones. The first
real attempt at flying 24 place in France in 1783. The two Mongolian brothers
knew that hot air rose. 25 they could fill a large balloon with hot air, they
thought it would rise into the air and 26 . They were right. They made a very large
hot air balloon of cloth and paper. It measured ten meters in diameter. They filled
it with hot air and the balloon got two hundred meters into the air. It 27 to
earth about three kilometers       28 .
At the next attempt, they arranged for a balloon to carry passengers. We do not know
29   the passengers felt about the trip as they were a cock, a duck, and a sheep.
But we 30 know that the trip lasted eight minutes and the animals landed safely.
  21           答案:               C
A              far
B              long
C              away
D              high
  22           答案:               D
A              which
B              that
C              who
D              what
  23           答案:               D
A              should
B              can
C              will
D              do
  24           答案:               A
A              laid
B              are laying
C              are laid


                                                                                   50
D              are lying
  25           答案:               D
A              capacity
B              conservation
C              consequence
D              constancy
  26           答案:               C
A              triumphed
B              beaten
C              seized
D              conquered
  27           答案:               A
A              that
B              which
C              those
D              what
  28           答案:               C
A              think through
B              think over
C              think of
D              think back
  29           答案:               D
A              range
B              term
C              period
D              run
  30           答案:               A
A              a possibility
B              a certainty
C              a chance
D              a probability
38             To learn with success is not a very difficult task of some fundamental
principles 21 to be its bases. In discussing this subject, four indispensable
principles should be mentioned, that is, diligence, devotion, 22 and punctuality.
All things can be 23 by diligence. It makes the foolish, wise, the poor, rich,
and the humble, noble. It produces a wonderful effect. In learning, the work of a
diligent fool doubles 24 of a lazy wit.
Devotion means to set our heart on one thing at a time and give up all other thoughts.
Never   25    learning another subject while studying one thing. Those who often
change their studies will never succeed in the long 26 .
In order to be successful we need devotion. Constancy makes success 27 . On the
other hand, inconstancy often 28 failure. If we study day after day, there is
nothing that cannot be achieved. We should remember a worthy proverb, " constant
dropping of water wears away a stone."


                                                                                    51
   29   these there is another rule helpful to one's accomplishments, that is,
punctuality. The habit of keeping a regular time is 30 to successful learning.
Work while you work; play while you play. Every man will certainly become strong and
wise if he does these.
  21           答案:               C
A              results from
B              brings forward
C              results in
D              comes off
  22           答案:               B
A              Beyond
B              Besides
C              Above
D              Beside
  23           答案:               C
A              important extremely
B              extreme important
C              extremely important
D              of extreme important
  24           答案:               B
A              succeed
B              fail
C              wonder
D              escape
  25           答案:               A
A              kept saying
B              went on saying
C              minded saying
D              avoided saying
  26           答案:               D
A              particular about
B              worried about
C              popular with
D              crazy about
  27           答案:               C
A              bigger
B              smaller
C              cheaper
D              more
  28           答案:               B
A              moved
B              stuck
C              taken
D              focused


                                                                                  52
 29             答案:               C
A               boring
B               tiring
C               challenging
D               terrifying
  30            答案:               D
A               when
B               what
C               which
D               that
14              What is it you want to do, but haven't done yet?
   Is it because you think it's too late, or too scary, or because maybe you might
21 ?
   Yesterday, while walking the beach with our dog, Sasha, (who usually manages to
draw people into conversation) I met a retired couple from the Midwest. They 22
how much they loved visiting the Oregon coast.
   "We're both 23 the ocean," the woman said, "and we're blaming ourselves that
we didn't buy some property(房产) here 10 years ago."
   "Do you think it's too late now?" I asked.
   "Well, uh, no," she said, "but it would have been a lot 24 then."
   So-will they stay       25   in an area they dislike, or will they dare to try
something that feels exciting and 26 ?
   If I had known them better, I would have mentioned the old story about the lady
who waited so long for her ship to come in 27 her pier(长堤) collapsed(倒塌).
   Someone once said, "Most people 28 life in a state of quiet desperation(绝
望)." Going through life in a state of "quiet expectation" sounds a lot better to
me.
   What it takes is a conscious change in attitude. That's why in my classes at Oregon
Coast Community College I've been encouraging students to 29 their dreams, to
be passionate about something, (anything!) and above all, to have faith             30
themselves.
  21            答案:               B
A               move through
B               go through
C               break through
D               bring through
  22            答案:               C
A               go to
B               go over
C               go for
D               go down
  23            答案:               D
A               on
B               about


                                                                                    53
C              with
D              in
  24           答案:               C
A              however
B              yet
C              but
D              instead
  25           答案:               B
A              be ready
B              ready
C              get ready
D              reading
  26           答案:               A
A              In
B              On
C              At
D              To
  27           答案:               D
A              transmission
B              transportation
C              translation
D              transition
  28           答案:               A
A              sound
B              voice
C              tone
D              noise
  29           答案:               C
A              looking
B              looked at
C              looking at
D              looked
  30           答案:               A
A              pass me by
B              pass me away
C              pass me over
D              pass me on
39             My 23-year-old son Dan stood in the doorway, 21 to say goodbye to
his home. His rucksack was packed and ready for the journey. 22 a couple of hours
he was going to fly out to France.
Dan was going to be away for at least a year. It was a milestone in his life, a 23
from school days to adulthood. When we were to say goodbye, I looked closely at his
face. I would like to provide him with some good advice that would last longer than
just here and now.


                                                                                 54
But not a 24 came from my lips. There was nothing that broke the silence in our
house by the sea. I could hear the sharp cry of the seagulls outside, while they circled
over the ever-changing and roaring surf. Inside I stood motionless and silent, 25
my son's green eyes with that penetrating look.
I knew that this wasn't the first time I'd let such an opportunity 26 . When Daniel
was a little boy, I followed him to the bus on his first day in pre-school. I felt
the excitement in his hand that held mine when the bus came 27 . I saw the color
28    in his cheeks when the bus stopped. He looked at me-just like he did now.
     What 29 it like, Dad? Can I do it? Will I do all right? And then he 30 the
bus and disappeared. The bus drove away. And I hadn't said a word.
  21           答案:                 B
A              under the corner
B              round the corner
C              in the corner
D              at the corner
  22           答案:                 C
A              to spread
B              to speed
C              spread
D              speed
  23           答案:                 B
A              does
B              is
C              has
D              be
  24           答案:                 D
A              abroad
B              broad
C              aboard
D              boarded
  25           答案:                 B
A              for
B              to
C              of
D              on
  26           答案:                 A
A              leading
B              lead
C              leader's
D              leadership
  27           答案:                 D
A              act
B              conduct
C              practice


                                                                                      55
D              behavior
  28           答案:               B
A              to
B              in
C              for
D              up
  29           答案:               C
A              takers
B              attendants
C              participants
D              newcomers
  30           答案:               A
A              deal
B              dealing
C              trade
D              transaction
40             Good business ethics in Hong Kong are the key 21 the territory's
success in the future. As a  22       international service center of the 1990s, good
standards of business 23 are more important than ever.
     Since it has become more sophisticated to provide good services 24 trade,
finance and commerce, level playing fields for all 25 are crucial. Being treated
fairly and the ability to obtain what the outsider see as a square         26    will
encourage them to invest 27 the territory. Once these positive characteristics
have gone, Hong Kong will lose its competitive         28    as a regional center,
especially when one takes into 29         rising office rents, high wages and local
skill 30 .
  21           答案:               B
A              on
B              in
C              to
D              about
  22           答案:               D
A              margin
B              verge
C              side
D              edge
  23           答案:               A
A              account
B              book
C              storage
D              warehouse
  24           答案:               C
A              scarcities
B              lacks


                                                                                   56
C              shortages
D              needs
  25           答案:               D
A              more
B              less
C              very
D              a little
  26           答案:               A
A              would like
B              had better
C              would better
D              had like
  27           答案:               C
A              what
B              when
C              that
D              where
  28           答案:               B
A              relative
B              relatively
C              relation
D              relate
  29           答案:               A
A              social
B              society
C              sociable
D              socialize
  30           答案:               B
A              affect
B              afford
C              affair
D              affirm
41             Does money buy happiness? No! Ah, would a little more money make us
21   happier? Many of us would agree. There is, we believe, some connection between
having money and feeling fantastic. Most of us would say that, yes, we 22 to be
rich. Three in four American college students now consider it is "very important"
or "essential" 23 they become "very well off financially". Money matters.
Well, are the rich people happier? Researchers have found that in poor countries,
such as Bangladesh, being    24 well off does make for greater well-being. We need
food, rest, shelter and 25 contact.
But a surprising fact of life is that in countries where everyone can 26 life's
necessities, increasing affluence matters surprisingly little. The correlation 27
wealth and happiness is "surprisingly weak", observed University of Michigan
researcher, Ronald Inglehart, in one 16-nation study of 170,000 people. Once


                                                                                 57
comfortable, more money provides diminishing returns. The second piece of pie, or
the second $100,000, never tastes as good as the first.
     Even lottery winners and the Forbes' 100 wealthiest Americans have expressed only
slightly greater happiness than the 28 American. Making it big brings temporary
joy. But 29 wealth is like health: the utter absence can breed misery, but having
it doesn't guarantee happiness. Happiness seems less a matter of getting what we want
30    of wanting what we have.
  21           答案:                D
A              among
B              in
C              with
D              between
  22           答案:                C
A              special
B              unusual
C              average
D              public
  23           答案:                A
A              in the long run
B              for the long run
C              at the long run
D              on the long run
  24           答案:                B
A              over
B              than
C              to
D              instead
  25           答案:                C
A              discovery
B              creation
C              invention
D              conclusion
  26           答案:                D
A              link
B              connect
C              associate
D              communicate
  27           答案:                C
A              seen
B              visited
C              visible
D              predicted
  28           答案:                A
A              heard


                                                                                    58
B              heard of
C              heard from
D              listened to
  29           答案:               D
A              rise
B              awake
C              raise
D              arouse
  30           答案:               B
A              required
B              inquired
C              surveyed
D              investigate
4              In our daily life we need to communicate with one another. We can do
this easily when we are close to other people. However, thanks to the 21 of the
telephone, we are still able to 22 with one another when we are far apart.
The man who made this possible was Alexander Graham Bell, born in Ediburgh in 1847.
Bell, a teacher of 23 speech who spent all his spare time experimenting. In 1875,
he   24 the first sounds sent over a distance by electricity.
The first telephone did not   25 the interest of the visitors although it was shown
at an exhibition in Philadelphia. It was looked upon as no more than a toy.
Fortunately for Bell, the Emperor of Brazil happened to pass by and 26 about his
invention. Bell gave him the 27 and went to speak into the transmitter at the
other end of the 28 . When he heard Bell's voice on the receiver, he dropped the
instrument in surprise and said, "it talks!"
The judges became interested and looked carefully at Bell's telephone. They 29
then that it was a most important invention. It 30 the medal. One of the judges,
a great English scientist, said that the telephone was the most wonderful thing he
had ever seen.
  21           答案:               D
A              set
B              tool
C              device
D              receiver
  22           答案:               B
A              line
B              wire
C              rope
D              string
  23           答案:               B
A              noticed
B              realized
C              recognized
D              identified


                                                                                 59
 24            答案:              A
A              won
B              gained
C              achieved
D              accomplished
  25           答案:              D
A              wanted
B              would like
C              had
D              refused
  26           答案:              C
A              why
B              that
C              what
D              how
  27           答案:              D
A              cured
B              blind
C              treated
D              enough
  28           答案:              C
A              can see
B              can't hear
C              can't see
D              can hear
  29           答案:              B
A              defeated
B              won
C              passed
D              fail
  30           答案:              D
A              with
B              having
C              after
D              without
42             If indeed silence is golden, it is also becoming as rare as gold. It
seems that the progress of man includes a 21 volume of noises. In every family
a stereo or television will 22 the rooms with sound. Between sunrise and sunset,
streets and 23 are a constant source of noise from cars, buses, and trucks. You
can pass any factory or construction area and the roar of its machinery will make
your ears 24 . Music is played in every supermarket, most restaurants and many
offices. Big cities of the world are 25 _ for their noisiness.
Noise    26 _ is the new side-effect of our technological age. It seems that the
soothing effects of silence are 27 _ to be found. Even the quiet of our carefully


                                                                                 60
protected wildness areas can be invaded at any moment by a passing 28 _.
     We are learning, finally, that 29 _ is a natural resource and must be protected
by law. It appears that we all find company in sound, but at the same time, we all
30    a little quiet from time to time.
  21            答案:               C
A               raising
B               high
C               rising
D               loud
  22            答案:               D
A               provide
B               supply
C               mark
D               fill
  23            答案:               B
A               tracks
B               highways
C               railways
D               paths
  24            答案:               A
A               ring
B               sound
C               horrible
D               terrible
  25            答案:               B
A               important
B               well-known
C               difficult
D               useful
  26            答案:               C
A               problem
B               matter
C               pollution
D               trouble
  27            答案:               C
A               anywhere
B               everywhere
C               nowhere
D               somewhere
  28            答案:               A
A               jet
B               car
C               truck
D               train


                                                                                  61
 29            答案:               B
A              noise
B              silence
C              calmness
D              water
  30           答案:               D
A              ask
B              suggest
C              order
D              demand
43             A new kind of machine is being developed to take the place of humans.
These machines can do jobs that are too dangerous for humans. 21 , they are being
developed to work in nuclear power centers, deep waters and outer space.
This is how the new machines 22 . A machine is placed in an area 23 the person
who controls it. The person 24 a special hard hat with tiny television screens.
The screens 25 the person see and hear exactly what the machine is seeing and
hearing. This gives the person the feeling of being in the same place 26 the
machine. The person controls the machine. The machine 27 the person's movements
exactly. If the person raises his right arm, the machine raises the right arm, too.
This means an experienced worker can do a dangerous job while 28 in a safe place.
For example, a person can    29 the machine to remove a bomb without going near the
bomb himself.
     The new machines are not exactly      30   robots. Robots are controlled by a
computer. The new machines are controlled by a person. The new machines are called
teleoperators. The nuclear power industry is especially interested in teleoperators.
  21           答案:               B
A              Such as
B              For example
C              In addition
D              Moreover
  22           答案:               D
A              works
B              working
C              being worked
D              work
  23           答案:               C
A              near
B              close to
C              far away from
D              within
  24           答案:               A
A              wears
B              puts on
C              dresses


                                                                                  62
D              dressed
  25           答案:                B
A              enable
B              let
C              allow
D              cause
  26           答案:                A
A              as
B              like
C              of
D              for
  27           答案:                C
A              does
B              makes
C              follows
D              catches
  28           答案:                B
A              stay
B              staying
C              to stay
D              stays
  29           答案:                D
A              tell
B              cause
C              let
D              direct
  30           答案:                D
A              resemble
B              the same
C              similar
D              like
44             Enough sleep is important to health. The amount of sleep needed depends
on the age of the person and the conditions in which sleep 21 . The young may need
more sleep than the old, but generally eight hours are enough for the health of
grown-ups. Some can     22    with less than this amount but others may need more.
Everyone knows his own 23 . It is then a matter of how to satisfy it. Sleep should
always be 24 to make one relaxed and ready for a day's work.
Fresh air is necessary to sound sleep. It is not without reason for some people to
25   that it is practical to sleep in the open air. 26 a person can keep himself
warm, 27 sleeping probably gives the body a 28 complete relaxation.
Ability to sleep is largely a 29 . Out-of-door walking, a good habit of regular
drinking and the avoidance of late eating are all helpful to sound sleep. Such factors
are largely within the 30 of people themselves.
  21           答案:                D


                                                                                    63
A        falls down
B        breaks out
C        wakes up
D        takes place
    22   答案:           A
A        do
B        work
C        wake
D        function
    23   答案:           C
A        sleep
B        conditions
C        needs
D        age
    24   答案:           C
A        deep
B        sound
C        enough
D        much
    25   答案:           B
A        urge
B        insist
C        agree
D        think
    26   答案:           A
A        When
B        Unless
C        Only
D        As
    27   答案:           A
A        out-of-door
B        inside
C        cold
D        good
    28   答案:           B
A        strong
B        most
C        terrible
D        much
    29   答案:           B
A        practice
B        pleasure
C        problem
D        habit


                           64
 30            答案:               D
A              action
B              plan
C              thought
D              control
45             Environmental pollution is a term that 21 to all the ways by which
humans pollute their surroundings, for example by damaging the soil with too many
fertilizers and pesticides. We also pollute our surroundings in 22 other ways.
People ruin natural beauty by scattering junk and litter on the land and in the water.
They operate machines and motor vehicles that 23 the air with dangerous exhaust
(尾气) and disturbing 24 . Nearly everyone causes pollution in 25 way.
Environmental pollution is one of the most 26 problems that mankind faces today.
Air, water, soil-all of which are harmed by pollution-are necessary to the 27
of all living things. Badly polluted air can 28 illness and even death. Polluted
water kills fish and other marine life. Pollution of the soil reduces the amount of
land on which we can grow food. Environmental pollution also brings 29 to the
naturally beautiful world.
     Everyone wants to reduce pollution. But the pollution problem is as complicated
as it is serious. It is complicated because so much pollution is caused by things
that 30 people. For example, factories that pollute the air and water provide
jobs for people. Thus, to solve this problem, we still have a long way to go.
  21           答案:               A
A              refers
B              infers
C              differs
D              prefers
  22           答案:               B
A              variant
B              various
C              variable
D              variety
  23           答案:               A
A              fill
B              blow
C              pour
D              flow
  24           答案:               C
A              dust
B              air
C              noise
D              smoke
  25           答案:               D
A              a
B              no


                                                                                    65
C              the
D              some
  26           答案:                D
A              important
B              terrible
C              harmful
D              serious
  27           答案:                B
A              life
B              survival
C              live
D              survive
  28           答案:                A
A              cause
B              lead
C              result
D              take
  29           答案:                C
A              beauty
B              pretty
C              ugliness
D              bad-looking
  30           答案:                A
A              benefit
B              profit
C              harm
D              destroy
46             As the plane circled over the airport, everyone sensed that something
was wrong. The plane was moving unsteadily through the air, and although the
passengers had __21__ their seat belts, they were suddenly thrown forward. At that
moment, the air-hostess appeared. She looked very pale, but she was quite 22 .
Speaking quickly but almost in a whisper she __23__ everyone that the pilot had fainted
and asked __24__ any of the passengers knew anything about machines -- or at least
how to drive a car. After a moment's hesitation, a man got up and followed the
stewardess into the pilot's cabin.
   25 the pilot aside, the man took his seat and listened carefully to the urgent
instructions that were 26 by radio from the airport below. The plane was now
dangerously close to the ground, but to everyone's relief, it soon began to 27 .
The man    28    circle the airport several times in order to become          29    the
controls.
Following instructions, the man guided the plane towards the airfield. It shook
violently as it touched the ground and then moved rapidly across the field, but after
a long 30 it stopped safely. Outside, a crowd of people who had been waiting
anxiously rushed forward to congratulate the pilot on a perfect landing.


                                                                                     66
    21   答案:            B
A        installed
B        fastened
C        connected
D        loosened
    22   答案:            A
A        calm
B        pleasant
C        sad
D        nervous
    23   答案:            D
A        reported
B        revealed
C        announced
D        informed
    24   答案:            A
A        if
B        whoever
C        what
D        how
    25   答案:            C
A        Persuading
B        Lying
C        Moving
D        Bringing
    26   答案:            B
A        sent
B        being sent
C        sending
D        to be sent
    27   答案:            C
A        take off
B        land
C        climb
D        decline
    28   答案:            B
A        intended to
B        had to
C        needed
D        used to
    29   答案:            D
A        aware of
B        sensitive to
C        known to


                            67
D              familiar with
  30           答案:                C
A              flight
B              time
C              run
D              road
47             Smoking, which may be a pleasure for some people, is a serious source
of discomfort for their fellows. Further, medical authorities express their concern
about the effect of smoking on the health not only 21 those who smoke but also
of those who do not. 22 , non-smokers who must involuntarily inhale(吸入) the
air polluted by tobacco smoke may suffer more than the smokers themselves.
As you are doubtless 23 , a considerable number of our students have joined in
an effort to 24 the university to ban smoking in the classrooms. I believe they
are 25 right in their aim. However, I would hope that it is possible to achieve
this by calling on the smokers to use good judgment and show concern for others rather
than by regulations.
Smoking is 26 by City laws in theaters and in halls used for 27 films as well
as in laboratories where there 28 be a fire hazard. Elsewhere, it is up to your
good sense.
     I am 29 asking you to maintain "No Smoking" in the auditoriums, classrooms
and seminar rooms. This will prove that you have the non-smokers' health and
well-being(福利) 30 , which is very important to a large number of our students.
  21           答案:                D
A              to
B              about
C              with
D              of
  22           答案:                A
A              In fact
B              Of course
C              As a result
D              In addition
  23           答案:                C
A              alert
B              awake
C              aware
D              informed
  24           答案:                B
A              make
B              persuade
C              cause
D              tell
  25           答案:                A
A              entirely


                                                                                    68
B               not
C               just
D               only
  26           答案:                A
A               prohibited
B               stopped
C               suppressed
D              prevented
  27           答案:                C
A               playing
B               demonstrating
C               showing
D               exhibiting
  28           答案:                C
A               will
B               should
C               may
D               must
  29           答案:                B
A               hence
B               therefore
C               subsequently
D               so
  30           答案:                C
A               on mind
B               in heart
C               in mind
D               on your mind
48             Most young people enjoy some form of physical activity. Those who have
a passion for high and difficult mountains are often 21 with astonishment. Why
are men and women willing to suffer cold and hardship and to take risk on high mountains?
This astonishment is caused, probably by the difference between mountaineering and
other forms of activity, to 22 men give their leisure.
Mountaineering is a sport and not a game. There are no man-made rules, 23 there
are for such games as golf and football. There are, then, rules of a different kind
which it would be dangerous to 24 , but it is this freedom from man-made rules
that makes mountaineering attractive to many people. Those who climb mountains are
free to use their own methods.
If we compare mountaineering and other more 25 sports, we might think that one
big difference is that mountaineering is not a 'team game'. We should be mistaken
in this. There are no 'matches' between 'teams' of climbers, but when climbers are
on a rock face 26 by a rope, on which their lives may depend, there is obviously
teamwork.
The mountaineer knows that he may have to fight forces of nature that are stronger


                                                                                      69
and more powerful than man. His sport requires high mental and physical qualities.
A mountain climber continues to improve in skills 27 . A skier is probably past
his best 28 the age of thirty. But it is not 29 for men of fifty or sixty
to climb the highest mountains in the Alps. They may take more time than younger men,
30   they probably climb with more skill and less waste of effort, and they certainly
experience equal enjoyment.
  21           答案:               C
A              dealt
B              coped
C              looked upon
D              disgusted
  22           答案:               B
A              that
B              which
C              how
D              why
  23           答案:               A
A              as
B              like
C              such as
D              possibly
  24           答案:               B
A              behave
B              ignore
C              practice
D              observe
  25           答案:               A
A              familiar
B              regular
C              similar
D              formal
  26           答案:               D
A              admitted
B              vanished
C              tracked
D              linked
  27           答案:               C
A              in years
B              all the year round
C              year after year
D              in years ahead
  28           答案:               C
A              for
B              of


                                                                                   70
C              by
D              with
  29           答案:                D
A              unique
B              pleasant
C              likely
D              unusual
  30           答案:                D
A              so
B              or
C              and
D              but
49             删除 Memory can be divided into two aspects: retention and recall.
Retention is the ability of the mind to take in and store 21 . Recall is the ability
to    22 from that vast store the special piece of information we need at any given
time.
When people complain 23 having "bad memories", they do not really mean that their
24    memory is bad, but normally that their ability to recall something is        25
weak.
This is perhaps best illustrated by the "tip of the tongue" feeling. In this 26
the person knows that he knows something and will say, "It's on the tip of my tongue,
but I can't remember it."     27 he really means is that his brain has retained the
information, but that he cannot at that moment recall it.
If a case is to be made for the improvement of memory it is 28 first to establish
that the store of information is there to be drawn from. Fortunately, there is 29
evidence to 30 the suggestion that our brains do retain far more information than
is generally thought perhaps, even all of it.
  21           答案:                B
A              situation
B              information
C              memories
D              abilities
  22           答案:                A
A              select
B              decide
C              get
D              find
  23           答案:                D
A              off
B              with
C              for
D              about
  24           答案:                B
A              all


                                                                                   71
B              entire
C              every
D              each
  25           答案:               D
A              always
B              temporarily
C              usually
D              particularly
  26           答案:               D
A              background
B              position
C              condition
D              state
  27           答案:               C
A              That
B              Which
C              What
D              How
  28           答案:               A
A              impossible
B              improper
C              naturally
D              necessary
  29           答案:               B
A              considerate
B              considerable
C              constant
D              contrary
  30           答案:               C
A              refuse
B              develop
C              support
D              promote
50             Everyone should have an ambition, one that is not too far beyond reach.
Some people set 21 goals for themselves. Consequently they become discouraged
and stop trying altogether. Your ambition should be 22 on a careful and realistic
consideration of your abilities, your interests and your opportunities. After setting
a reasonable goal, you should 23 stop to ask yourself, "What have I done during
the last few months to 24     me nearer to my goal, and how much progress have I made?"
If you find that you have made no real effort, your ambition is not a genuine one.
It is merely a form of day-dreaming. Sooner or later, of course, you are 25 to
awake from your pleasant dream, which was fun while it lasted. Then you will not be
happy to find yourself in the same old place. You should set your goal just a notch
(级) or two beyond your reach, and take steps each day to raise yourself a little


                                                                                     72
26   to it. There is nothing to stop you from moving your goal another notch or two
higher as you move 27 . If you hope to reach the top storey, climb one step 28 .
Don't try to make the roof in one jump. On the other hand you will never get to the
top by sitting on the bottom step and dreaming of how 29 the roof is. Remember
also that working toward a goal is perhaps more rewarding than 30 it.
  21           答案:              B
A              pleasant
B              impossible
C              necessary
D              excellent
  22           答案:              C
A              depended
B              relied
C              based
D              set
  23           答案:              D
A              always
B              regularly
C              sometimes
D              frequently
  24           答案:              A
A              bring
B              set
C              pick
D              find
  25           答案:              C
A              supposing
B              expecting
C              bound
D              made
  26           答案:              B
A              sooner
B              closer
C              higher
D              upper
  27           答案:              D
A              forward
B              onward
C              backward
D              upward
  28           答案:              B
A              at time
B              at a time
C              at times


                                                                                 73
D              on time
  29           答案:                 A
A              nice
B              fine
C              high
D              good
  30           答案:                 C
A              developing
B              completing
C              achieving
D              gaining
51             Ways of shopping for goods have changed a lot in the last 50 years.
People used to go to several shops to buy their daily 21 . For example, they went
to a butcher's shop for meat, a fish market for fish and a farmer's market for
vegetables, which were often grown locally. Theses day, 22 , people usually do
all their shopping at a supermarket where they can buy everything they need 23 the
same roof.
In the name of convenience nearly everything in a supermarket is prepackaged. But
as the environmental 24       of this type of convenience have become clear, consumers
have begun to question its true value. The packaging used by supermarkets causes many
environmental 25 . The demand for paper for wrapping encourages the cutting down
of forests around the world. Making plastic shopping bags needs huge amounts of oil.
The natural resources used to 26 packaging are generally wasted because 27
consumers only throw the packaging away. We are then faced with the big problem to
deal with all the packaging we throw away.
     The problems of supermarket packaging may seem impossible to solve, but there
are things consumers can do. First we can try to buy products           28   as little
packaging as possible. Second, we can           29     the extra bags and packaging
supermarkets offer consumers. Finally, we can bring our own bags to the supermarket
and reuse any plastic bags        30   containers we bring home. If consumers join
together in reducing waste we can make real progress in the effort to have both
convenient lifestyles and a clean environment.
  21           答案:                 B
A              necessary
B              necessities
C              necessity
D              need
  22           答案:                 D
A              therefore
B              hence
C              moreover
D              however
  23           答案:                 A
A              under


                                                                                    74
B              below
C              in
D              on
  24          答案:                 B
A              prices
B              costs
C              values
D              worth
  25          答案:                 A
A              problems
B             questions
C              puzzles
D              inconvenience
  26          答案:                 D
A              wrap
B              mark
C              cover
D              offer
  27          答案:                 B
A              we
B              our
C             their
D              a few
  28          答案:                 C
A              of
B              for
C              with
D              without
  29          答案:                 A
A              refuse
B              take
C              receive
D              accept
  30          答案:                 B
A              and
B              or
C              nor
D              with
52             A friend of mine, teaching abroad, was immensely amused by the question,
"Are English peasants allowed to go to the theatre?" Anybody who can pay for a 21
may go to the theatre in England, though only two percent choose to do so. This is
not because theatres are expensive,       22    because most people prefer to watch
television, football matches or to gamble.
The word "peasant" is not used in England, except as an insult or as a joke. We have


                                                                                    75
no peasant class, only 23 laborers. We do not have a system, as in other parts
of Europe, 24 people inherit a small piece of 25 and work it for substance.
We have farms, which can employ laborers for wages. Such people are            26    as
"agricultural workers". They are not highly paid out but they can manage to live fairly
well.
     Farming is becoming more 27 . These days young men starting work on the farm
are expected to spend some more time at agriculture college to learn how to do the
job 28 . English agriculture is very 29 and we are now self-sufficing in grain:
30 , we have a surplus, which is stored by the Common Market and which we have to
pay to store, through our taxes.
  21           答案:               D
A              pound
B              dollar
C              time
D              ticket
  22           答案:               C
A              and
B              which
C              but
D              not
  23           答案:               A
A              agricultural
B              industrial
C              business
D              social
  24           答案:               B
A              however
B              where
C              there
D              which
  25           答案:               B
A              earth
B              land
C              farm
D              soil
  26           答案:               D
A              respected
B              organized
C              gathered
D              regarded
  27           答案:               C
A              advance
B              popular
C              scientific


                                                                                    76
D              accessible
  28           答案:                C
A              good
B              accordingly
C              properly
D              correct
  29           答案:                A
A              efficient
B              self-contained
C              independent
D              producing
  30           答案:                B
A              Virtually
B              In fact
C              On the contrary
D              By the way
53             Throughout history man has had to accept the fact that all living things
must die, but people now live longer than they 21 . Yet, all living things still
show the __22 of aging, which will eventually 23 death.
Aging is not a disease, but as a person passes maturity, the cells of the body and
the organs they form do not function as well as they did in childhood. The body provides
less 24 against diseases and is more inclined 25 accident.
A number of related causes may contribute to aging. Some cells of the body have a
fairly long life, but they are not 26 when they die. In an aging person the new
cells may not be as capable 27 growth as those of a young person.
     Another 28 in aging may be changes within the cells themselves. Some of the
protein chemicals in cells are known to change with age and become less flexible.
This is why the skin of old people wrinkles. This is also the reason old people 29
in height. There may be other more important chemicals changes in the cells. Some
complex cell chemicals, such as DNA and RNA, store and 30 information that the
cells need. Aging may affect this process and change the information-carrying
molecules so that they do not transmit the information as well.
  21           答案:                D
A              had
B              use to
C              were used to
D              used to
  22           答案:                B
A              fact
B              effect
C              function
D              symbol
  23           答案:                C
A              affect


                                                                                      77
B              produce
C              result in
D              result from
  24           答案:               A
A              protection
B              demand
C              decline
D              delay
  25           答案:               A
A              to
B              for
C              against
D              from
  26           答案:               A
A              replaced
B              born
C              recovered
D              discovered
  27           答案:               C
A              with
B              for
C              of
D              to
  28           答案:               A
A              factor
B              effect
C              reason
D              element
  29           答案:               B
A              short
B              shrink
C              lengthen
D              increase
  30           答案:               C
A              pass to
B              pass from
C              pass on
D              pass on to
54             In November of 1902, President Theodore Roosevelt was on a hunting trip
in Mississippi. His hunt was going 21 that day, and he couldn't seem to find
anything worth of 22 his rifle. Then, his staff captured a black baby bear for
the president to shoot, but he could not. The thought of shooting a bear that was
tied to a tree did not seem sporting, so he 23 the life of the baby bear and set
it free.


                                                                                    78
     Based on this story, a famous political cartoonist for the Washington Star drew
a cartoon, which showed Teddy Roosevelt, rifle 24 , with his back turned on a cute
baby bear. Morris Michtom, owner of a Brooklyn toy store, was 25 by the cartoon
to make a stuffed baby bear. Intending it only as a display, he placed the stuffed
bear in his toy store 26 , and next to it placed a copy of the cartoon from the
newspaper. To Michtom's surprise, his store was flooded by customers 27 to buy.
He asked for and received President Roosevelt's       28    to use his name for the
hand-sewn bears that he and his wife made, and the "Teddy Bear" was born! Michtom
was soon manufacturing Teddy Bear 29 thousands. The money from the sale enabled
him, in 1903, to 30 the Ideal Toy Company.
  21           答案:               B
A              hastily
B               poorly
C               punctually
D               steadily
  22           答案:               D
A               supporting
B               opening
C               shouldering
D               firing
  23           答案:               A
A               spared
B               protected
C               saved
D               checked
  24           答案:               D
A               in his hand
B               in the hand
C               in hands
D               in hand
  25           答案:               B
A               encouraged
B              inspired
C               urged
D               pictured
  26           答案:               A
A               window
B               door
C               table
D               counter
  27           答案:               A
A               eager
B               interested
C              reluctant


                                                                                  79
D              straight
  28           答案:               B
A              order
B              permission
C              argument
D              file
  29           答案:               C
A              at
B              of
C              by
D              for
  30           答案:               C
A              sell
B              change
C              form
D              invest
55             Certainly, the most popular method of traveling used by Americans is
the privately-owned automobile. The vast majority of Americans have a car, and many
families have two. 21 during your visit to the United States, you may decide to
rent a car to travel outside the city or to travel to other parts of the country.
     Car rental companies are 22 in the telephone book and are located in most
cities and towns. 23 , there are usually rental cars at airports and train and
bus stations. As is true everywhere in the world, you can rent a car 24 the day,
week, or month. Some companies 25 have special weekend rates that you may find
especially interesting if you have only a limited 26 of time to travel around
the area you are visiting. Since each company had its own rules and rates, it is a
good idea to 27 prices among companies to get the best rates to suit your purposes.
For example, most car rental costs 28 how long you plan to keep the car and how
far you travel. However, some companies may include gasoline in their rates, but 29
do not. Some companies require that you 30 the car to its starting point; others
will permit you to leave the car in another city.
  21           答案:               B
A              Some time
B              Sometimes
C              Sometime
D              Some times
  22           答案:               D
A              written
B              recorded
C              copied
D              listed
  23           答案:               C
A              However
B              Therefore


                                                                                80
C              In addition
D              Consequently
  24           答案:               D
A              at
B              in
C              of
D              by
  25           答案:               B
A              still
B              even
C              and
D              too
  26           答案:               A
A              amount
B              number
C              quantity
D              quality
  27           答案:               B
A              connect
B              compare
C              contrast
D              combine
  28           答案:               D
A              insist on
B              work on
C              count on
D              depend on
  29           答案:               C
A              the other
B              other
C              others
D              one another
  30           答案:               A
A              return
B              returned
C              must return
D              will return
56             The famous Dr. Edward Jenner was busy trying to solve the problem of
smallpox(天花). After studying case after case, he still found no possible 21 .
He had reached a dead end in his thinking. At this point he changed his approaches.
22   focusing on people who had smallpox, he _ 23 _ his attention to people who did
not have smallpox. It turned out that dairymaids apparently __24 _ got the disease.
From the discovery _ 25 _ harmless cowpox(牛痘) gave protection against deadly
smallpox came vaccination(种痘) and the end of smallpox as a disaster in the Western


                                                                                 81
world.
We often reach a dead end in our thinking. It is _ 26 _ these occasions that we become
tense, we feel pressured, overwhelmed, in a state of stress. We struggle vainly,
fighting to solve the problem.
Dr. Jenner, however, did something about this situation. He _ 27 _ fighting and simply
changed his point of view - from patients to dairymaids. Suppose the brain is a
computer. This computer has _ 28 _ into its memory tank all your history, your
experience, your training, your information received through life, and it is
programmed according to all the data. To change your point of view, you must reprogram
your computer, thus freeing yourself to _ 29 _ new ideas and develop new ways of looking
at things. Dr. Jenner, _ 30 _, by reprogramming his computer, erased the old way of
looking at his smallpox problem and was free to receive new alternatives.
  21           答案:                D
A              pill
B              means
C              care
D              cure
  22           答案:                B
A              In place of
B              Instead of
C              In view of
D              In spite of
  23           答案:                A
A              switched
B              moved
C              laid
D              directed
  24           答案:                C
A              often
B              sometimes
C              never
D              ever
  25           答案:                B
A              which
B              that
C              in which
D              what
  26           答案:                A
A              on
B              in
C              under
D              for
  27           答案:                B
A              began


                                                                                      82
B              stopped
C              kept
D              went on
  28           答案:               D
A              agreed
B              allowed
C              admitted
D              absorbed
  29           答案:               A
A              take in
B              take out
C              take off
D              take up
  30           答案:               B
A              in sum
B              in effect
C              in comparison
D              in common
57             Of all the points that men don't understand about women, one thing _
21 _ special consideration. To put it more clearly, contrary to the popular belief
that women are _ 22 _ in face of problems, they are indeed good problem-solvers. It
is also noticeable that men and woman solve problems in different ways. A man tends
to be direct-_ 23 _ all his options, select one, then proceed. Woman can be direct,
too, _ 24 _ they may also choose a less obvious path.
For example, when one young mother and her family vacationed in Florida, their hotel
_ 25 _ beach umbrellas. The husband lodged a _ 26 _ with the manager and declared
that the family should stay off the beach until more umbrellas arrived. But the wife
simply constructed a temporary _ 27 _ from pieces of driftwood and beach towels. For
the man, the problem wouldn't be solved _ 28 _ the hotel came through. For the woman,
the problem was solved when she and her children were able to enjoy the beach.
What women really want is for men to _ 29_, rather than mock at, the special ways
they have of analyzing problems. When men struggle with a problem, they stay right
with it, believing that's the only way to solve it, but often getting more and more
upset. Women are more likely to simply let problems solve themselves-for example,
by giving a child more time to _ 30 _ a new teacher, rather than insisting on an
immediate classroom change.
  21           答案:               B
A              reserves
B              deserves
C              serves
D              preserves
  22           答案:               D
A              wordless
B              homeless


                                                                                   83
C             meaningless
D             helpless
  23          答案:              C
A             cover up
B             turn down
C             line up
D             put forward
  24          答案:              A
A             but
B             so
C             since
D             if
  25          答案:              D
A             ran into
B             ran down
C             ran away with
D             ran out of
  26          答案:              A
A             complaint
B             temper
C             saying
D             remark
  27          答案:              D
A             cave
B             house
C             shell
D             shelter
  28          答案:              B
A             when
B             until
C             before
D             after
  29          答案:              C
A             suspect
B             expect
C             respect
D             inspect
  30          答案:              D
A             answer to
B             refer to
C             react to
D             adjust to
58            删除 Thomas L. Campbell, a physician specializing in family related
medicine, points out a number of observable 21 between health and family:


                                                                             84
The family is the primary setting in which attitudes and behaviors       22    diet,
exercise, smoking, alcohol consumption, and drug use 23 learned and maintained.
Unhealthy behaviors and genetic risk factors for 24 cluster within families, as
family members tend to share 25 genes, but diets, physical activities, alcohol
and tobacco use.
Chronic marital(婚姻的) distress and conflict can         26 acute and chronic health
changes, such as elevated blood pressure and heart rate and decreased cellular
immunity(免疫力). These physiological changes result in a wide 27 of diseases.
Campbell believes that a number of adjustments can be made within the health-care
system to accommodate the     28 of the family. For example, health education and
preventive care should be targeted toward families 29 individuals and communities.
Also, when a risk factor for a disease is identified in one family member, all other
family members should be treated.
     Campbell also 30 that mental-health care be included in wellness programs
and family professionals become more actively involved in health promotion.
  21           答案:               C
A              conclusions
B              conditions
C              connections
D              concepts
  22           答案:               D
A              according
B              concluding
C              depending
D              regarding
  23           答案:               B
A              is
B              are
C              was
D              were
  24           答案:               A
A              diseases
B              defenses
C              disadvantages
D              disasters
  25           答案:               B
A              not that
B              not only
C              both
D              besides
  26           答案:               C
A              attribute to
B              bring up
C              lead to


                                                                                 85
D                result from
  27             答案:               D
A                difference
B                kind
C                part
D                range
  28             答案:               C
A                action
B                force
C                influence
D                power
  29             答案:               A
A                as well as
B                or
C                except
D                except for
  30             答案:               C
A                considers
B                points out
C                recommends
D                says
59               删除 The language has always undergone changes and minor changes have
slowly _ 21 _ in every generation. Of course there have been periods of 22 changes
as well. Then in what ways does the language change? Well, the enormous enlargement
of our 23 , the increasing use in our writing of the spoken idiom, and changes
in our pronunciation are not the only changes that are taking place. There have also
been significant grammatical alterations in our language. Such changes take place
only by generations or 24 , at the fastest, so they pass unnoticed by all 25
grammarians; yet even the layman(外行人) can perceive them when he is told that
something that seems "quite all right" to him was regarded as incorrect only a few
years ago.
   Nobody knows why all these changes are being made, perhaps we are in the 26 of
reducing our verbs to a few basic words. If this is so, it may mark a change as 27
as the one that took place after the Norman Conquest.
    28    the reasons for the changes that are taking place, the vocabulary will
probably continue to expand, because the expansion of our knowledge and experience
requires the invention of new words or the adaptation of old ones. Meaning will depend
29     upon word order and context, and spelling will become simpler, with fewer common
variants(变体). Pronunciation, 30 the great mobility of our population and the
spread of radio and television, will tend to become more uniform.
  21             答案:               B
A                accepted
B                accumulated
C                acknowledged


                                                                                     86
D        accelerated
    22   答案:             C
A        amazing
B        new
C        rapid
D        unexpected
    23   答案:             D
A        meaning
B        speech
C        spelling
D        vocabulary
    24   答案:             A
A        decades
B        months
C        weeks
D        years
    25   答案:             B
A        and
B        but
C        besides
D        including
    26   答案:             C
A        productivity
B        probability
C        process
D        procession
    27   答案:             D
A        slow
B        simple
C        serious
D        significant
    28   答案:             A
A        Whatever
B        Whichever
C        Whenever
D        Wherever
    29   答案:             C
A        more or less
B        less and less
C        more and more
D        much and much
    30   答案:             A
A        because of
B        concerning


                             87
C              thanks to
D              according to
60             In every cultivated language there are two great classes of words,
which makes up the whole vocabulary. First, there are those words 21 which we
become familiar in daily conversation, which we learn, that is to say, from the members
of our own family and from our friends, and which we should know and use 22 we
could not read or write. They 23 the common things of life with all the people
who 24 the language. Such words may be called "popular", since they belong to
the people 25 and are not excluded from a limited class.
On the other hand, our language consists of a large number of words which are
comparatively      26    used in ordinary conversation. Their meanings are known to
every educated person, but there is little necessity to use them at home or in the
market-place. Our 27 acquaintance with them comes not from our mother's tongue
or from the talk of our schoolmates, 28 from books that we read, lectures that
we attend, or the more      29   conversation of highly educated speakers who are
discussing some particular topic in a style properly higher above the habitual extent
of everyday life. Such words are called "learned", and the 30 between them and
the "popular" words is of great importance to a right understanding of language study
process.
  21           答案:               B
A              at
B              with
C              by
D              through
  22           答案:               A
A              even
B              despite
C              even if
D              in spite of
  23           答案:               B
A              mind
B              concern
C              care
D              relate
  24           答案:               D
A              hire
B              apply
C              adopt
D              use
  25           答案:               B
A              in public
B              at most
C              at large
D              at best


                                                                                     88
 26            答案:               A
A              seldom
B              much
C              greatly
D              often
  27           答案:               C
A              primary
B              first
C              principal
D              prior
  28           答案:               D
A              besides
B              and
C              yet
D              but
  29           答案:               C
A              former
B              formula
C              formal
D              forward
  30           答案:               B
A              relation
B              distinction
C              connection
D              similarity
61             In its home country of Germany, the hot dog was called the frankfurter.
It was named 21        Frankfurt, a German city. Frankfurters were first sold in the
United States in the 1860s. Americans called frankfurters "dachshund sausages". A
dachshund is a dog from Germany 22 a very long body and short legs. Dachshund
sausages first became popular in New York, especially at baseball games. At games
they were sold by men who kept them 23 in hot-water tanks.
As the men walked      24    the rows of people,they yelled , "Get your dachshund
sausages!Get your hot dachshund sausages!" People got the sausages on buns, a special
bread.
   25 in 1906 a newspaper cartoonist named Tad Dorgan went to a baseball game. 26
he saw the men with the dachshund sausages, he got an idea as a cartoon. The next
day at the newspaper office he       27    a bun with a dachshund inside- 28         a
dachshund sausage, but a dachshund. Dorgan 29 how to spell dachshund. Under the
cartoon, he wrote "Get your dachshund sausages!"
     The cartoon was a sensation, and so was the new name.If you go to a baseball game
today, you can still see sellers walking 30 with hot-water tanks. As they walk
up and down the rows they yell:"Get your hot dogs here!Get your hot dogs!"
  21           答案:               B
A              with


                                                                                    89
B        after
C        by
D        of
    22   答案:              D
A        by
B        of
C        at
D        with
    23   答案:              C
A        cool
B        hot
C        warm
D        cold
    24   答案:              B
A        sometimes
B        up and down
C        someday
D        here and there
    25   答案:              D
A        A day
B        Any day
C        Certain
D        One day
    26   答案:              A
A        When
B        While
C        If
D        Whether
    27   答案:              C
A        called
B        made
C        drew
D        bought
    28   答案:              C
A        no
B        without
C        not
D        for
    29   答案:              A
A        didn't know
B        wonders
C        was sure
D        never knows
    30   答案:              B


                              90
A              over
B              around
C              fast
D              all day
62             Arnold Alexander's funeral was a quiet 21 . It was attended by the
only 22 he had in the world, his niece and nephew, and by a few friends. The priest
who had travelIed 23 a hundred miles into this wild part of the county was now
getting ready for the simple ceremony. Alexander, or 'Alex' as his friends       24
call him, had led a hard life 25 for gold in a lonely part of Western Australia.
He had always refused to work in a gold mine 26 he believed that he could do better
on his own. Although he was not a boastful person, he had often declared that one
day he 27 find a lump of gold as big as his head and with that he would retire
and live in 30 for the rest of his life. But his dreams of great wealth 28 came
true. For many years he had hardly earned enough money to keep himself alive.
Two men now gently lifted the rough wooden box that 29 Alex's body, but they
almost dropped it when they heard a loud cry from the grave-digger. His spade had
struck something hard in the rocky soil and he was shouting excitedly. Then he held
up a large stone. Though it was covered 30 dirt, the stone shone curious1yin the
fierce sun1ight:it was unmistakably a heavy piece of solid gold!
  21           答案:                C
A              accident
B              event
C              affair
D              incident
  22           答案:                B
A              relation
B              relations
C              relationship
D              relationships
  23           答案:                D
A              to
B              of
C              in
D              over
  24           答案:                D
A              liked
B              past
C              used
D              used to
  25           答案:                B
A              look
B              looking
C              looked
D              had looked


                                                                                 91
    26          答案:               A
A               because
B               so
C               even
D               only
  27            答案:               A
A               would
B               must
C               ought to
D               for
  28            答案:               B
A               ever
B               never
C               always
D               once
  29            答案:               C
A               contains
B               containing
C               contained
D               having contained
  30            答案:               B
A               in
B               with
C               within
D               below
63              Martin Luther King. Jr. was born in Georgia in 1929. When was 21 a
boy Martin learned that his people, the black Americans, were often treated
differently from most of 22 fellow Americans. Many could not attend good schools,
get good jobs, or live in nice houses because of the color of their skin. Martin knew
that in a free country this was 23 . He wanted to help his black brothers, so he
decided to go to school and 24 a minister. He became a pastor in Montgomery,
Alabama. This is 25 Martin Luther King's "peaceful fight" first began.
   Dr. King worked for equality in other cities. He knew that the 26 way people
could win their rights was to remain peaceful, even in face of 27 . Dr. King won
the Nobel Peace Prize in 1964 for his achievements and courage.
   The whole nation mourned the terrible event that 28 on April 4, 1968, in Memphis,
Tennessee. Martin Luther King. Jr. was shot. The man who had preached nonviolence
died 29 .
   But Dr. King's dream can never die. Many Americans are still 30 to make that
dream come true.

    21        答案:               B
A             already
B             still


                                                                                  92
C        such
D        not
    22   答案:            D
A        his
B        those
C        most
D        their
    23   答案:            C
A        even worse
B        different
C        wrong
D        reasonable
    24   答案:            D
A        helped
B        ask
C        visited
D        become
    25   答案:            A
A        where
B        why
C        said
D        because
    26   答案:            A
A        only
B        other
C        wrong
D        second
    27   答案:            C
A        peace
B        victory
C        danger
D        strength
    28   答案:            C
A        passed
B        he did
C        happened
D        they managed
    29   答案:            B
A        bravely
B        violently
C        quietly
D        nonviolently
    30   答案:            D
A        wanted


                            93
B              working
C              prepared
D              struggling
64             As we help students acquire information, ideas, skills, values, ways
of thinking, and means of expressing themselves, we are also teaching them how to
learn. In fact, the most important long-term outcome of instruction may be the
students' 21 capabilities to learn more easily and effectively in the future. How
teaching is conducted has a large impact on students' abilities to educate 22 .
In our school the students learn a        23    of learning strategies because their
teachers use the models of teaching that require them. Our students also know how
to profit 24 training and how to train themselves in athletic, performing arts,
mathematical, and social skills. They know how to make their writing and problem
solving more lucid and       25 . Perhaps most important, they know how to        26
initiative in planning personal study, and they know how to work with others to
initiate and 27 cooperative programs of inquiry.
These students are both challenging and exhilarating 28 , because their expanded
learning styles enable us to teach them in the variety of ways 29 are appropriate
for the many goals of education. The core of the 30 of teaching is the arrangement
of environments with which the student can interact.
  21           答案:                A
A              increased
B              to increase
C              increase
D              increasing
  22           答案:                D
A              them
B              theirs
C              their own
D              themselves
  23           答案:                C
A              crowd
B              group
C              range
D              section
  24           答案:                C
A              in
B              by
C              from
D              among
  25           答案:                B
A              create
B              creative
C              creation
D              creatively


                                                                                  94
 26            答案:               C
A              get
B               give
C               take
D               make
  27           答案:               A
A               carry out
B               take over
C               give up
D               care about
  28           答案:               D
A               to teaching
B              in teaching
C               for teaching
D               to teach
  29           答案:               B
A               what
B               that
C               whether
D               and
  30           答案:               A
A               process
B               progress
C              procedure
D               property
65              How many different kinds of emotions do you feel? It is very hard to
specify all of them. However, there are a number of essential emotions that most people
experience.
When we receive something that we want, or something happens         21    we like, we
usually feel joy or happiness. Joy is a positive and powerful emotion, 22 for
which we all strive. As a general rule, joy occurs when we reach a 23 goal or
obtain a desired object.
   24 people often desire different goals and objects, it is understandable that
one person may find joy in repairing an automobile, while 25 may find joy in
solving a math problem. Of course, we often 26 common goals or interests, and
therefore we can experience joy together. This may be in sports, in the arts, in
learning, in raising a family, or in being together.
     When we have difficulty obtaining desired objects or reaching desired goals we
experience negative emotions 27 anger and grief. When little things get in our
way, we experience frustrations or tensions. 28 , if you are dressing to go out
for a date, you may feel frustration when a zipper breaks or a button falls off. The
more difficulty you have in reaching a goal, the more frustrated you may 29 and
the more angry you may become. If you really want something to happen, and you feel
it will happen, 30 someone or something stops it, you may become quite angry.


                                                                                     95
    21   答案:            B
A        if
B        that
C        what
D        when
    22   答案:            A
A        one
B        the one
C        anything
D        some
    23   答案:            D
A        desire
B        desiring
C        desirous
D        desired
    24   答案:            C
A        For
B        When
C        Since
D        Where
    25   答案:            A
A        another
B        the other
C        others
D        the others
    26   答案:            C
A        take
B        own
C        share
D        interact
    27   答案:            B
A        as if
B        such as
C        according to
D        as to
    28   答案:            D
A        In short
B        As a whole
C        However
D        For example
    29   答案:            A
A        feel
B        act
C        make


                            96
D              sense
  30           答案:                C
A              for
B              where
C              but
D              which
66             In Britain, winter is the season not only for visits to the theatre,
opera, concerts and ballet, but also for shopping or for sightseeing.
London, one of the coldest cities in the world, has plenty to offer during the winter
months, 21 in the way of entertainment-and the shops act like a magnet with 22
array of presents for the Christmas shopper, followed by large scale bargains in the
January sales. But it's not only London that        23   value shopping-most of our
suburban and provincial centres have just as much to offer to the 24 shopper.
      25 you're based in London, you don't have to spend all your time there-and
that goes for all the year     26 , too. Take a train or coach and see what        27
Britain has to offer; there are many excursions, even in winter, and among the great
country houses 28 keep their stately front doors open throughout the year are
Longleat and Woburn Abbey. Hire a car and drive across 29 the beauty of the winter
landscape-the scenery will be 30 beautiful-and the people will have more time
to chat to you at this time of year.
  21           答案:                B
A              normally
B              especially
C              occasionally
D              generally
  22           答案:                D
A              its
B              that
C              those
D              their
  23           答案:                A
A              offers
B              opens
C              shows
D              follows
  24           答案:                A
A              eager
B              lazy
C              lonely
D              nervous
  25           答案:                C
A              As though
B              As for
C              Even if


                                                                                   97
D              As long as
  26           答案:                D
A              over
B              about
C              through
D              round
  27           答案:                B
A              ever
B              else
C              other
D              others
  28           答案:                C
A              where
B              what
C              which
D              those
  29           答案:                A
A              into
B              on
C              over
D              from
  30           答案:                D
A              still
B              ever
C              as much as
D              even more
67             In every cultivated language there are two great classes of words which,
taken together, comprise the whole vocabulary. First, there are those words 21
which we become acquainted in daily conversation, which we learn, that is to say,
from the 22 of our own family and from our familiar associates, and which we
should know and use 23 we could not read or write. They concern the common things
of life, and are the stock in trade(惯用手段) of all who 24 the language. Such
words may be called "popular", since they belong to the people 25 and are not
the exclusive right of a limited class.
      26 , our language comprises a multitude of words which are comparatively
seldom used in ordinary conversation. Their meanings 27 to every educated person,
but there is little necessity to use them at home or in the market-place. Our first
28   with them comes not from our mother's lips or from the talk of our school-mates,
but from books that we read, lectures that we listen to, or the more formal
conversation of 29 educated speakers who are discussing some particular topic
in a style appropriately elevated above the habitual level of everyday life. Such
words are called "learned", and the 30 between them and "popular" words is of
great importance to a right understanding of linguistic process.
  21           答案:                C


                                                                                    98
A        at
B        by
C        with
D        through
    22   答案:              A
A        members
B        relatives
C        mates
D        fellows
    23   答案:              B
A        despite
B        even if
C        since
D        as well as
    24   答案:              D
A        say
B        apply
C        practise
D        speak
    25   答案:              C
A        at least
B        at most
C        at large
D        at best
    26   答案:              D
A        As a matter of fact
B        In short
C        In general
D        On the other hand
    27   答案:              B
A        know
B        are known
C        are knowing
D        knowing
    28   答案:              C
A        encounter
B        approach
C        acquaintance
D        experience
    29   答案:              A
A        highly
B        deeply
C        greatly
D        mainly


                               99
 30            答案:                D
A              contradition
B              discrepancy
C              similarity
D              distinction
68             The book is the best research machine invented. Since mass printing
began a few hundred years ago, it has given hundreds of millions of people 21 they
could not have found anywhere else.
But many readers don't know 22 a book is organized to help them. They see the
different elements of a book. However, the 23 for such organization puzzles them.
The first thing to look at is the title and author. 24 , a title doesn't tell you
very much about what is inside, but usually it does. Sometimes a subtitle 25 you
more information than the main title. 26 a book has a dust jacket, read the inside
flops(书封皮折向里面的部分). They usually give you a fairly good breakdown of 27
the book is about. Behind the title page in most books is the copyright notice. It
is    28 to look at this, especially the last date of copyright. Suppose you are
studying space travel, a book with a 1916 copyright will not 29 moon landings.
     Check the author's background, if possible. Now and then, you can find it in a
beginning part called a preface. Read carefully about the author. Do you think he
or she is 30 to write on the book's subject? Does his or her background make the
author an expert in this field?
  21           答案:                D
A              things
B              machines
C              research
D              information
  22           答案:                B
A              that
B              how
C              what
D              whether
  23           答案:                A
A              reason
B              rule
C              routine
D              value
  24           答案:                C
A              All at once
B              Ever since then
C              Every now and then
D              Once in a while
  25           答案:                B
A              shows
B              gives


                                                                                100
C              presents
D              supplies
  26           答案:                A
A              If
B              As
C              Since
D              Though
  27           答案:                A
A              what
B              which
C              that
D              there
  28           答案:                D
A              possible
B              convenient
C              easy
D              important
  29           答案:                C
A              report
B              lecture
C              cover
D              expose
  30           答案:                C
A              skilled
B              selected
C              qualified
D              specified
69                   There are different kinds of trade. The producers of a 21 may
supply products to the customers 22 the same country, and the buying and selling
of the products 23 into the domestic trade sector. More 24 , the customers
of a country 25 get certain products or raw materials as 26 own country does
not or cannot produce them. They have to buy them from producers in 27 countries.
If some countries produce goods 28 raw materials that others don't produce, they
also trade these items for other 29 they themselves do not produce. The trading
between countries is usually        30   foreign trade or international trade. The
purchase from other countries is called import, and the sales to them export.
  21           答案:                D
A              city
B              province
C              region
D              country
  22           答案:                A
A              within
B              at


                                                                               101
C              without
D              with
  23           答案:               A
A              falls
B              fall
C              fell
D              drops
  24           答案:               C
A              quickly
B              hardly
C              often
D              sudden
  25           答案:               D
A              can
B              should
C              shouldn't
D              can't
  26           答案:               B
A              them
B              their
C              theirs
D              themselves
  27           答案:               D
A              different
B              similar
C              various
D              foreign
  28           答案:               B
A              also
B              or
C              but
D              too
  29           答案:               C
A              produces
B              data
C              products
D              production
  30           答案:               B
A              term
B              termed
C              to term
D              terming
70             Solar energy is man's most important energy source. As the name implies,
solar is the energy from the sun's rays. The amount of energy that the earth receives


                                                                                   102
from the sun is many times   21 the amount used by man. If a 22 way to use it
fully could be developed,     23    source would be needed. It is, however, used
efficiently by plants that 24 the food on which animals directly or indirectly
depend. Solar energy is 25 underground in the form of fossil fuels such as coal
and petroleum.
    In the 26 an important source of energy was 27 in the form of wood. The
Industrial Revolution needed the use of coal. Recently, the fossil fuels have become
the chief energy source 28 nuclear power developing very rapidly. The fossil
fuels are our present main source of energy. Petroleum will support us for about 15
years. Natural gas, which is 29 of the fossil fuels, will probably be the first
to be 30 .

    21        答案:               D
A             as many
B             as much
C             as more
D             greater than
    22        答案:               B
A             actual
B             practical
C             real
D             true
    23        答案:               C
A             no
B             practical
C             no other
D             none of other
    24        答案:               B
A             suggest
B             supply
C             imply
D             provide
    25        答案:               A
A             stored
B             suggested
C             implied
D             provided
    26        答案:               A
A             past
B             present day
C             future
D             long run
    27        答案:               D
A             stored


                                                                                 103
B              saved
C              changed
D              provided
  28           答案:               B
A              as
B              with
C              while
D              though
  29           答案:               C
A              cleaner
B              more clean
C              the cleanest
D              the most clean
  30           答案:               D
A              run out
B              run up
C              used out
D              used up
71             When do people decide whether or not they want to become friends? During
their first four minutes together, according to a book 21 Dr. Leomard Zuninn.
In his book, Contact: The First Four Minutes, he offers this advice to anyone 22
in starting new friendships: "Every time you meet someone in a social 23 , give
him your undivided attention for four minutes. A lot of people's lives 24 change
if you did just that."
You may have noticed that the 25 person does not give his undivided attention
to someone he has just met. He keeps looking over the other person's shoulder, as
if 26 to find someone more interesting in another part of the room. If 27 has
ever done this to you, you probably did not like him very much.
     When we are introduced to new people, the author suggested, we 28 try to
appear friendly and      29 . In general, he says, "People like people who like
30 ."
  21           答案:               C
A              for
B              of
C              by
D              through
  22           答案:               A
A              interested
B              interesting
C              interest
D              interests
  23           答案:               B
A              occasion
B              situation


                                                                                    104
C              position
D              chance
  24           答案:               D
A              will
B              are going to
C              should
D              would
  25           答案:               B
A              each
B              average
C              every
D              one
  26           答案:               A
A              hoping
B              hopes
C              hope
D              hopeful
  27           答案:               B
A              everyone
B              anyone
C              some
D              any
  28           答案:               C
A              would
B              ought to
C              should
D              will
  29           答案:               A
A              self-confident
B              self-confidence
C              self-confidently
D              self-confide
  30           答案:               C
A              them
B              the self
C              themselves
D              theirs
72             Change or the ability to adapt oneself to a changing environment is
essential to evolution. The farmer whose land is required for 21 or industry must
adapt himself: he can move to another place; he can change his occupation, perhaps
22   a period of training; or he may starve to death. A nation which 23 adapt
its trade or defense requirements to meet world conditions will face an economic or
military disaster. Nothing is fixed and permanently stable. 24 must be movement
forward, which is progress,         25     movement backward, which is decay and


                                                                                105
deterioration.
     In a changing world,     26 can be a force for good or for evil. It can offer
a guide, help the uninformed to take a step 27 and, thereby, enable them to adapt
themselves to the 28          circumstances. But if we make an idol of it, the tradition
ceases to be a guide and becomes an obstacle 29 on the path of change and progress.
The better course is to 30 the help which tradition can give but to be well aware
of its limitations in a changing world.
  21            答案:               C
A               house
B               home
C               housing
D               family
  22            答案:               D
A               before
B               in
C               during
D               after
  23            答案:               B
A               can
B               can't
C               don't
D               could
  24            答案:               D
A               It
B               This
C               That
D               There
  25            答案:               C
A               and
B               but
C               or
D               yet
  26            答案:               A
A               tradition
B               change
C               movement
D               environment
  27            答案:               A
A               forward
B               aside
C               backward
D               along
  28            答案:               B
A               unchanged


                                                                                     106
B              changed
C              usual
D              old-fashioned
  29           答案:              B
A              laying
B              lying
C              lied
D              lain
  30           答案:              C
A              reject
B              refuse
C              accept
D              deny
73             To be a successful speaker, it is essential for you to know why you
are speaking and what you wish to accomplish by your speech. The four most common
21   of speech are to inform, to convince, to move to action, and to entertain. Do
you, like a teacher or an expert in a(an) 22 , wish to make your ideas clear to
people 23 with your subject? Or, like a debater, wish to convince the judge or
the audience? Or, like a fund raiser for a naturalist foundation, wish to secure
donations or 24 cash? Or, like a comedian or an after-dinner speaker, wish to
entertain? The language and the tone that you use must be 25 for your purpose,
for your audience and for the occasion. A speech to the graduating class will have
quite different language, tone and manner of 26 , for example, from information
conveyed to a group of your friends. 27 , no matter how talented the speaker is,
a talk without adequate preparation is usually a 28 . To speak without preparing
is to shoot without taking   29 . Decide what your aim or objective is; then state
it in a complete topic sentence such as "my purpose is to convince the class that
cats as well as dogs should require licenses in our community". Make sure that your
subject is definite and not too 30 .
  21           答案:              B
A              targets
B              purposes
C              tasks
D              aspects
  22           答案:              B
A              area
B              field
C              research
D              occupation
  23           答案:              D
A              unknown
B              dealing
C              agreeing
D              unfamiliar


                                                                                107
 24            答案:              A
A              collect
B              accumulate
C              invest
D              account
  25           答案:              C
A              important
B              necessary
C              appropriate
D              central
  26           答案:              B
A              performance
B              presentation
C              exhibition
D              proposal
  27           答案:              B
A              However
B              Furthermore
C              Even though
D              Therefore
  28           答案:              A
A              failure
B              collapse
C              fulfillment
D              mistake
  29           答案:              C
A              point
B              object
C              aim
D              goal
  30           答案:              D
A              narrow
B              confined
C              spacious
D              broad
74             A wise buying is to make your money go further. The good 21 to
purchase an article or a service can actually 22 your money or can reduce the
cost.
Take a hairdryer 23 example. If you are buying a hairdryer, you might 24 that
you are making the 25 buy, when you choose the one whose look you like and which
is also the cheapest 26     price. But when you get it home you may find that it costs
twice as much as a more expensive way to dry your hair. The cost of the electricity
plus the cost of your time could well 27 your hairdryer the most expensive one
of all.


                                                                                   108
     So what principles should you 28 when you go out shopping? If you 29 your
home, your car or any valuable thing in excellent condition, you'll be saving money
in the long 30 Before you buy a new item, talk to someone who owns one. If you
can, use it or borrow it to check it suits your particular need.
  21            答案:               B
A               work
B               way
C               shop
D               thing
  22            答案:               C
A               lose
B               take
C               save
D               consume
  23            答案:               B
A               as
B               for
C               to
D               with
  24            答案:               A
A               believe
B               convince
C               deny
D               argue
  25            答案:               D
A               important
B               necessary
C               appropriate
D               best
  26            答案:               C
A               on
B               at
C               in
D               for
  27            答案:               B
A               give
B               make
C               reject
D               prove
  28            答案:               A
A               adopt
B               buy
C               fulfill
D               mistake


                                                                                109
 29            答案:               B
A              pay
B              keep
C              sell
D              cost
  30           答案:               C
A              distance
B              bank
C              term
D              aim
75             Being interviewed is a situation that nearly everyone faces at some
time in life, whether for college or for a job. Most of people face this ordeal with
21    and even fear. However, people who prepare for an interview avoid much of this
anxiety. Preparing for an interview      22    doing advance research, choosing the
right outfit, and planning appropriate communication with the interviewer.
     Doing research before the actual interview will increase the         23    for a
successful interview. Find out the location and be 24 time. Nothing makes as poor
an impression on an interviewer 25 arriving late. Learn about the company and
ask 26 questions. If you interview for 27 to a school, find out what courses
the school offers. For a job interview, find out about the kind of work the company
does and the achievements they have made. If it is an interview for a promotion, 28
the duties of the job for which you are applying. Such research will show the 29
that you are interested in obtaining the 30 or being admitted to the school.
  21           答案:               C
A              hope
B              idea
C              anxiety
D              knowledge
  22           答案:               A
A              needs
B              hates
C              saves
D              involves
  23           答案:               C
A              chances
B              failures
C              possibilities
D              powers
  24           答案:               B
A              for
B              on
C              at
D              in
  25           答案:               C


                                                                                  110
A               for
B               with
C               as
D               best
  26            答案:               B
A               interesting
B               intelligent
C               informative
D               prepared
  27            答案:               C
A               finding
B               making
C               admission
D               proving
  28            答案:               D
A               take
B               refuse
C               reduce
D               research
  29            答案:               A
A               interviewer
B               the company
C               teacher
D               boss
  30            答案:               A
A               job
B               bill
C               fee
D               aim
76              "Mom, can I have some money?" Those are the words my mother used to
hear all the time. In return, I heard, " Why don't you get a job? Not to make me happy,
but so that you have your own money and gain a bit more responsibility." So last year
I got a job working about 25 hours a week. For $5 an hour, working as a salesman in
a photo studio.
     After I got this 21 , I had to do football, homework and job at the same time.
It was really hard for me. I was burning out, falling asleep at school and failing
22    many courses. My teachers were 23 at me and yelled 24 me: why have a
job? I missed a lot practice in football team and could only 25 back down at the
match. My coach was cold at me with an unasked      26 : why have a job? I told them
it was for the things I need, when actually it was for the things I wanted. 27 and
28    are different. Needing something is like your only shoes have holes in them.
But wanting is to have every new brand sneaker just because you 29 it. I start
to think about if I did a wrong thing. Slowly, I learnt to manage my money better
so that I could have more time for school and football. I learnt to make a wise 30


                                                                                    111
on what I need and what I want.
  21          答案:              B
A             money
B             job
C             picture
D             studio
  22          答案:              C
A             with
B             for
C             in
D             after
  23          答案:              C
A             happy
B             pity
C             mad
D             familiar
  24          答案:              D
A             for
B             in
C             on
D             at
  25          答案:              A
A             sat
B             ran
C             left
D             went
  26          答案:              B
A             smile
B             question
C             warmth
D             promise
  27          答案:              C
A             Job
B             Money
C             Needing
D             School
  28          答案:              B
A             failure
B             wanting
C             fulfillment
D             mistake
  29          答案:              D
A             have
B             reject


                                   112
C               see
D               like
  30           答案:                A
A               decision
B               idea
C               view
D               mind
77                  Why are children so different in their response 21 the same
situation? Some research suggests that styles of parenting may affect children's 22
in dealing with their world. According to some researchers, there are three parenting
styles and one style of parenting enhances children's competence more than the others.
Typical behavior patterns of children       23    according to each are as follows.
Authoritarian parents value control and expect their children to obey               24
questioning. In 25 homes, children are so strictly controlled that often they
cannot make independent choices about their own behavior. Permissive parents value
self-expression and self-regulation. They are warm, noncontroling, and undemanding.
In permissive homes, children receive so        26    guidance that they may become
uncertain and anxious about 27 they are doing the right thing. Authoritative
parents respect children's independent decisions, interests, and opinions, but also
stress social values. They are loving, demanding, firm in maintaining standards and
willing to impose      28   punishment. In authoritative homes, children know       29
is expected of them and can decide whether it is worth 30 parental displeasure
to pursue a goal. These children know the satisfaction of meeting responsibilities
and achieving success.
  21           答案:                C
A               with
B               at
C               to
D               for
  22           答案:                A
A               competence
B               attitude
C               opinion
D               value
  23           答案:                C
A               raise
B               raising
C               raised
D               to raise
  24           答案:                B
A               in spite of
B               without
C               regardless of
D               upon


                                                                                   113
 25             答案:                D
A               authoritative
B               democratic
C               liberal
D               authoritarian
  26            答案:                D
A               few
B               much
C               many
D               little
  27            答案:                B
A               that
B               whether
C               what
D               how
  28            答案:                A
A               mild
B               severe
C               harsh
D               lenient
  29            答案:                C
A               that
B               it
C               what
D               which
  30            答案:                B
A               challenging
B               risking
C               blending
D               overcoming
78              Everyone likes a person with good manners but no one likes a person
with bad manners.
"Yes," you may say, " 21      what are good manners? How do I know what to do and what
not to do?"
Here are some examples of the things that a well-mannered person does or does not
do. He never 22 at people when they are in trouble. 23 , he tries to help them.
He is always kind, never cruel, 24 to people or animals. When people are waiting
for a bus, or in a post office, he takes his turn. He does not push 25 the front
of the queue. In the bus, he gives his seat to an older person or a lady who is standing.
If he accidentally bumps into someone, or gets in their way, he says " 26 me" or
"I'm sorry".
     He says "please" when making a request, and "Thank you" when he receives 27 .
He stands up when speaking to a lady or an older person, and he does not sit down
28    the other person is seated. He does not 29 other people when they are talking.


                                                                                     114
He does not talk too much himself. He does not talk loudly or laugh loudly in public.
When eating, he does not speak 30 his mouth full of food. He uses a handkerchief
when he sneezes(打喷嚏) or coughs.
  21           答案:               C
A              therefore
B              or
C              but
D              so
  22           答案:               B
A              smiles
B              laughs
C              enjoys
D              delights
  23           答案:               A
A              Instead
B              Instead of
C              Rather than
D              Though
  24           答案:               D
A              both
B              nor
C              neither
D              either
  25           答案:               C
A              in
B              for
C              to
D              before
  26           答案:               D
A              Pardon
B              Forgive
C              Release
D              Excuse
  27           答案:               B
A              anything
B              something
C              everything
D              one thing
  28           答案:               D
A              even though
B              as
C              so that
D              until
  29           答案:               A


                                                                                  115
A              interrupt
B              join
C              mix up
D              bother
  30           答案:               B
A              when
B              with
C              after
D              since
79                                                           (象征) of the American
               The American Millionaire is the personification
Dream. In the "Land of the Free", they worked their way up to the top 21 the
factory floor. Many, having devoted their youth to making and saving money, 22
their later years giving money away. 23 , the Rockefeller family who made their
money through banking and oil, donated(捐献) $530 million to medical research and
education. They founded two national parks and 24 the vast Rockefeller Center
in the middle of Manhattan. The first Rockefeller, who started life as a clerk, led
a life of 25 simplicity.
Many find 26 hard to understand why these American millionaires labored so hard
to acquire wealth, then 27 so much of it away. The answer 28 be guilt or even
pride. Perhaps it is only 29 materialism    (物质享乐主义) and generosity, the urge
to acquire wealth and the urge to share it, 30 side by side in the character of
many Americans.
  21           答案:               C
A              of
B              at
C              from
D              on
  22           答案:               A
A              spent
B              kept
C              turned
D              had
  23           答案:               C
A              On occasion
B              Such as
C              For example
D              Once upon a time
  24           答案:               A
A              built
B              devised
C              raised
D              molded
  25           答案:               B
A              continual


                                                                                116
B              complete
C              emotional
D              relevant
  26           答案:                D
A              that
B              this
C              them
D              it
  27           答案:                B
A              brought
B              gave
C              took
D              carried
  28           答案:                D
A              must
B              should
C              will
D              may
  29           答案:                C
A              which
B              what
C              that
D              how
  30           答案:                B
A              exists
B              exist
C              existed
D              existing
80                  A contract is an agreement between two or more people 21 one
person agrees to do something by a specified date in return for something done by
22 . Usually the contract is a written document signed and dated by both 23 .
It must state clearly the consideration, that is, what is to be given or done by one
person in 24 for what is given or done by the other. If one person does 25 was
promised and the other does not, that the other may be sued in court and required
by court order to make good. He or she 26 also be required to pay for damages
suffered as a result of the failure to perform. The things 27 by both parties
must be stated in definite terms 28 the court will hold that the contract is 29
vague and general to be enforced. 30 , the time period within which the work is
to be done must be definite or the court will say that the document is not a contract.
  21           答案:                A
A              in which
B              that
C              which
D              on that


                                                                                   117
    22   答案:          B
A        another
B        the other
C        other
D        others
    23   答案:          B
A        parts
B        parties
C        people
D        aspects
    24   答案:          D
A        replace
B        payment
C        change
D        exchange
    25   答案:          C
A        that
B        the thing
C        what
D        something
    26   答案:          D
A        need
B        ought
C        has
D        may
    27   答案:          A
A        to be done
B        done
C        to do
D        being done
    28   答案:          C
A        and
B        else
C        or
D        so
    29   答案:          C
A        so
B        rather
C        too
D        over
    30   答案:          B
A        Similar
B        Similarly
C        The same


                          118
D               Too
81              删除 One of the causes of sexual harassment in the workplace is "sex
role spillover" that is, what happens when expectations about behavior are           21
from other domains (for example, the home) into the workplace. One example is a female
employee 22 to serve as a helper or assistant without ever advancing to a top
managerial position. Another is a male employee being automatically expected to 23
a leader in a mixed-gender group. Gutek observed that a main reason for sex role
spillover is that we tend to 24 a person more by their gender than by their work.
Try to think of a person you know without being aware of their gender. It is impossible
to do. Yet it is easy to think about some people 25 thinking about their work
role. Another explanation for sex role spillover is that some females may feel more
comfortable 26 a stereotypically female roles-as wives, daughters, sisters, or
mothers-and may only feel comfortable 27 women this way.
     Sexual harassment has negative consequences for the individuals 28 and for
the companied they work for. It affects job satisfaction and career advancement of
workers, especially female workers. It also affects companies. They may not be able
to find employees willing to work for them. Customers may stop buying their products.
Employees may feal less       29    to the company and even leave.        30 , sexual
harassment lawsuits are usually very costly. Sexual harassment has been estimated
to cost the country's 500 largest companies an average of $6.7 million annually.
  21            答案:               C
A               carried away
B               carried with
C               carried over
D               carried up
  22            答案:               D
A               expecting
B               to expect
C               having expected
D               being expected
  23            答案:               C
A               take as
B               regard as
C               act as
D               play as
  24            答案:               A
A               define
B               admit
C               prefer
D               approve
  25            答案:               B
A               instead of
B               without
C               rather than


                                                                                    119
D              in spite of
  26           答案:                A
A              with
B              at
C              on
D              for
  27           答案:                B
A              related to
B              relating to
C              being related to
D              to relate to
  28           答案:                D
A              involving
B              to involve
C              having involved
D              involved
  29           答案:                C
A              responsible
B              relevant
C              committed
D              compassionate
  30           答案:                D
A              Nevertheless
B              After all
C              On the other hand
D              On top of all this
82             In 1959 the average American family paid $989 21 a year's supply
of food. In 1972 the family paid $1,311. That was a price 22 of nearly one-third.
Every family has had this sort of experience. Everyone agrees that the cost of 23
a family has risen sharply. But there is less agreement when reasons for the rise
are being discussed. Who is really 24 ?
     Many blame the farmers who produce the vegetables, fruit, meat, eggs, and cheese
25    stores offer for sale. According to the US Department of Agriculture, the
farmer's share of the $1,311 spent by the family in 1972 was $521. This was thirty-one
percent 26 than the farmer had received in 1959. But farmers claim that this
increase was very small 27 to the increase in their cost of living. Farmers tend
to blame others for the sharp 28 in food prices. They particularly blame those
who 29 the farm products after the products leave the farm. These include truck
drivers, meat packers, manufacturers of packages and other food containers, and the
owners of stores where food is sold. They are among the "middlemen" who stand 30
the farmer and the people who buy and eat the food. Are middlemen the ones to blame
for food price?
  21           答案:                C
A              on


                                                                                   120
B        to
C        for
D        with
    22   答案:           B
A        paid
B        increase
C        decrease
D        income
    23   答案:           C
A        expense
B        expenditure
C        feeding
D        living
    24   答案:           A
A        responsible
B        fault
C        reason
D        cause
    25   答案:           B
A        these
B        that
C        they
D        them
    26   答案:           D
A        rather
B        different
C        better
D        more
    27   答案:           C
A        leading for
B        included
C        compared
D        known
    28   答案:           A
A        rise
B        arise
C        promote
D        rising
    29   答案:           D
A        sale
B        buy
C        eat
D        process
    30   答案:           D


                           121
A              for
B              out
C              among
D              between
83             When I was young, most of the books I read described heroes who were
21   and heroines who were beautiful. So, I believed I had to be beautiful if I wanted
to be 22 . Whenever I looked at someone prettier than me, I was unhappy.
As I grew up, I began to    23 outer beauty was not so important to make someone
good. A friend of mine was so beautiful that everyone wanted to talk with her, but
she was very arrogant. She believed that she could do everything she wanted, so she
24    friends one by one. Then she learnt a good lesson:         25    beauty is more
important. After she learnt that, she changed her attitude and had many 26 again.
In our society, beauty also gives us many advantages, such as getting a job. It is
true that attractive people are 27 easily. We know good-looking guys usually get
higher scores on job interviews. So, what is real 28 ? I want to say that inner
beauty is the real one because if someone has beauty in his soul, he looks more
charming.
The beauty looked at with 29 doesn't last forever. We should concentrate on inner
one. The point is that inner beauty is more important than outside beauty. So, if
we make the effort to make our 30 beautiful, we'll be happier.
  21           答案:               B
A              successful
B              handsome
C              enthusiastic
D              ordinary
  22           答案:               D
A              happy
B              pretty
C              normal
D              great
  23           答案:               A
A              realize
B              doubt
C              imagine
D              suggest
  24           答案:               C
A              missed
B              made
C              lost
D              loved
  25           答案:               C
A              outer
B              single
C              inner


                                                                                   122
D              random
  26           答案:               D
A              students
B              children
C              dreams
D              friends
  27           答案:               B
A              seen
B              hired
C              fired
D              left
  28           答案:               A
A              beauty
B              knowledge
C              happiness
D              friendship
  29           答案:               D
A              fingers
B              mouth
C              cameras
D              eyes
  30           答案:               C
A              bodies
B              faces
C              minds
D              words
84             There are two reasons why I don't think that we are ready for cloning
       .
(克隆) First, we don't know exactly what the results of cloning would be. For example,
if   21 cloned a man, they might know what he would look like, but they wouldn't
know what would 22 him. What if scientists create another Hitler? Do you really
think we would survive if this became a 23 ?
Secondly, we don't know exactly what the meaning of life is. In my opinion, creating
life is the duty of 24 . We must not interfere with that task because we can not
understand the extremely 25 relationship among lives that are defined by nature.
We have to look at the 26 environment around us. We will see that an ecosystem
(生态系统) is composed of trillions of lives, and each life has its own function
within the 27 . If we interfere with that, I think it could lead to our extinction.
Personally, I totally 28 cloning even though it may have a lot of benefits for
humans. I think we should stop it because we do not understand it and can not 29
all of its effects. Maybe in the future, we will be 30 to do it, but that time
has not arrived.
  21           答案:               D
A              policemen
B              sportsmen


                                                                                123
C        professors
D        scientists
    22   答案:           D
A        take from
B        bring to
C        result in
D        happen to
    23   答案:           A
A        reality
B        dream
C        history
D        legend
    24   答案:           C
A        human
B        society
C        nature
D        world
    25   答案:           B
A        simple
B        complex
C        strange
D        short
    26   答案:           D
A        scientific
B        modern
C        polluted
D        natural
    27   答案:           A
A        system
B        family
C        society
D        field
    28   答案:           B
A        believe in
B        disagree on
C        apply to
D        give up
    29   答案:           D
A        forget
B        produce
C        refuse
D        control
    30   答案:           C
A        hard


                           124
B               worried
C               ready
D               surprised
85                  I remember how I used to play outside with my friends during my
childhood. We always had a great time. We played a lot of 21 where we had to use
our intelligence. For example, we divided ourselves into two groups and 22 under
rules set by ourselves. Playing those games, we learnt how to organize groups and
be    23 . We made up a lot of games that didn't have to be played with toys.
     Now, the situation is   24 . They are more restricted(受到约束) when they play
outdoors. There are many reasons why that is so: the insecurity, pollution and 25
places. The results of this are very 26 for children's development. They're not
exercising, 27 socially or being raised in a natural environment. They don't have
safe places where they can play with their 28 , or travel around by bike, or just
go for an ice cream.
     Children are still playing, but instead of playing outdoors with other children,
they are playing indoors with high-tech 29 . This means they are staying inside
the house all the time and usually in front of a TV, becoming lonelier. They are making
fewer friends and are definitely not 30 their lives as much as we did in the past.
  21            答案:               B
A               cards
B               games
C               tools
D               pianos
  22            答案:               B
A               fought
B               competed
C               studied
D               worked
  23            答案:               D
A               hurried
B               excited
C               pleased
D               creative
  24            答案:               A
A               different
B               unchanged
C               complex
D               simple
  25            答案:               D
A               quiet
B               interesting
C               happy
D               unsafe
  26            答案:               C


                                                                                    125
A              healthy
B              famous
C              harmful
D              strange
  27           答案:               B
A              studying
B              developing
C              reading
D              thinking
  28           答案:               C
A              children
B              parents
C              friends
D              teachers
  29           答案:               A
A              toys
B              cars
C              tools
D              films
  30           答案:               C
A              earning
B              suffering
C              enjoying
D              changing
86             Have you tried to buy breakfast food lately? Was trying to 21 the
right thing to eat difficult? Some stores have 22 than 40 varieties of breakfast
food, and more are 23 the way. According to one expert, people can 24 a large
part of their lives making decisions about 25 to buy. For example, a simple trip
to buy butter, sugar, and carrots could take all day. It is tiring to spend extra
time 26 .
     Some shoppers, of course, don't 27 this at all. Rosinsky, a Russian who now
lives in New York, recalls, "In Russia, if you want to buy a tin of beer, you stand
in line for half an hour. Then you have one 28 if they have beer that day. Here
you spend 30 minutes deciding which beer to buy. In the 29 , you lose about the
same 30 of time. But this way is much more pleasant."
  21           答案:               A
A              find
B              look
C              see
D              recover
  22           答案:               C
A              much
B              less
C              more


                                                                                126
D             most
  23          答案:               B
A             in
B             on
C             at
D             for
  24          答案:               C
A             cost
B             use
C             spend
D             make
  25          答案:               D
A             when
B             where
C             how
D             what
  26          答案:               C
A             exercising
B             working
C             shopping
D             traveling
  27          答案:               A
A             mind
B             care
C             concern
D             think
  28          答案:               B
A             beer
B             choice
C             item
D             goods
  29          答案:               B
A             last
B             end
C             result
D             final
  30          答案:               D
A             number
B             hours
C             period
D             amount
87            In October 1949, the United Nations brought a number of officials on
food to Geneva(日内瓦) to discuss the 21 of eating habits and food supplies
of people 22 the world. One problem that 23 them was a form of illness among


                                                                               127
the children in Africa and Latin America, 24 which little was known.
Two doctors were chosen to make the study. They flew to Arica, South of Sahara and
during the next two months they visited ten countries. They found that           25
problems of poor eating existed in all parts of Africa.
     The sick children are usually 26 from one 27 four years old. 28 the
illness progresses, the children's stomachs become full of liquid. The hair changes
color and starts to fall out. The patient 29 all interest in his surroundings
and even in food, and becomes so weak that he wants to lie 30 all the time.
  21            答案:               C
A               trouble
B               difficulty
C               problem
D               question
  22            答案:               A
A               throughout
B               over
C               from
D               in
  23            答案:               B
A               excited
B               interested
C               attracted
D               aroused
  24            答案:               A
A               about
B               with
C               for
D               on
  25            答案:               D
A               few
B               little
C               much
D               serious
  26            答案:               A
A               those
B               ones
C               some
D               who
  27            答案:               C
A               and
B               or
C               to
D               but
  28            答案:               B


                                                                                128
A              Since
B              As
C              Because
D              For
  29           答案:               B
A              shows
B              loses
C              misses
D              lacks
  30           答案:               D
A              still
B              quiet
C              motionless
D              down
88             Non-smokers just don't understand. I don't need to be 21 smoking
is bad for me. I know that. But it's 22 being in love with a man who's no good.
You know it's not right, but you 23 can't help it. I don't need to be told I should
give 24 smoking. Sometimes I just sit in front of the window and 25 myself
breathing in that dangerous 26 . If I were in a concentration camp and someone
tried to make me do that, I'd like to kill them.
     People don't love themselves enough to cut down their smoking, but they may love
someone else 27 to do it. I hear that exercise is a good way to help me 28
smoking. It can help me get out of the 29 . Every time I feel bad, I decide never
to smoke again. In any case, the thought of lung cancer 30 by smoking will help
me to stop smoking all the time.
  21           答案:               B
A              said
B              told
C              spoken
D              talked
  22           答案:               B
A              as
B              like
C              as if
D              as like
  23           答案:               D
A              only
B              also
C              simple
D              just
  24           答案:               A
A              up
B              in
C              away


                                                                                  129
D             off
  25          答案:               C
A             look
B             hear
C             watch
D             observe
  26          答案:               A
A             smoke
B             air
C             poison
D             smell
  27          答案:               C
A             much
B             more
C             enough
D             less
  28          答案:               D
A             prevent
B             continue
C             increase
D             stop
  29          答案:               B
A             custom
B             habit
C             way
D             trouble
  30          答案:               A
A             caused
B             led
C             resulted
D             aroused
89                Women are playing a more and more important part in society today.
In many countries, more and more women are acting as workers, farmers, scientists
and 21 leaders, and we can say that almost all jobs which men can do are done
22   by women. With the changes in their social role, women's position in the 23
has been improved as 24 . Husband and 25 are now equal in the family. They
cope with 26 of daily life together, and share happiness 27 each other. In
today's family, you 28     hardly find a wife being busy 29 dinners, while the
husband is comfortably sitting in an armchair, 30 newspaper.
  21          答案:               A
A             even
B             evenly
C             ever
D             moreover


                                                                                 130
    22   答案:         C
A        poorly
B        best
C        perfectly
D        good
    23   答案:         C
A        society
B        company
C        family
D        home
    24   答案:         B
A        usual
B        well
C        result
D        if
    25   答案:         C
A        woman
B        daughter
C        wife
D        son
    26   答案:         D
A        troubles
B        questions
C        lives
D        problems
    27   答案:         A
A        with
B        to
C        within
D        for
    28   答案:         B
A        cannot
B        can
C        must
D        should
    29   答案:         D
A        do
B        cook
C        make
D        with
    30   答案:         C
A        seeing
B        watching
C        reading


                         131
D               looking
90                  Mr. Smith was a wealthy industrialist, but he was not 21 with
life. He didn't sleep well and his food did not agree with him. The situation lasted
for some time. Finally, after a 22 of sleepless nights, he decided to consult
his doctor. The doctor advised a change of surroundings. "Go abroad," he said. "But
I'm not good at foreign languages" said Mr. Smith. "It doesn't matter," said the doctor.
"It won't 23 you to talk a little less. Start on a voyage. Try to reduce your
weight. 24 rich food. Mr. Smith went to Switzerland. He did not know French or
German, and had to communicate through gestures. He attended a physical training
course. The instructor made him 25 his arms and shake his head rapidly. He had
to lie on the ground and 26 his right and left legs alternately(交替地). After
a time his 27 grew hard and firm. He almost put aside his financial worries and
nearly forgot the importance of 28 more money. He even began to notice individual
trees and individual birds. He ate and slept well.         29   he returned home. But
unfortunately his improvement was temporary. Soon he was worried about his 30 ,
his profits, his savings, his success in a competitive society, and things in general.
  21            答案:               D
A               good
B               interested
C               healthy
D               satisfied
  22            答案:               C
A               series
B               course
C               number
D               few
  23            答案:               B
A               stop
B               hurt
C               help
D               prevent
  24            答案:               C
A               Eat
B               Prepare
C               Avoid
D               Try
  25            答案:               A
A               move
B               turn
C               remove
D               open
  26            答案:               B
A               rise
B               raise


                                                                                    132
C              remove
D              extend
  27           答案:                D
A              bones
B              figure
C              temper
D              muscles
  28           答案:                C
A              creating
B              producing
C              making
D              taking
  29           答案:                B
A              Luckily
B              Finally
C              Reluctantly
D              Pleasantly
  30           答案:                A
A              property
B              health
C              food
D              fame
91                  Jim arrived home and discovered that he had 21 his door key.
He rang the bell but nobody came to open the door. He rang again and waited, but still
there was no 22 . He walked 23 the house to see 24 he could find an open
window, but they were all clocked. It was going to rain and so he didn't know 25
to do. Betty, his wife had obviously 26 out, and he didn't know where she had
gone to or when she would return. He waited for half 27 hour, still nobody came.
Being wet and cold and angry, he picked up a big stone and threw it 28 the kitchen
window. Just as he had unlocked the window and was climbing through it, he heard the
front door 29 . His wife had 30 back.
  21           答案:                B
A              found
B              forgotten
C              lent
D              borrowed
  22           答案:                D
A              one
B              sound
C              reply
D              answer
  23           答案:                C
A              in
B              into


                                                                                   133
C              round
D              along
  24           答案:                C
A              that
B              when
C              if
D              how
  25           答案:                D
A              when
B              whether
C              who
D              what
  26           答案:                B
A              been
B              gone
C              come
D              played
  27           答案:                B
A              a
B              an
C              of
D              the
  28           答案:                D
A              in
B              to
C              off
D              at
  29           答案:                C
A              close
B              shut
C              open
D              start
  30           答案:                C
A              been
B              jumped
C              come
D              turned
92                  Once a young man traveled by train. It was a long and boring journey.
As the train was moving 21 a wilderness, the passengers looked out of the windows
22 . When the train reached a bend, it 23 and then a simple house 24 . It
was so easy to notice 25       everybody on the train turned to "enjoy" with eyes wide
open. Some passengers ever began a 26 about it. The young man was also 27 by
the scenery. On his return he 28 the train at the nearest station and found his
29   to the house. Its owner said that he was troubled by the 30 of the train.


                                                                                     134
He wanted to sell the house, but nobody would buy it.
  21          答案:              C
A             over
B             around
C             through
D             across
  22          答案:              B
A             happily
B             quietly
C             safely
D             clearly
  23          答案:              C
A             dropped off
B             fell behind
C             slowed down
D             rushed out
  24          答案:              A
A             appeared
B             found
C             discovered
D             came
  25          答案:              B
A             when
B             that
C             why
D             how
  26          答案:              A
A             discussion
B             meeting
C             subject
D             competition
  27          答案:              D
A             attacked
B             frightened
C             trapped
D             attracted
  28          答案:              C
A             got on
B             looked for
C             got off
D             waited for
  29          答案:              B
A             address
B             way


                                                        135
C               key
D               trip
  30            答案:                D
A               track
B               conductor
C               passenger
D               noise
93              Ted and Mary have married for more than 10 years and they always live
happily together. Their secret is to compromise(妥协).
     I remember when they took their first holiday together. Ted wanted to do something
21 , because he didn't usually get 22 exercise during the year. Mary's job meant
that she was 23 her feet most of the time. 24 she wanted to do was to lie
in the sun. Ted hated the idea of 25 on a beach; Mary hated the idea of being
too 26 . They 27 , and took their holiday in mid-summer, high in the Alps
(阿尔卑斯山). Mary was able to lie in the sun by the hotel swimming pool, 28 Ted
went off for long walks in the 29 with a group of hikers. In the evening they
met at the hotel, both 30       with their day, happy to eat a leisurely(悠闲的) meal
together and dance a little afterwards.
  21            答案:                D
A               quiet
B               slow
C               dangerous
D               energetic
  22            答案:                C
A               a few
B               some
C               much
D               any
  23            答案:                C
A               above
B               beyond
C               on
D               near
  24            答案:                C
A               How
B               That
C               What
D               Which
  25            答案:                A
A               lying
B               laying
C               walking
D               driving
  26            答案:                C


                                                                                    136
A              polite
B              tired
C              active
D              selfish
  27           答案:               B
A              insisted
B              compromised
C              gave up
D              disagreed
  28           答案:               C
A              as a result
B              in addition
C              while
D              what's more
  29           答案:               A
A              mountains
B              beaches
C              lakes
D              swimming pools
  30           答案:               D
A              dissatisfied
B              disappointed
C              relaxed
D              content
94             Cars are an important part of life in the United States. 21 a car
most people feel that they are poor. And 22 a person is poor, he does not feel
really poor when he has a car. Cars make the United States a nation on 23 .
There are three main reasons why the car became so 24 in the United States. First
of all, the country is a 25 one and Americans like to move around in it. The car
provides the most comfortable and cheapest       26   of transportation. The second
reason is the fact 27 the United States never really developed an 28 and
inexpensive form of public transportation. The third, and the most important reason,
is the American spirit of     29 . Americans don't like to have to follow an exact
schedule. A car gives them the freedom to schedule their own time, and this is the
freedom that Americans want 30 to have.

    21        答案:               B
A             With
B             Without
C             Because of
D             For
    22        答案:               A
A             even if
B             since


                                                                                 137
C              however
D              now that
  23           答案:              D
A              farms
B              wells
C              ways
D              wheels
  24           答案:              C
A              possible
B              polite
C              popular
D              precise
  25           答案:              A
A              huge
B              small
C              narrow
D              tiny
  26           答案:              B
A              method
B              form
C              flow
D              choice
  27           答案:              C
A              why
B              what
C              that
D              which
  28           答案:              A
A              efficient
B              effective
C              exact
D              earnest
  29           答案:              B
A              cooperation
B              independence
C              peace
D              game
  30           答案:              D
A              mere
B              much
C              more
D              most
95             What can we get 21      good books?
First of all, good books can give us   22 . There are many kinds of joy to be found


                                                                                138
in good books: enjoyment of the story, the ideas, the use of beautiful language. 23
the smell and feel of a good book can bring us pleasure.
Secondly, good books can offer us companionship(陪伴). 24 good books in hands,
we need never be 25 . The people we meet in books may delight us either because
they resemble human friends that we hold dear, 26 because they present unfamiliar
types that we are glad to welcome as new friends.
Thirdly, good books can 27 our experience. Few of us can travel far from home
or have a wide range of adventures, but all of us        28     lead richer lives and
experience a variety of feelings through reading good books.
      29 we can derive from good books pleasure, companionship and experience, we
should spare some time and read as many good books as         30 .
  21           答案:               B
A              at
B              from
C              on
D              for
  22           答案:               A
A              pleasure
B              post
C              position
D              pollution
  23           答案:               C
A              Because
B              So
C              Even
D              Although
  24           答案:               D
A              While
B              Within
C              Without
D              With
  25           答案:               B
A              alone
B              lonely
C              lost
D              excited
  26           答案:               A
A              or
B              nor
C              but
D              and
  27           答案:               B
A              quicken
B              widen


                                                                                  139
C              sharpen
D              harden
  28           答案:               C
A              may
B              must
C              can
D              should
  29           答案:               A
A              Since
B              Whenever
C              If
D              As soon as
  30           答案:               D
A              active
B              suitable
C              right
D              possible
96             We all know that dogs, pigs, and monkeys are very 21 animals. But
when it 22 underwater intelligence, no animal is smarter than the dolphin(海
豚). No one knows 23 sure how smart dolphins are, but we 24 know they are
fast learners. They can 25 many amazing tricks, such as ringing bells with their
snouts(口鼻部), shaking hands with their flippers(鳍), and taking bows. They can
even act.
      26 most dolphins live in the ocean, you might think they're fish. Actually,
they are mammals(哺乳动物), just like people. That means they grow hair, give 27
to their young, and breathe air. Every so often, the dolphin must        28   to the
surface and breathe through its blowhole. Like land animals, dolphins can't drink
salt water. They get most of their      29   water from their food. So even though
dolphins live underwater, they survive just like desert animals, with no direct 30
of drinking water.
  21           答案:               D
A              safe
B              strong
C              stupid
D              clever
  22           答案:               A
A              comes to
B              goes to
C              considers
D              discovers
  23           答案:               D
A              about
B              of
C              in


                                                                                 140
D              for
  24           答案:               C
A              did
B              does
C              do
D              done
  25           答案:               B
A              operate
B              perform
C              control
D              manage
  26           答案:               A
A              Because
B              Even if
C              Although
D              While
  27           答案:               B
A              meat
B              milk
C              meal
D              machine
  28           答案:               A
A              rise
B              raise
C              arise
D              arouse
  29           答案:               D
A              salt
B              dirty
C              clean
D              fresh
  30           答案:               B
A              sense
B              source
C              resource
D              response
97             Can you imagine how you would feel if you fell dangerously ill and could
not reach or call a doctor? Millions of people           21    the world are in this
unfortunate 22 , living in distant places where there are no railways, no proper
roads and no telephones. Thousands of 23 are lost every year which could have
been saved if medical attention 24 in time.
     But today help could be brought quickly and easily 25 many of these people
if only full advantage was taken 26 the aero-plane. No country has proved this
better than Australia. The Australians make greater use of the aero-plane than any


                                                                                    141
27   people in the world. In no other country 28 the total number of miles flown
by the average person so high. In fact, it has been said that Australians jump into
planes    29    people in other countries jump into trains and buses. It is not
surprising, therefore, that Australia should have been the first country 30 a
Flying Doctor Service.
  21          答案:                C
A             on
B             through
C             all over
D             within
  22          答案:                D
A             society
B             world
C             way
D             position
  23          答案:                D
A             people
B             children
C             families
D             lives
  24          答案:                A
A             had been provided
B             had been paid more
C             was given
D             was provided
  25          答案:                D
A             from
B             with
C             in
D             to
  26          答案:                A
A             of
B             from
C             about
D             on
  27          答案:                C
A             of
B             else
C             other
D             Japanese
  28          答案:                D
A             of
B             in
C             are


                                                                                142
D              is
  29           答案:                C
A              when
B              while
C              as
D              but
  30           答案:                B
A              of
B              to develop
C              made up
D              into
98             My father waved me goodbye and the bus 21 My first country journey
then began. The man sitting next to me was a road engineer. He said that 22 by
bus was an excellent way to test road for him. We passed many villages on the way
and stopped once 23 to buy cold drinks, 24 it was very hot. The countryside
was brown and dry and there were long stretches with no people or villages in 25 .
We also stopped once at some road works, which made my traveling companion very
excited.
Most of us were dozing in the afternoon heat when we were 26 by a sudden noise
which 27 a shot from a gun. As the bus swerved(突然转向) and then stopped at
the side of the road, I remembered all the horrible stories I had read about bands
of robbers who used to attack travelers on 28 roads like this. Many of the other
people looked as bewildered and frightened as I must have looked.
My neighbor, 29 , reassured me. "Nothing to worry about, only a 30 tyre. But
we shall have to wait while he changes the wheel."
  21           答案:                B
A              set in
B              set off
C              set
D              set up
  22           答案:                A
A              traveling
B              going
C              judging
D              coming
  23           答案:                B
A              and two
B              or twice
C              or two
D              and twice
  24           答案:                A
A              because
B              since
C              now that


                                                                               143
D              when
  25           答案:                C
A              view
B              vision
C              sight
D              eyes
  26           答案:                D
A              waken
B              awake
C              woke
D              woken
  27           答案:                B
A              sounded as
B              sounded like
C              sounded with
D              sound as if
  28           答案:                B
A              desert
B              deserted
C              dessert
D              desserted
  29           答案:                C
A              therefore
B              although
C              however
D              furthermore
  30           答案:                A
A              flat
B              broken
C              wrong
D              burst
99             Last Tuesday I took my two daughters, aged five and seven, to town by
car. It began to rain heavily so I decided I would leave the children in the 21
before I rushed into a shop. I warned the girls not to touch anything and told them
I would be back within a few minutes. Then I locked all the doors and 22 them
happily looking out of the window.
I returned to the car in less than five minutes but the girls had 23 ! I could
hardly believe my eyes. The car doors were still locked, the windows tightly shut
and in the back seat were only two coats. Being 24 , I ran to the corner of the
street 25 there was no sign of them. I 26 up to an old lady nearby and asked
whether she had seen two small girls but she said "No".
Feeling quite sick with 27 , I sat on the driver's seat, and tried to stop trembling.
Suddenly, I 28 a merry laugh behind me. I got out of the car, ran round to open
the BOOT and there inside were two very red-faced and excited girls. They had obviously


                                                                                   144
(显然) pulled out the back seat, climbed behind it and then been unable to push
the 29 forward again. With tears in my eyes, I leaned forward and 30 their
ears.
  21      答案:               A
A         car
B         bus
C         house
D         school
  22      答案:               C
A         had
B         made
C         left
D         let
  23      答案:               A
A         disappeared
B         died
C         quarreled
D         cried
  24      答案:               C
A         stupid
B         proud
C         frightened
D         pleased
  25      答案:               A
A         where
B         which
C         that
D         when
  26      答案:               B
A         jumped
B         rushed
C         drove
D         flew
  27      答案:               A
A         fear
B         happiness
C         excitement
D         anger
  28      答案:               D
A         felt
B         smelt
C         saw
D         heard
  29      答案:               C


                                                                          145
A              window
B              door
C              seat
D              boot
  30           答案:                B
A              hit
B              pulled
C              cut
D              bit
100            Plants are very important living things. Life could not go on 21
there were no plants. This is because plants can make food from air, water and sunlight.
Animals and man 22 make food from air, water and sunlight. Animals 23 their
food by eating plants and man 24 . Therefore,animals and man need plants in order
to   25 .This is the reason why we find that there are so much plants around us.
If you look carefully at the plants around, you 26 find that there are many types
of plants. Some plants are large 27 others are small. Most plants are yellow.
Some plants have many small leaves. Others have only little large leaves. There are
many kinds of leaves. Leaves are of 28 shapes and colors.
Leaves are also different      29   other ways. Some leaves have short leaf stalks
(叶茎) while others have long leaf stalks. Still others have neither stalks at all.
The edges(边) of leaves are also different. Some leaves have smooth edges. Some
have wave edges. Others have edges 30 the teeth of a saw(锯).
  21           答案:                D
A              before
B              unless
C              whether
D              if
  22           答案:                C
A              don't
B              not
C              cannot
D              can
  23           答案:                A
A              get
B              because
C              steal
D              give
  24           答案:                A
A              too
B              either
C              also
D              already
  25           答案:                B
A              eat


                                                                                    146
B              live
C              have
D              get
  26           答案:               D
A              are going to
B              may
C              certainly
D              will
  27           答案:               D
A              when
B              yet
C              and
D              while
  28           答案:               B
A              much
B              different
C              same
D              the same
  29           答案:               D
A              from
B              with
C              on
D              in
  30           答案:               A
A              like
B              as
C              as if
D              seem
101                The Indians rise as soon as it is light. The children run down to
the river to swim and the women go to the river to bring fresh water. Soon maize
(玉米) soup is being prepared for 21 . Before noon they will eat again, 22
fish, meat and bananas and the fruits. When the sun has 23 over the river, some
of the younger women go 24 their children by boat to their forest plantation
(种植园) to 25 maize, bananas and wild fruits. The older women stay in the house
making pots which 26 for drinking water. Later they 27 the evening meal and
look after the children. The women do most of the daily work and each 28 day
involves much the same routine. The men who may have been hunting during the night,
29   the day repairing nets, replacing an arrow 30 while hunting, fishing with
hook and line.
  21           答案:               C
A              children
B              fishing
C              breakfast
D              hunting


                                                                                 147
    22   答案:              D
A        as
B        like
C        dining
D        usually
    23   答案:              A
A        risen
B        to rise
C        raised
D        been raising
    24   答案:              B
A        to
B        with
C        together
D        tell
    25   答案:              D
A        accept
B        feed
C        receive
D        collect
    26   答案:              D
A        used
B        is used
C        can use
D        may be used
    27   答案:              A
A        have to prepare
B        have prepared
C        are prepared
D        have been preparing
    28   答案:              C
A        next
B        another
C        new
D        one
    29   答案:              B
A        passing
B        pass
C        passed
D        have passed
    30   答案:              C
A        taken
B        found
C        lost


                               148
D               saved
102             One crossing of the Atlantic is very much like another; and people who
cross it frequently do not make the voyage for the 21 of its interest. Most of
us are quite happy when we feel 22 to go to bed and pleased when the journey 23 .
On the first night of the voyage, I felt especially lazy and went to bed 24 earlier
than usual. When I arrived in my cabin, I was surprised 25 that I was to have
a companion(同伴) during my trip. I had expected 26 but there was a suitcase
27    mine in the opposite corner. I wondered who he could be and what he would be
like. Soon afterwards he came in. He was the sort of man you might meet 28 , except
that he was wearing 29 good clothes that I made up my mind that we would not 30
and I did not say a single word to him.
  21           答案:                D
A               reason
B               motive
C               cause
D               sake
  22           答案:                A
A              tired enough
B               enough tired
C               ourselves tired enough
D               ourselves enough tired
  23           答案:                C
A               is achieved
B               finished
C               is over
D               is in the end
  24           答案:                B
A               quite
B               rather
C               fairly
D               somehow
  25           答案:                D
A               for seeing
B               that I saw
C               at seeing
D               to see
  26           答案:                D
A               being lonely
B               to be lonely
C               being alone
D               to be alone
  27           答案:                A
A               like
B               as


                                                                                  149
C              similar than
D              the same that
  28           答案:               D
A              in each place
B              for all parts
C              somewhere
D              anywhere
  29           答案:               D
A              a so
B              so
C              such a
D              such
  30           答案:               C
A              treat together well
B              pass together well
C              get on well together
D              go by well together
103                  When I was twelve, I suddenly developed a great passion      21
writing poetry. I gave up all my hobbies, such as 22 stamps, and spent all my
23    time reading poetry and writing it. This habit of writing poetry on every
possible 24 soon got me into trouble at school. If a class did not interest me,
I would take out my notebook and start writing poems in class. Of course I did this
very 25 , but it was not long before I got caught. One day while I was busy writing
a poem during an English class, I looked up to find the teacher standing over me,
fuming with anger because I was not 26 attention. He tore the poem up, with a
27   not to waste time in his class. All the same I was convinced that I had written
a good poem, so that evening I wrote it out again from memory. Not long after I read
about a poetry contest, I decided to send in my poem. Weeks later, long after I had
given up hope, I got a letter informing me that I had won the first 28 . Everyone
at school was very impressed - except the English teacher, who         29    me more
carefully than ever. He was quite 30 that I was not going to write poetry in his
class.
  21           答案:               A
A              for
B              on
C              at
D              against
  22           答案:               B
A              assembling
B              collecting
C              gathering
D              keeping
  23           答案:               D
A              additional


                                                                                 150
B             extra
C             other
D             spare
  24          答案:               C
A             chance
B             moment
C             occasion
D             time
  25          答案:               D
A             anxiously
B             attentively
C             cautiously
D             carefully
  26          答案:               D
A             offering
B             devoting
C             extending
D             paying
  27          答案:               A
A             warning
B             notice
C             word
D             look
  28          答案:               B
A             bonus
B             prize
C             reward
D             victory
  29          答案:               D
A             saw
B             gazed
C             observed
D             watched
  30          答案:               A
A             determined
B             annoyed
C             fixed
D             assured
104             People take up hobbies because these activities offer enjoyment,
knowledge and relaxation. Sometimes they even yield financial profit. Hobbies help
people relax after periods of hard work. Hobbies also offer interesting activities
for persons who have retired. 21 , rich or poor, old or young, sick or well, can
follow a satisfying hobby, 22 of his age or income.
Hobbies can help a person's mental and physical health. Doctors have found that


                                                                               151
hobbies are essential in helping patients recover from physical or mental illness.
Hobbies give bedridden(卧床不起) or wheel-chair(坐轮椅) patients something to
do, something that 23 patients from thinking about themselves. Many hospitals
treat patients by 24 them take up interesting hobbies.
     In early times, most people were 25 busy making a 26 to have many hobbies.
People today have more 27 time than ever before. Machines and automation have
28    the amount of time they must spend on their 29 . Hobbies provide variety for
                                  (
workers who do the same monotonous 单调的)task all day long. More people are retiring
than ever before at an early age. Those who have developed hobbies never need to worry
about 30 to do with their newly-found leisure hours.
  21            答案:                C
A               None
B               Someone
C               Everyone
D               No one
  22            答案:                D
A               instead
B               in spite
C               because
D               regardless
  23            答案:                D
A               takes
B               holds
C               turns
D               keeps
  24            答案:                A
A               having
B               ordering
C               allowing
D               enabling
  25            答案:                C
A               so
B               very
C               too
D               rather
  26            答案:                A
A               living
B               profession
C               career
D               occupation
  27            答案:                B
A               passion
B               leisure
C               pleasure


                                                                                  152
D              esteem
  28           答案:               B
A              slowed
B              reduced
C              dropped
D              fallen
  29           答案:               A
A              jobs
B              hobbies
C              own
D              interest
  30           答案:               B
A              how
B              what
C              when
D              whether
105                An interesting theory in economics is demonstrated by the Head Man
of a small mountain tribe. It seems that this tribe was very good 21 straw mats
(草席) that had great sales potential in the 22 market. The representative of
an American company went to visit the tribe and tried to 23 a good business deal.
He spoke to the Head Man and declared that his company would like 24 several
thousand pieces. Undoubtedly, he said, the business 25 would be profitable to
the tribe. After some thought, the Head Man agreed, but announced that the price 26
would be higher on 27 order than it would be if only a small order 28 placed.
The representative was more than a little shocked at the business sense of the Head
Man and insisted that the price should be lower because of the large volume, and
certainly not higher. "No," replied the head of the tribe stubbornly. "But         29
not?" asked the American. "Because it is so tiresome to make 30 article over and
over," answered the Head Man.
  21           答案:               A
A              at making
B              for making
C              to make
D              in making
  22           答案:               C
A              worldly
B              global
C              world
D              globe
  23           答案:               B
A              take
B              make
C              create
D              do


                                                                                  153
 24            答案:               D
A              ordering
B              order
C              and ordered
D              to order
  25           答案:               C
A              exchange
B              affair
C              deal
D              matter
  26           答案:               B
A              for piece
B              per piec
C              for the pieces
D              per a piece
  27           答案:               B
A              so a big
B              such a big
C              so big an
D              such big an
  28           答案:               C
A              was
B              would be
C              were
D              had been
  29           答案:               D
A              what
B              how
C              which
D              why
  30           答案:               B
A              alike
B              the same
C              similar
D              same
106            This morning the sun was 21 , and I decided to begin seeing the sight
of London. So I asked the manager of my hotel 22 I should see first, and he 23
me to go to the Tower of London in the morning and to Westminster in the afternoon.
     I set 24 at about nine in the morning by the underground train, and managed
to get off at the right station. I had to walk a short distance from the train to
the Tower and found 25       in a group of several other people. Some of them were
foreigners like myself, who were also 26 the opportunity of the fine weather to
see something of London. We reached the entrance 27 the Tower, crossed a bridge
and were met by a soldier    28 strange red and yellow clothes, 29 a big crown


                                                                                 154
sewn on his chest, a flat black hat on his head and a long stick in his hand. I know
from books I had read that he was one of the "Beefeaters", the old soldiers dressed
in clothes of long ago who 30 the Tower.
  21           答案:              A
A              shining
B              raising
C              lanterning
D              glowing
  22           答案:              B
A              that
B              what
C              when
D              why
  23           答案:              B
A              supported
B              advised
C              supposed
D              ordered
  24           答案:              A
A              off
B              up
C              down
D              forth
  25           答案:              C
A              me
B              mine
C              myself
D              my own
  26           答案:              C
A              making
B              doing
C              taking
D              completing
  27           答案:              A
A              to
B              in
C              with
D              of
  28           答案:              B
A              with
B              in
C              off
D              on
  29           答案:              A


                                                                                 155
A               with
B               in
C               off
D               on
  30            答案:                B
A               see
B               guard
C               maintain
D               prevent
107             Ali, who was working a long way from home, wanted to send a letter 21
his wife, but he could neither read 22 write, and he had to work all day, so he
23 only look for somebody to write his letter late 24 night. 25 last he
found the house of a letter-writer 26 was Nasreddin.
Nasreddin was already 27        bed. "It is late," he said. "What do you want?" "I want
you to write a letter to my wife," said Ali. Nasreddin was not pleased. He thought
28    a few seconds and then said, "Has the letter got to go far?"
"What dose that matter?" answered Ali.
     "Well, my writing is so strange 29 only I can read it, and if I have to travel
a long way to read your letter to your wife, it will cost 30 a lot of money.
  21            答案:                B
A               from
B               to
C               for
D               of
  22            答案:                C
A               and
B               but
C               nor
D               as well as
  23            答案:                A
A               could
B               can
C               must
D               should
  24            答案:                D
A               in
B               on
C               by
D               at
  25            答案:                C
A               For
B               On
C               At
D               To


                                                                                    156
 26            答案:               D
A              whose
B              what
C              which
D              who
  27           答案:               B
A              on
B              in
C              at
D              off
  28           答案:               B
A              after
B              for
C              in
D              of
  29           答案:               D
A              because
B              for
C              then
D              that
  30           答案:               A
A              you
B              from you
C              of you
D              your
108            Mr. and Mrs. Harris had always spent their summer holidays in a small
hotel at the seaside near their hometown. One year, however, Mr. Harris made a lot
of   21 in his business, 22 they decided to go to a foreign country and stay
at a really good 23 .
They flew to Rome, and 24 at a 5-star hotel late in the evening. They thought
that they would have to go to bed hungry, because in that 25 hotel they had been
used to stay in the past, no meals were served 26 seven in the evening. They were
27   to be told that the hotel served dinner until ten.
"Then what are the times      28 meals?" asked Mrs. Harris.
"Well, madam, we serve breakfast from seven to eleven, lunch from twelve to three,
29   from four to five, and dinner from six to ten."
"But that hardly 30 any time for us to see the city!" said Mrs. Harris.
  21           答案:               D
A              mistakes
B              time
C              friends
D              money
  22           答案:               B
A              but


                                                                                 157
B        so
C        though
D        yet
    23   答案:               A
A        hotel
B        place
C        city
D        hall
    24   答案:               A
A        stayed
B        got
C        arrived
D        reached
    25   答案:               A
A        small
B        big
C        foreign
D        good
    26   答案:               B
A        on
B        after
C        during
D        until
    27   答案:               C
A        tired
B        interested
C        surprised
D        worried
    28   答案:               D
A        with
B        on
C        at
D        of
    29   答案:               B
A        drink
B        tea
C        beer
D        food
    30   答案:               D
A        takes
B        does
C        has
D        leaves
109      Have you ever visited Rock Beach? The water was very   21   many years


                                                                            158
ago, but it is now very dirty. It is dirty 22 people throw rubbish on the beach.
They visit the beach and 23 their plastic bags, lunch boxes and other rubbish.
At night, the waves take the rubbish into the 24 . The rubbish makes the water
very dirty.
The dirty water is 25 for the sea animals and plants. The plants cannot grow.
26    the sea animals have no food and they die. It is also not good for 27 because
we cannot swim in the sea. The rubbish on the beach is dangerous for us, too. People
sometimes leave 28 bottles. Other people walk on these bottles and cut their
29 .
     Do you want to 30 the sea animals and other people? Then come and clean the
beach with us!
  21            答案:               D
A               bad
B               dirty
C               deep
D               clean
  22            答案:               B
A               so
B               because
C               if
D               until
  23            答案:               A
A               leave
B               take
C               make
D               forget
  24            答案:               B
A               river
B               sea
C               beach
D               dustbin
  25            答案:               C
A               safe
B               useful
C               bad
D               little
  26            答案:               A
A               Then
B               Or
C               Yet
D               But
  27            答案:               B
A               them
B               us


                                                                                 159
C              you
D              me
  28           答案:               C
A              new
B              beautiful
C              broken
D              polluted
  29           答案:               D
A              mouth
B              hands
C              head
D              feet
  30           答案:               A
A              help
B              find
C              get
D              see
110            When foreigners come to China for the first time, they are always
surprised by the number of bicycles on the roads. China has more cyclists than 21
other country in the world.
   22 the roads are so crowded with bicycles, it is very important for cyclists to
23    the traffic rules and regulations.
Before you 24 your bicycle on the roads, you must register(注册) it and get
a number for it. This 25 will be on a plate on your bicycle. Also, the traffic
authorities will want to check the bicycle to make sure that it is in           26
condition.
Young    27   may not ride bicycles in the streets, because there is      28  much
traffic that is dangerous. A cyclist must 29 at least one hand on the handlebars
at all times, and a bicycle 30 not carry more than one adult person.
  21           答案:               C
A              the
B              one
C              any
D              some
  22           答案:               D
A              Because of
B              So that
C              As a matter of
D              Because
  23           答案:               B
A              forget
B              remember
C              describe
D              speak


                                                                               160
 24            答案:               D
A              push
B              drive
C              bring
D              ride
  25           答案:               B
A              letter
B              number
C              dish
D              word
  26           答案:               A
A              good
B              bad
C              poor
D              wonderful
  27           答案:               D
A              soldiers
B              teachers
C              women
D              children
  28           答案:               A
A              so
B              no
C              as
D              far
  29           答案:               B
A              move
B              keep
C              drop
D              pull
  30           答案:               A
A              must
B              will
C              shall
D              may
111            This month, high school seniors(高年级学生) 21 the country will
be turning in their college applications(申请). Some will apply 22 schools far
away, while others will turn to colleges within driving distance. Those in 23 of
going away to school believe that living away 24 home broadens a young person'
s world and teaches him or her responsibility. 25 feel that living at home is
not just a money saver, but keeps family ties strong, and prevents irresponsible
behavior sometimes associated(与..  ..相联系) 26 dormitory life, such as binge
drinking and skipping classes(逃课). Which 27 you think is the wiser choice?
What does your teenager plan to do? What would your preference(倾向) be?


                                                                             161
Living away from home and staying on campus could be better. The time a student takes
to drive to and from school could be put to good use 28 campus either studying
or getting assignment(作业) done. On campus a student can find more students to
study with and more students to 29 ideas with. On campus a student would have
more time to use the Recreation Centers if a student is having difficulty with a
subject. The experiences to be learnt away from home cannot be learnt at home.
Experience such as independence and 30 making.
  21           答案:               A
A              around
B              off
C              to
D              away
  22           答案:               B
A              about
B              to
C              up
D              down
  23           答案:               C
A              prefer
B              charge
C              favor
D              change
  24           答案:               B
A              out
B              from
C              inside
D              up
  25           答案:               D
A              Some
B              another
C              the other
D              Others
  26           答案:               A
A              with
B              without
C              inside
D              out
  27           答案:               B
A              does
B              do
C              was
D              is
  28           答案:               D
A              between


                                                                                  162
B              beneath
C              above
D              on
  29           答案:               A
A              share
B              have
C              has
D              take
  30           答案:               C
A              tea
B              car
C              decision
D              revolution
112            When I 21 14, my family drove from our home in Connecticut to Prince
Edward Island for a two-week vacation. Arriving 22 the island that July in 1967,
we   23 for a campground on the north shore, but made a wrong turn 24 along
the way. We came to a dead end at the water, and my mother went to a nearby farmhouse
to ask for 25 . After telling us how to get there, Lloyd and Blanche Adams offered
us the use of their shorefront. We put up our tent and stayed the entire two weeks
on what was the 26 beautiful beach on the island.
After arriving back home, my mother wrote to Blanche to see if she knew of a teenage
27   in the area who would like to be my pen pal. Blanche sent along Anne Crozier's
name. Anne and I wrote to each other for two years 28 my family and I returned
to PEI and I met her for the first time. We continued to 29 and the following
year my family went back to visit again. That time Anne's older brother, Blair, 30
he'd like to meet his sister's 17-year-old American pen pal.
  21           答案:               A
A              was
B              am
C              were
D              have been
  22           答案:               B
A              at
B              on
C              up
D              in
  23           答案:               C
A              built
B              created
C              searched
D              met
  24           答案:               A
A              somewhere
B              anywhere


                                                                                  163
C              everywhere
D              nowhere
  25           答案:               D
A              food
B              drink
C              money
D              directions
  26           答案:               D
A              better
B              worst
C              more
D              most
  27           答案:               C
A              boy
B              children
C              girl
D              worker
  28           答案:               A
A              before
B              after
C              until
D              while
  29           答案:               A
A              write
B              speak
C              talk
D              discuss
  30           答案:               B
A              has decided
B              decided
C              deciding
D              be decided
113            What should we do to stay healthy? One important rule is to exercise
21 . The Fang family tries to exercise every day. Lee Fang 22 exercise in the
morning because he must be at his job at exactly seven o'clock. But he runs every
evening. He would rather run than watch TV. He walks a lot, 23 . He walks to school
every day, and after school he 24 different sports with his friends. Lee Fang
goes to a yoga(瑜伽) class 25 .
But it wasn't 26 this way. Last year Mr. and Mrs. Fang used to 27 everywhere,
even to the drugstore two blocks(街区) away. They thought they had to use the car
all the time. They wouldn't walk.
The Fangs all    28    better now. And they believe you mustn't be lazy. You     29
exercise every day. But you should 30 to get in shape and stay in shape.
  21           答案:               A


                                                                                164
A        often
B        sometimes
C        late
D        later
    22   答案:               B
A        may not
B        can not
C        would not
D        should not
    23   答案:               C
A        either
B        also
C        too
D        again
    24   答案:               D
A        watches
B        plays
C        loves
D        practices
    25   答案:               D
A        in two weeks
B        for two weeks
C        after two weeks
D        twice a week
    26   答案:               A
A        always
B        seldom
C        usually
D        sometimes
    27   答案:               B
A        ride
B        drive
C        fly
D        walk
    28   答案:               C
A        had
B        make
C        feel
D        feel like
    29   答案:               A
A        needn't
B        don't
C        won't have to
D        mustn't


                               165
 30            答案:                A
A               try
B              want
C               wish
D               hope
114             Dick was born in a 21 family. His father had a small boat and went
fishing in the morning and sold the fish in the market in the afternoon. Then he brought
some 22 for his family. When winter came, they were often hungry. One morning
the hungry man      23    the river and wasn't found again. Dick's mother left her
three-year-old son without saying goodbye. His aunt 24                 look after him.
Twenty years passed. Dick     25 a tall, strong man. He found work on a farm. He worked
hard and wanted to get more money. He often went to see his aunt 26 some nice
presents. The woman was very happy, but one day she 27 in a traffic accident.
The young man was very sad. After he buried her, he decided to buy a beautiful tombstone
(墓碑)for her. He went to town and came into a shop, but all the tombstones were
too 28 . He asked, "Do you sell any old tombstones, please?"
     "Yes, we do, sir, " answered the shopkeeper.
     "Is it as expensive as a new one?"
     "No, it's much cheaper, " said the man, "But 29 name is on it."
     "It doesn't matter, "said Dick. "My aunt couldn't 30 ."
  21           答案:                C
A               big
B               small
C               poor
D               rich
  22           答案:                B
A               presents
B               food
C               clothes
D               meat
  23           答案:                A
A               fell into
B               fell off
C               dropped in
D               went down
  24           答案:                D
A               dared
B               needed to
C               had
D               had to
  25           答案:                C
A               had
B               grew
C               became


                                                                                     166
D              got
  26           答案:              D
A              for
B              by
C              from
D              with
  27           答案:              A
A              died
B              was dead
C              was dying
D              was hurt
  28           答案:              C
A              nice
B              new
C              expensive
D              cheap
  29           答案:              B
A              others'
B              another
C              any other
D              the other
  30           答案:              C
A              hear
B              watch
C              read
D              write
115            Museums are often full 21 interesting and beautiful things, but
in most museums you can only 22 the things there. You can't touch them. This is
not very interesting for most of us. People want to touch things. They want to use
them and 23 them. That is 24 we learn about things. If we are interested in
something, we learn about it 25 . If we are bored, we don't learn very much. But
some museums are 26 .
     For example, at the Boston Children's Museum in Boston, young people can use
computers and 27 modern machines. They can 28 make movies and play games
there. In this kind of museum, children are not bored. They can 29 a lot 30
the same time.
  21           答案:              A
A              of
B              with
C              in
D              by
  22           答案:              D
A              look
B              looked


                                                                               167
C             look on
D             look at
    23        答案:               B
A             eat
B             play with
C             make
D             play
    24        答案:               D
A             why
B             where
C             when
D             how
    25        答案:               D
A             more easier
B             much easily
C             much easier
D             more easily
    26        答案:               B
A             same
B             different
C             difficult
D             difference
    27        答案:               D
A             that
B             these
C             another
D             other
    28        答案:               B
A             too
B             also
C             either
D             then
    29        答案:               A
A             learn
B             look
C             watch
D             see
    30        答案:               D
A             in
B             of
C             from
D             at
116               One day after 21 for a long time, I wanted to have a rest. So
I   22   my car at one side of a road. I 23 my eyes and covered a newspaper on


                                                                            168
my face. When I was almost   24 , someone knocked at my car window. I opened my eyes
and saw an old lady. “ 25 , but can you tell me the way to the post office?” I
told her the way, and then went on sleeping. A few minutes 26 , another person
knocked at my car window, asking 27 question. I had to tell him the way. I thought
that 28 I could not have a sleep. So I put a piece of paper on the car window,
29   says, “I don't know the way to the post office.” I believed that no one would
knock at my window. But to my 30 , only a few minutes later, the third man came,
“I think I can tell you the way to the post office.”
  21           答案:              B
A              sleeping
B              driving
C              walking
D              reading
  22           答案:              A
A              stopped
B              brought
C              took
D              carried
  23           答案:              C
A              opened
B              turned off
C              closed
D              turned on
  24           答案:              B
A              sleep
B              asleep
C              sleeping
D              slept
  25           答案:              D
A              Hello
B              How do you do
C              How are you
D              Excuse me
  26           答案:              B
A              before
B              later
C              after
D              ago
  27           答案:              A
A              the same
B              same
C              a same
D              an same
  28           答案:              A


                                                                                 169
A              in this way
B              on that way
C              by the way
D              on my way
  29           答案:               C
A              what
B              that
C              which
D              where
  30           答案:               C
A              give
B              leave
C              left
D              remained
117            An old man died and 21 his son a lot of money. But the son was not
a clever young man. He 22 spent all the money, and all his friends left him. When
he was quite poor and alone, he went to see a kind, clever old man , William, who
often helped people when they had 23 .
"My money has run out and my friends 24 ," said the young man, "What will happen
to me now?"
" Don't 25 , young man," answered William. " Everything will soon be all right
again. Wait, and you will soon feel much 26 ."
The young man was very 27 when he heard this. " Am I going to get 28 again
then?" he asked the old man.
     " No," said William. " I meant that you would soon get used to(习惯于) being
29    and to having no 30 ."
  21           答案:               A
A              quickly
B              slowly
C              carefully
D              suddenly
  22           答案:               D
A              questions
B              money
C              danger
D              troubles
  23           答案:               A
A              have gone
B              went
C              was away
D              goes away
  24           答案:               C
A              worried
B              worrying


                                                                              170
C              worry
D              care of
  25           答案:               B
A              well
B              happier
C              sad
D              sadly
  26           答案:               C
A              good
B              sad
C              pleased
D              well
  27           答案:               B
A              poor
B              rich
C              lonely
D              strong
  28           答案:               B
A              rich
B              poor
C              happy
D              angry
  29           答案:               D
A              parents
B              father
C              houses
D              friends
  30           答案:               B
A              up
B              down
C              out
D              in
118            One day a plane was going 21 because of something wrong with it
and there were five people in the plane, but there 22 only four parachutes(降
落伞). There was a clever man , a rich man , an old man, a little boy and the pilot
(飞行员).
The pilot said, "I have a wife and children to 23 , so I have to use a parachute
to jump." And he jumped out. The clever man said, "I have 24 to give others, so
I also have to jump with a parachute." And he jumped out, too. The 25 man said,
"Well, I have money to spend, so I have to jump out with one of the parachutes." Then
he did what the first two men did.
At the moment, there were only two persons left in the 26 , the old man and the
little boy. The old man said, "I have lived a 27 life and you haven't, so you
can take 28 parachute."


                                                                                  171
Then the little boy said, "No, but we can   29    jump out of the plane with
parachutes."
The old man asked, "How is that?"
     "Well, the clever man took my 30 which looked like a parachute."
  21           答案:              D
A              is
B              are
C              was
D              were
  22           答案:              A
A              support
B              make
C              help
D              give
  23           答案:              C
A              money
B              time
C              knowledge
D              books
  24           答案:              A
A              rich
B              last
C              happy
D              lucky
  25           答案:              C
A              ship
B              parachute
C              plane
D              world
  26           答案:              C
A              happy
B              enough
C              full
D              half
  27           答案:              B
A              the best
B              the last
C              my
D              your
  28           答案:              D
A              together
B              all
C              not
D              both


                                                                         172
 29            答案:               B
A              seat
B              schoolbag
C              clothes
D              umbrella
  30           答案:               B
A              born
B              was born
C              bored
D              is born
119            Albert Einstein was a German-born American physicist. He 21 in Ulm
on March 14, 1879. He was perhaps the most 22 scientist in the 20th 23 .
   24 he was a boy he showed his great 25 in nature(自然)          ,and he could solve
difficult maths problems. But in his teacher's opinion, he was not a good student
because he often cut classes and used the time to study physics 26 or to play
the violin.
He became very famous in physics later and 27 the Nobel Prize in physics in 1921.
In the Second World War, Einstein was forced to 28 Germany for the United States.
He became a teacher in a college in New Jersey.
He spent the 29 of his lifetime in the United States and 30 in Princeton on
April 18, 1955.
  21           答案:               A
A              well-known
B              well know
C              good-known
D              good-know
  22           答案:               C
A              country
B              years old
C              century
D              centuries
  23           答案:               D
A              For
B              Because
C              Since
D              When
  24           答案:               B
A              interesting
B              interest
C              interested
D              an interest
  25           答案:               A
A              on his own
B              for his own


                                                                                 173
C              by him
D              on him
  26           答案:              B
A              win
B              won
C              carried
D              with
  27           答案:              C
A              left
B              leaving
C              leave
D              return
  28           答案:              D
A              other
B              others
C              another
D              rest
  29           答案:              D
A              die
B              dead
C              was died
D              died
  30           答案:              B
A              takes
B              plays
C              brings
D              does
120            Television   21 an active role in the 22 society. It not only
is for fun, 23 does the job of education.
Television programmes often introduce people to things they never thought of 24 .
In TV university or open university, people can learn languages, cooking, painting
25 . Compared(比较) with the textbook or the radio, everything on television is
more lively and 26 .
     School education is not the 27 way to provide knowledge for people. Both
children and 28 can learn 29 from the television. It has 30 people's
knowledge greatly.
  21           答案:              C
A              old
B              our
C              modern
D              future
  22           答案:              A
A              but also
B              also


                                                                               174
C             either
D             too
  23          答案:               D
A             ago
B             in front of
C             past
D             before
  24          答案:               A
A             and so on
B             and so
C             and other
D             such as
  25          答案:               D
A             interest
B             interests
C             interested
D             interesting
  26          答案:               B
A             one
B             only
C             long
D             other
  27          答案:               A
A             grown-ups
B             growns-up
C             grew-up
D             grow-ups
  28          答案:               C
A             lots of
B             a lot of
C             a lot
D             great
  29          答案:               B
A             extend
B             widened
C             larger
D             smaller
  30          答案:               B
A             brighten
B             warm
C             beautify
D             lighten
121               Fire can help people in many ways. Fire can heat water, 21 your
house, give light and cook food. But fire can burn things too. Nobody knows 22


                                                                              175
people began to use fire. One story from Australia tells about a man a very long time
ago. He 23 the sun by a rope and brought fire down. Today people know how to 24
a fire with matches(火柴). Children sometimes like to play with them. But matches
can be very     25 . Fire kills people every year. So you must be careful          26
matches. You should also learn to 27 fires. Fires need oxygen. Without oxygen
they die. There is 28 in the air. Cover a fire with water, sand, or 29 , with
your coat or a blanket. This keeps the air from a fire and kills it. Be careful with
fire, and it will help you. Be careless with fire, and it might 30 you.
  21           答案:               B
A              where
B              when
C              what
D              how
  22           答案:               C
A              watched
B              got up to
C              went up to
D              discovered
  23           答案:               B
A              set
B              make
C              cause
D              catch
  24           答案:               A
A              dangerous
B              bright
C              unusual
D              common
  25           答案:               A
A              about
B              to
C              on
D              after
  26           答案:               B
A              lay out
B              put out
C              put away
D              do away with
  27           答案:               C
A              fire
B              moisture
C              oxygen
D              substance
  28           答案:               A


                                                                                  176
A              in an emergency
B              in particular
C              in a hurry
D              in general
  29           答案:               B
A              injure
B              hurt
C              destroy
D              spoil
  30           答案:               D
A              with
B              as
C              of
D              to
122                In China it is not unusual to ask people their age, but in the west
this question is generally regarded as impolite. This is particularly true          21
women, and even more 22      if the inquirer(问者) is a man. However, it is very
23   to ask children their age, and some adults may not mind being asked 24 . In
fact, some elderly people are quite happy to 25 the age, especially if they feel
they look young for their age. Nevertheless, it is not very wise to ask a           26
question like "How old are you?" If elderly people want to talk about their age, and
perhaps receive a compliment(恭维话) on how young they look, they may bring up the
topic themselves and ask the other to        27    how old they are.     28    such a
situation, it is quite acceptable to discuss age 29 . Even though Westerners do
not usually ask people directly how old they are; this does not 30 that they are
not interested in knowing how old other people are. They may approach the topic
indirectly or by asking someone else for the information. Of course, individuals vary
in what they are willing to talk about.
  21           答案:               D
A              that
B              than
C              such
D              so
  22           答案:               B
A              average
B              normal
C              expected
D              unusual
  23           答案:               D
A              too
B              also
C              neither
D              either
  24           答案:               C


                                                                                   177
A              rewrite
B              reflect
C              release
D              remark
  25           答案:               D
A              open
B              strange
C              impolite
D              direct
  26           答案:               A
A              guess
B              know
C              learn
D              predict
  27           答案:               C
A              For
B              With
C              In
D              On
  28           答案:               C
A              free
B              with freedom
C              freely
D              in a free way
  29           答案:               C
A              include
B              intend
C              mean
D              conclude
  30           答案:               B
A              These
B              Its
C              Their
D              Those
123            The United States covers a large part of the North American continent.
21   neighbors are Canada to the 22 and Mexico to the south. No other countries
are to its east or west. Although the United States is a big country, it is not the
largest. In 1964, its 23 was over 185,000,000.
When this land first became a nation, after 24 its independence from England,
it had only thirteen states. 25 was represented(代表) on the American flag by
a 26 . All the states were in the eastern part of the continent. As the nation 27
towards the west, new states were added and new stars were added to the flag. For
a long time there were 48 states. In 1959, however, two 28 stars were added to
the flag representing the new states of Alaska and Hawaii.


                                                                                  178
Many Americans are descendants(后裔) of people who came from all over the world
to start a new way of life. Those 29 came first and in greatest numbers to make
their homes on the eastern coast of North America were mostly from 30 . That is
why the language of the United States is English and that its culture and customs
are more like those of England than anywhere else.
  21           答案:              C
A              south
B              east
C              north
D              west
  22           答案:              D
A              people
B              men
C              women
D              population
  23           答案:              D
A              fighting
B              finding
C              getting
D              winning
  24           答案:              C
A              One
B              Some
C              Each
D              Every
  25           答案:              A
A              star
B              moon
C              satellite
D              planet
  26           答案:              D
A              grew
B              covered
C              went
D              moved
  27           答案:              B
A              least
B              more
C              fewer
D              little
  28           答案:              A
A              who
B              that
C              where


                                                                              179
D               when
  29            答案:               A
A               Europe
B               Asia
C               England
D               Africa
  30            答案:               C
A               garden
B               playground
C               homes
D               roads
124                                                                  (
                Many people die every year on the roads. But accidents 事故)can happen
indoors, too. Many young children are hurt when playing in their 21 . How do these
accidents happen?
     A mother may say to her child 22 water is dangerous(危险的), but the child
may reach up 23 it. Then accident will 24 . So, we should be 25 . Fire and
knives are also dangerous for children. They should be kept far 26 from these
things. Electricity(电) can help us to cook, to 27 clothes, and to keep the
house warm or 28 , but it is dangerous, too. Even medicine is dangerous although
it makes us feel 29 when we are ill. If you take wrong medicine, it can make us
feel worse, or even kill us. So, we 30 tell our children to be careful when they
use these things.
  21            答案:               B
A               cool
B               hot
C               warm
D               fresh
  22            答案:               A
A               for
B               to
C               from
D               at
  23            答案:               D
A               take
B               go
C               come
D               happen
  24            答案:               B
A               happy
B               careful
C               hard
D               careless
  25            答案:               A
A               away


                                                                                 180
B               more
C               over
D               behind
  26            答案:               C
A               make
B               cut
C               wash
D               put up
  27            答案:               A
A               cool
B               hot
C               cold
D               comfortable
  28            答案:               B
A               good
B               better
C               bad
D               worse
  29            答案:               D
A               could
B               would
C               might
D               must
  30            答案:               C
A               in
B               at
C               on
D               with
125                     In the United States, the fall holiday season begins     21
Thanksgiving Day, the fourth Thursday in November. 22 a day of thanks for good
harvests, it is celebrated with a big dinner, and turkey(火鸡) is the traditional
main 23 . Christmas 24 on December 25, about a month after Thanksgiving. At
Christmas time, people give         25   gifts and send Christmas cards. Children
especially     26    this season. New Year's Eve, December 31, comes a week after
Christmas. 27 New Year's Eve, people have gay parties to celebrate the end of
the old year and the beginning of the new. This is the end of the holiday season.
Easter comes in March or April. This is a religious holiday, and it also celebrates
the coming of spring. At Easter, children receive gifts of baskets 28 toy rabbits
or chickens and eggs. On Easter Sunday, many people go to 29 . It is 30 a
traditional time for woman to buy new clothes.
  21            答案:               C
A               Basically
B               Firstly
C               Originally


                                                                                181
D        Finally
    22   答案:             B
A        fish
B        course
C        meats
D        rice
    23   答案:             A
A        comes
B        goes
C        runs
D        rushes
    24   答案:             A
A        each other
B        each
C        other
D        every other
    25   答案:             B
A        should like
B        look forward to
C        look like
D        would like
    26   答案:             C
A        In
B        At
C        On
D        With
    27   答案:             C
A        to contain
B        to maintain
C        containing
D        maintaining
    28   答案:             A
A        church
B        the church
C        churches
D        the churches
    29   答案:             D
A        likely
B        either
C        too
D        also
    30   答案:             B
A        with
B        as


                             182
C               so
D               to
126                 Shopping for clothes is not the same experience for a man 21 it
is for a woman. A man goes shopping 22 he needs something. His purpose is clear
and decided 23 advance. He knows what he wants, and his objective is 24 it
and buy it; the price is in the second place for 25 . All men simply walk into
a shop and ask the 26 for what they want. If the shop has it, the salesman quickly
produces it, and the man begins to try it at once. For a man, small problems may 27
when the shop does not have what he wants, or does not have 28 what he wants.
29 , the salesman will try to sell the customer something else. Very often, he offers
the 30 thing which he can produce.
  21            答案:               C
A               before
B               owing to
C               because
D               and
  22            答案:               A
A               in
B               by
C               on
D               with
  23            答案:               B
A               find
B               to find
C               found
D               finding
  24            答案:               D
A               considerate
B               considerable
C               consider
D               consideration
  25            答案:               C
A               manger
B               worker
C               assistant
D               clerk
  26            答案:               A
A               arise
B               rise
C               raise
D               arouse
  27            答案:               A
A               exactly
B               nearly


                                                                                  183
C               absolutely
D               almost
  28           答案:                D
A               In case
B               In no case
C               In case of
D               In that case
  29           答案:                C
A               more near
B               nearer
C               nearest
D               most near
  30           答案:                D
A              Pleasure
B               surprised
C               pleased
D               surprise
127             For thousands of years, people have wanted to have a sense of identity
(自我感) and a strong feeling of belonging to their society. Therefore, people of
a society have used things such as uniforms to show 21 from those in another
society.
   Generally, schools oblige students to wear 22 . I think they do this for two
reasons. First, students will have to be 23 about how they behave when they are
wearing uniforms because people can easily identify them and know which 24 they
attend. Second, schools want students to think they 25 the school and are all
the same.
  Organizations, such as the 26 or the police, wear special uniforms because they
want to stand out from other people. For the 27 purpose, all soldiers and officers
must wear uniforms to identify themselves. In my opinion, this is because an army
needs to emphasize standardization (标准化). Lots of different kinds of people join
an army, so it is necessary to 28 all these people in order to carry out military
tasks. In other words, if an army accepts different kinds of people, it needs to do
this in order to train their abilities and achieve common 29 . Thus, it requires
everyone who 30 to wear uniforms.

    21         答案:               D
A              confidence
B              friendship
C              strength
D              difference
    22         答案:               A
A              uniforms
B              glasses
C              badges


                                                                                   184
D             trousers
  23          答案:               B
A             worried
B             careful
C             happy
D             surprised
  24          答案:               C
A             activity
B             class
C             school
D             meeting
  25          答案:               C
A             think of
B             worry about
C             belong to
D             forget about
  26          答案:               B
A             school
B             army
C             hospital
D             company
  27          答案:               D
A             military
B             political
C             scientific
D             practical
  28          答案:               C
A             control
B             employ
C             train
D             unite
  29          答案:               C
A             scores
B             sense
C             goals
D             methods
  30          答案:               B
A             enjoys
B             joins
C             believes
D             agrees
128           The making of glass is a very old industry --- 21 4,500 years old.
Glass has many extraordinary personalities and it is frequently being used in new
ways.


                                                                              185
One of the    22    interesting new uses for glass is in telephone communication.
Scientists have 23 glass fibres as thin as human hair 24 are designed to
carry light signals. When the light 25 the other end, it is first converted into
electrical signals which are in turn 26 into sound messages.
Called light-wave communication, the new system was used successfully in an
experiment in Chicago in 1977. During the experiment, two glass fibres were able to
carry 672 conversations at the same time. The light-wave cable, containing 144 glass
fibras, has the 27 to carry 50,000 conversations at the same time.
The light-wave communication systems has two important 28 . First, the glass fibre
cables are 29 and weigh less than copper cables. Second, they cost less.
Perhaps it can be said that telephone communication has entered the 30 of light!

    21        答案:               B
A             at most
B             at least
C             in large
D             in short
    22        答案:               B
A             best
B             most
C             least
D             very
    23        答案:               C
A             found
B             discovered
C             developed
D             investigated
    24        答案:               A
A             which
B             when
C             where
D             what
    25        答案:               C
A             arrives
B             gets
C             reaches
D             falls
    26        答案:               C
A             accounted
B             encountered
C             changed
D             removed
    27        答案:               D
A             authority


                                                                                 186
B              convention
C              strength
D              capacity(容量)
  28           答案:                B
A              wealth
B              advantages
C              rewards
D              admiration
  29           答案:                C
A              larger
B              less
C              smaller
D              fewer
  30           答案:                A
A              age
B              year
C              century
D              millennium
129            The water level of oceans rises and 21 alternatively twice a day.
This movement of water is called the tide. Tides are caused by the 22 of the sun
and the moon on the earth's surface; since the moon is much closer, it affects the
tides more than the sun. When 23 is directly overhead, it actually pulls on the
water that is     24   it. This causes the water level to        25 because water is
pulled away from the earth. As the moon disappears over the 26 , the pull 27
and the water level settles back towards the ocean bottom.
When the water reaches its highest level, we have high tide. And when the water reaches
its lowest level, we have low tide. From its    28 point, the water rises gradually
for about six hours 29 it reaches high tide. Then it begins to fall continuously
for about six hours until it reaches low tide. Then the         30 begins again.

    21         答案:               C
A              felt
B              fallen
C              falls
D              falling
    22         答案:               B
A              strength
B              pull
C              drive
D              power
    23         答案:               B
A              the sun
B              the moon
C              the earth


                                                                                    187
D              the star
  24           答案:               A
A              below
B              over
C              beside
D              inside
  25           答案:               A
A              rise
B              fall
C              move
D              float
  26           答案:               D
A              surface
B              tree
C              mountain
D              horizon
  27           答案:               C
A              rises
B              increases
C              lessens
D              shortens
  28           答案:               D
A              longest
B              shortest
C              highest
D              lowest
  29           答案:               A
A              until
B              although
C              even if
D              after
  30           答案:               B
A              work
B              circle
C              trip
D              business
130            Modern zoos are very different from zoos that were built fifty years
21   . At that time, zoos were places 22 people could go to see animals from many
parts of the world. The animals lived in cages that were made    23 concrete with
iron bars, cages that were easy to keep clean.
      24 for the animals, the cages were small and impossible to hide in. The zoo
environment was 25 natural. 26 the zoo keepers took good care of the animals
and fed them well, many of the animals did not thrive; they behaved in strange ways,
and they often became ill.


                                                                                 188
     In modern zoos, people can see animals in more natural habitats. The animals
are given more 27 in large areas so that they can live more 28 as they would
in nature. Even the appearance of zoos has changed. Trees and grass grow in the cages,
and streams of water flow     29 the areas 30          animals live in.
  21           答案:               B
A              later
B              ago
C              before
D              after
  22           答案:               D
A              which
B              that
C              when
D              where
  23           答案:               C
A              up of
B              into
C              of
D              for
  24           答案:               A
A              Unfortunately
B              Successfully
C              luckily
D              Unusually
  25           答案:               D
A              only
B              anything only
C              but
D              anything but
  26           答案:               D
A              Despite
B              Since
C              Now that
D              Although
  27           答案:               A
A              freedom
B              food
C              drink
D              dependence
  28           答案:               B
A              silently
B              comfortably
C              difficultly
D              independently


                                                                                   189
 29            答案:               B
A              over
B              through
C              for
D              below
  30           答案:               A
A              that
B              where
C              when
D              these
131            Fire can help people in many ways. Fire can heat water, 21 your
house, give light and cook food. But fire can burn things too. Nobody knows 22
people began to use fire. One story from Australia tells about a man a very long time
ago. He 23 the sun by a rope and brought fire down.
   Today people know how to 24 a fire with matches. Children sometimes like to
play with them. But matches can be very 25 .
   Fire kills people every year. So you must be careful 26 matches. You should
also learn to 27 fires. Fires need oxygen. Without oxygen they die. There is 28
in the air. Cover a fire with water, sand, or in an emergency, with your coat or a
blanket. This keeps the air 29 a fire and kills it.
      Be careful with fire, and it will help you. Be careless with fire, and it might
30    you.
  21           答案:               B
A              brighten
B              warm
C              beautify
D              lighten
  22           答案:               D
A              where
B              when
C              what
D              how
  23           答案:               C
A              watched
B              got up to
C              went up to
D              discovered
  24           答案:               B
A              set
B              make
C              cause
D              catch
  25           答案:               A
A              dangerous


                                                                                  190
B               bright
C               unusual
D               common
  26           答案:                A
A               about
B               to
C               on
D               after
  27           答案:                B
A               lay out
B               put out
C               put away
D               do away with
  28           答案:                C
A               fire
B               moisture
C               oxygen
D               substance
  29           答案:                D
A               in
B               on
C               away
D               from
  30           答案:                B
A              injure
B               hurt
C               destroy
D               spoil
132             There are many national parks in the United States. Yellowstone(黄
石公园) is the oldest and largest, 21 for its hot springs. Grand Canyon(大峡
谷) is 22 often visited by tourists, which is famous for its colorful, mile-deep
valleys. Each year, millions of Americans crowd national parks on their vacations,
23    the beauties of nature.
Now, the United States has a new national park. It is Great Basin. It is the first
national park in the western state of Nevada. The new park is in the eastern part
of Nevada, near the border with the state of Utah.
An American explorer traveled through the area in the early 1800's. He found the land
24    like a bowl. So he named it the Great Basin. It is a land of unusual beauty 25
sharp differences.
For example, you can climb a mountain covered with green forests, then cool yourself
in a field of snow as you arrive at the 26 . Here and there, sharp rocks 27 out
through the snow. Among the rocks you might see homes of the golden hawk, a bird that
was once in 28 of dying out.
      The state of Nevada had wanted a national park for more than sixty years. There


                                                                                  191
have always been the 29      ideas from people who believed that a park would harm
mining and agricultural 30 . The state government decides to set up the park and
promises that mining will remain open, and that sheep and cows will continue to feed
on the mountainsides.
  21           答案:              C
A              used
B              looking
C              known
D              wanted
  22           答案:              B
A              mostly
B              most
C              almost
D              nearly
  23           答案:              D
A              spending
B              choosing
C              building
D              admiring
  24           答案:              A
A              shaped
B              sized
C              discovered
D              figured
  25           答案:              D
A              or
B              but
C              for
D              and
  26           答案:              A
A              top
B              foot
C              bottom
D              surface
  27           答案:              C
A              send
B              spread
C              stick
D              pull
  28           答案:              B
A              risk
B              danger
C              need
D              case


                                                                                 192
    29         答案:                B
A               similar
B               opposite
C               same
D               sensible
  30           答案:                D
A               workers
B              values
C               customs
D               interests
133             Paris, which is the capital of the European nation of France, is one
of the most beautiful and      21 cities in the world.
Paris is called the City of Light. It is also an international fashion center. What
stylish women are wearing in Paris will be worn by women 22 the world. Paris is
also a famous world center of education. For instance, it is the headquarters of UNESCO
(联合国教科文化组织).
The Seine River(塞纳河)           23 the city into two parts. Thirty-two bridges 24
this scenic river. The oldest and perhaps most well known is the Pont Neuf, 25 was
built in the sixteen century. The Sorbonne(索帮大学), a famous university, 26
on the Left Bank of the river.
There are many other famous places in Paris, 27 the famous museum the Louvre
(卢浮宫) as well as the cathedral of Notre Dame(巴黎圣母院). However, the most
famous landmark in this city must be the Eiffel Tower(艾菲尔铁塔).
Paris is named     28    a group of people called the Parisii. They       29   a small
village on an island in the middle of the Seine River about two thousand years ago.
This island, called the Ile de la Cite, is 30 Notre Dame is located. Today around
eight million people live in the Paris area.

    21         答案:               B
A              famousest
B              most famous
C              famouser
D              more famous
    22         答案:               A
A              all over
B              over all
C              whole over
D              over whole
    23         答案:               A
A              divides
B              breaks
C              arranges
D              classifies
    24         答案:               C


                                                                                    193
A              pass
B              cover
C              cross
D              lie
  25           答案:                D
A              it
B              that
C              where
D              which
  26           答案:                C
A              is locating
B              locates
C              is located
D              located
  27           答案:                B
A              as such
B              such as
C              such like
D              like such
  28           答案:                C
A              behind
B              about
C              after
D              concerning
  29           答案:                B
A              have built
B              built
C              had built
D              build
  30           答案:                C
A              in which
B              which
C              where
D              that
134            Contacts between Japan and the rest of the world have grown a great
deal in the twentieth century. In the 21 thirty years, business contacts between
Japan and the West have become very important. Many foreign companies now have offices
in Japan and Japanese businessmen do business 22 the world.
     Differences between Japanese and Western ways of doing business, 23 , often
bewilder the foreign businessman and make doing business in Japan difficult for
foreigners.
       The American businessman, for example, wants to start talking business
immediately. He wants      24   decisions. He does not wait. The Japanese,       25 ,
likes to arrive at decisions gradually after giving them a great deal of thought.


                                                                                   194
     Another thing foreign businessmen have difficulty 26 understanding is when
a Japanese means "Yes" 27      "No". This is because of cultural difference for a
Japanese to say "No" directly.
In English, it is 28 to say "No" to something we do not want to do. But in Japan
it is very difficult to say "No". To refuse an invitation or a request with "No",
or a similar phrase, is felt to be impolite. It is thought         29    selfish and
unfriendly. So instead of saying "No" directly, the Japanese have developed many ways
to avoid saying "No". These enable them to avoid hurting other people's feeling.
However, this often    30 communication with the Japanese difficult for foreigners
to understand and follow.
  21           答案:               B
A              actual
B              last
C              least
D              most
  22           答案:               A
A              around
B              all
C              over
D              through
  23           答案:               C
A              moreover
B              further
C              however
D              besides
  24           答案:               C
A              gradual
B              sudden
C              quick
D              steady
  25           答案:               D
A              on comparison
B              on addition
C              on contrast
D              on the other hand
  26           答案:               A
A              in
B              with
C              of
D              on
  27           答案:               B
A              and
B              or
C              but


                                                                                  195
D              for
  28           答案:               C
A              different
B              same
C              easy
D              difficult
  29           答案:               D
A              being
B              to have been
C              having been
D              to be
  30           答案:               A
A              makes
B              contacts
C              holds
D              words
135            Handshaking, though a European practice, is often seen in big cities
of China. Nobody knows exactly when the 21 started in Europe. It is said that long
ago in Europe when people met, they showed their unarmed hands to each other as a
sign of goodwill. 22 time went on and trade in cities grew rapidly, people in
cities began to clap each other's hands to 23 a deal or to reach an agreement.
This practice was later changed into        24    hands among friends on meeting or
leaving each other."Let's shake (hands) on it" sometimes means agreement reached.
Do the Europeans shake hands 25 they go and with whomever they meet? No. Sometimes
the Chinese abroad reach out their hands 26 often to be polite. It is really very
impolite to give your hand when the other party, 27 when it is a woman, shows
little interest in shaking hands with you and when the meeting does not mean anything
to him or her. Even if, for politeness, he holds out his unwilling hand 28 your
uninvited hand, just touch it slightly. There is generally a misunderstanding among
the Chinese that westerners are usually open and straightforward, while the Chinese
are rather reserved in manner. But 29 some people in western countries are more
reserved than some Chinese today. So it is a good idea to shake hands with a westerner
only when he shows interest in 30 relations with you.

    21         答案:               B
A              usage
B              practice
C              habit
D              routine
    22         答案:               A
A              As
B              With
C              Since
D              While


                                                                                   196
 23            答案:               A
A              make
B              take
C              bring
D              buy
  24           答案:               C
A              taking
B              reaching
C              shaking
D              touching
  25           答案:               C
A              however
B              whatever
C              wherever
D              whichever
  26           答案:               C
A              so
B              very
C              too
D              such
  27           答案:               A
A              especially
B              significantly
C              importantly
D              generally
  28           答案:               C
A              answering
B              to answer
C              in answer to
D              as an answer of
  29           答案:               D
A              in full
B              in form
C              in particular
D              in fact
  30           答案:               D
A              less
B              extra
C              additional
D              further
136             Scientists have studied consumer behavior recently and found       21
the look of the package has a great effect 22 the"quality" of the product and
on how well it 23 , because "Consumers generally cannot 24 between a product
and its package. Many products are packages and many packages are products," as Louis


                                                                                  197
Cheskin, the first social scientist studying consumers' feeling for packaging,
noticed.
Colors are one of the best tools in packaging. Studies of eye movement have shown
that colors draw human 25 quickly. Take V8 for example. For many years, the bright
red color of tomatoes and carrots on the thin bottle makes you feel that it is very
good for your body. And the word"green" today can keep food prices 26 .
   27 are another attraction. Circles often suggest happiness and peacefulness,
because these shapes are 28 to both the eye and the heart. That's 29 the round
yellow M signs of McDonald's are inviting to both young and old.
      This new consumer response to the colors and shapes of packages reminds
producers and sellers that people 30 to satisfy both body and soul.
  21           答案:              A
A              that
B              what
C              such
D              as
  22           答案:              D
A              with
B              of
C              at
D              on
  23           答案:              B
A              buys
B              sells
C              offers
D              works
  24           答案:              C
A              show
B              display
C              tell
D              differ
  25           答案:              A
A              attention
B              eye
C              presence
D              perception
  26           答案:              C
A              to go up
B              to go down
C              going up
D              going down
  27           答案:              B
A              Packages
B              Shapes


                                                                                198
C               Tools
D              Products
  28           答案:                B
A               pleasantly
B               pleasing
C               pleased
D               pleasure
  29           答案:                D
A               how
B               because
C               where
D               why
  30           答案:                C
A               sell
B               make
C               buy
D               produce
137                    Editors of newspapers and magazines often go to extremes to
provide their readers with unimportant facts and statistics. Last year a journalist
had been 21 by a well-known magazine to write an article on the president's palace
in a new African republic. When the article 22 , the editor read the first sentence
and then refused to publish it. The article began: "Hundreds of steps lead to the
high wall which surrounds the president's palace." The editor           23 sent the
journalist a telegram instructing him to 24 the exact number of steps and the
height of the wall. The journalist immediately set out 25 these important facts,
but it took him a long time to send them. 26 , the editor was getting impatient,
for the magazine would soon go to press. He sent the journalist two 27 telegrams,
but received no reply. He sent yet another telegram informing the journalist that
if he did not reply soon he would be fired. When the journalist again failed to reply,
the editor reluctantly published the article as it had originally been written. A
week 28 , the editor at last received a telegram from the journalist. Not only
had the poor man been arrested, but he had been sent to prison 29 . However, he
had at last been allowed to send a cable in which he informed the editor that he had
been arrested while 30 the 1084 steps leading to the 15-foot wall which surrounded
the president's palace.
  21           答案:                B
A               criticized
B               instructed
C               researched
D               investigated
  22           答案:                C
A               reached
B               missed
C               arrived


                                                                                   199
D              finished
  23           答案:                A
A              at once
B              at first
C              at most
D              at random
  24           答案:                A
A              find out
B              check out
C              leave out
D              cut out
  25           答案:                B
A              obtaining
B              to obtain
C              having obtained
D              to be obtained
  26           答案:                C
A              At last
B              Furthermore
C              Meanwhile
D              Thereafter
  27           答案:                A
A              urgent
B              earnest
C              intense
D              immediate
  28           答案:                D
A              after
B              past
C              before
D              later
  29           答案:                C
A              as ever
B              as much
C              as well
D              as before
  30           答案:                A
A              counting
B              counted
C              having counted
D              to count
138                    For the first time in our marriage, I had decided to 21 my
holiday alone, without my wife. We had not 22 . My common sense told me that all
habits ---- even good ones ---- should be 23 from time to time. Doing everything


                                                                              200
together with my wife had become very much of a habit with me. So I had gone off to
Italy 24 my own to spend three weeks at a hotel at the seaside. I had hoped it
would be nice and warm. But actually it was 35 in the shade, 25 enough to roast
an ox. I walked about in shorts, my bald head 26 with a handkerchief, sweating
and thirsty. And all the time I had to 27      my wife, who had gone to the mountains
of North Wales and was doubtless      28    herself very much. Why had I, with my
sensitive English skin, gone to Italy of all places? At night, I was kept 29 by
two bands 30 like mad in the bar downstairs.
  21           答案:               B
A              take
B              spend
C              cost
D              use
  22           答案:               D
A              debated
B              approved
C              agreed
D              quarreled
  23           答案:               A
A              broken
B              taken
C              separated
D              formed
  24           答案:               D
A              with
B              for
C              at
D              on
  25           答案:               D
A              cool
B              warm
C              cold
D              hot
  26           答案:               C
A              touching
B              touched
C              covered
D              covering
  27           答案:               D
A              talk to
B              discuss with
C              hear of
D              think of
  28           答案:               A


                                                                                  201
A               enjoying
B               favoring
C               liking
D               loving
  29            答案:               B
A               asleep
B               awake
C               astonished
D               alike
  30            答案:               D
A               play
B               compose
C               composing
D                playing
139             Nowadays most people decide quite early what kind of work they would
do. When I was at school, we had to choose        21    when we were fifteen. I chose
scientific subjects. " 22 , scientists will earn a lot of money," my parents said.
For three years I tried to learn physics and chemistry, but in the 23 I decided
that I would never be a scientist. It was a long time 24 I told my parents that
I wasn't happy at school. So my father said, "Well, the best thing to do now is to
look for a job."
I    25    about it with my friends Frank and Lesley.       26 of them could suggest
anything, but they promised that they would ask their friends. A few days later 27
I was still in bed, someone phoned, "Is that Miss Jenkins?" a man's voice asked. "I
know your hobby is photography and I've got a job that might interest you in my clothes
factory. My name is Mr. Thomson." I decided to see him. I was so excited that I almost
forgot 28 goodbye to my mother.
      I arrived a bit early and when Mr. Thomson came he asked me if I 29 waiting
a long time. I replied,"No, not long." After talking to me for about 20 minutes he
offered me a job - not as a photographer 30 a model!
  21            答案:               C
A               what should study
B               what he studied
C               what to study
D               what studied
  22            答案:               B
A               For the future
B               In the future
C               For future
D               In future
  23            答案:               C
A               close
B               last
C               end


                                                                                    202
D              final
  24           答案:                A
A              before
B              as
C              when
D              while
  25           答案:                C
A              told
B              asked
C              talked
D              said
  26           答案:                B
A              Both
B              Neither
C              Nor
D              Not all
  27           答案:                C
A              since
B              whereas
C              while
D              before
  28           答案:                B
A              saying
B              to say
C              speaking
D              to speak
  29           答案:                A
A              had been
B              would be
C              was
D              might be
  30           答案:                D
A              being
B              as
C              to be
D              but
140                 City traffic is a great 21 . More cars are produced every year
and the streets are getting more and more 22 . So during rush hours, when people
are going to or from their work, traffic is brought to a 23 . It has been suggested
that 'commuters' (the people who travel to work every day from outside the city) should
24    their cars and give each other lifts. So each car would carry four or five people
25    only one. It is an excellent idea; 26 , so far nobody has been able to think
of a way to force people to do so.
     To   27    motorists from leaving their cars in the streets all day, parking


                                                                                    203
meters are used. When you park at a meter, you must put a coin in the slot. This pays
for a certain 28 of time. The meter records this and it shows 29 the time
that you have paid for is finished. If the car is still there then, you have to pay
a   30 .

    21        答案:             D
A             comfort
B             business
C             incident
D             problem
    22        答案:             B
A             quiet
B             crowded
C             straight
D             remote
    23        答案:             D
A             current
B             movement
C             flow
D             standstill
    24        答案:             A
A             share
B             provide
C             divide
D             combine
    25        答案:             B
A             in spite of
B             instead of
C             with the aid of
D             in regard to
    26        答案:             A
A             however
B             therefore
C             furthermore
D             consequently
    27        答案:             C
A             encourage
B             enhance
C             discourage
D             urge
    28        答案:             C
A             number
B             quality
C             amount


                                                                                  204
D             sum
  29          答案:               A
A             when
B             where
C             those
D             which
  30          答案:               C
A             benefit
B             share
C             fine
D             allowance
141                A solicitor is a lawyer who gives 21 and legal help to his
clients.   22    , he is not as a rule    23   to appear in court and speak as an
advocate. That is to say, he cannot 24 his client in a court of law. 25 can
he prosecute. These two jobs are done by another section of legal specialists ---
the barristers. The President of the Law Society,     26   once to a group of law
students, said, 'Every client who comes into the office of a solicitor comes with
a problem 27       his shoulders; he wants to go out of the office feeling that he
has left his burden 28 him --- that is to say, 29 you. The 30 of that
burden is the service that the client pays us for.
  21          答案:               B
A             work
B             advice
C             education
D             effect
  22          答案:               A
A             However
B             Consequently
C             Therefore
D             Furthermore
  23          答案:               C
A             reluctant
B             willing
C             competent
D             skillful
  24          答案:               B
A             protect
B             defend
C             shelter
D             shade
  25          答案:               A
A             Neither
B             Also
C             So


                                                                               205
D              Either
  26           答案:                B
A              speak
B              speaking
C              dismiss
D              dismissing
  27           答案:                C
A              with
B              for
C              on
D              about
  28           答案:                A
A              behind
B              before
C              around
D              about
  29           答案:                C
A              for
B              about
C              with
D              around
  30           答案:                B
A              protection
B              removal
C              approval
D              permission
142                 The entertainment 21 , or show business, attracts many young.
Unfortunately, only very few can hope to become famous and 22 . Talent is not
enough, because show business is as competitive as 23 . 24 a good manager,
a performer can never hope to succeed. Fashion is important in this business, too.
The best tailor in the world will never be a 25 if he makes old-fashioned clothes.
In exactly the same way, a performer must change his "act" in order to 26 the
taste of the moment. This is true for actors, dancers and comedians, but perhaps most
of all for singers.
     "Pop" 27 "popular", and a pop singer has to work very hard to become popular.
He must     28 give the public what they already want, or find a new way of singing
that will attract their 29 . Even when he has succeeded, and his records are sold
everywhere, he cannot relax. Then he must work harder than ever to 30 popular,
because there are always younger singers trying to become famous and to steal some
of the popularity.

    21        答案:               A
A             profession
B             operation


                                                                                  206
C        manufactory
D        production
    22   答案:              D
A        developed
B        humorous
C        complex
D        prosperous
    23   答案:              C
A        other business
B        another business
C        any other business
D        all business
    24   答案:              D
A        With
B        Despite
C        But for
D        Without
    25   答案:              D
A        victory
B        defeat
C        failure
D        success
    26   答案:              A
A        follow
B        exchange
C        distort
D        disobey
    27   答案:              B
A        goes for
B        stands for
C        makes for
D        calls for
    28   答案:              C
A        neither
B        as well
C        either
D        also
    29   答案:              B
A        hobby
B        attention
C        understanding
D        enjoyment
    30   答案:              C
A        become


                              207
B              put
C              stay
D              seem
143                We have all stories of the 21 who forgot to provide stairs or
lifts in the block of flats he was designing. There are even sillier tales of houses
22   without any doors. However, many strange buildings can still be seen. In past
centuries, there were hardly any building restrictions, and rich people could build
23   they wanted. Sometimes their 24 were very odd indeed and resulted in strange
follies, such as triangular cottage, or a hen-house in the form of a pyramid, or a
house disguised as a windmill. But nowadays there are       25   restrictions, both
official and aesthetic, and the designer must know all of them. The artistic and
creative aspects are only a 26 part of the modern designer's work. He does not
simply design a building and then wait for 27 to build it. He must know all the
28     of the materials he uses, and has to       29   into consideration heating,
lighting, ventilation, insulation, drainage and many other aspects        30 never
worried our ancestors at all.
  21           答案:               D
A              artist
B              biologist
C              physicist
D              architect
  22           答案:               B
A              to be designed
B              designed
C              designing
D              design
  23           答案:               B
A              whichever
B              whatever
C              whomever
D              nowhere
  24           答案:               D
A              comments
B              approval
C              debate
D              ideas
  25           答案:               C
A              few
B              a sum
C              a great many
D              a large amount
  26           答案:               B
A              large
B              small


                                                                                 208
C              great
D              limitless
  27           答案:               C
A              someone
B              anyone
C              someone else
D              anyone else
  28           答案:               D
A              personalities
B              quotations
C              constructions
D              qualities
  29           答案:               C
A              have
B              make
C              take
D              put
  30           答案:               C
A              those
B              where
C              that
D              who
144                 Of all the things in the world, I most 21 filling up forms.
In fact, I have a positive horror of it. Applying for a driving 22 , registering
for an evening course, booking a holiday abroad --- everything nowadays seems to
involve giving information about one's 23 life and habits 24 has little or
nothing to do with the matter 25 . When applying for a job, it may be 26 a
little interest to a prospective 27       to learn that I collect stamps or had measles
as a child, but why should he want to know that my father was a tobacconist who lived
in Fulham and died when he was 82?
     The authorities who 28 one to fill up forms frequently demand answers to
questions that one would     29 to put to one's intimate friends. The worst of it
is that, when I am faced with such questions, my mind goes 30 and I can hardly
remember my own date of birth, let alone my nationality.
  21           答案:               B
A              like
B              dislike
C              favor
D              oppose
  22           答案:               D
A              permission
B              agreement
C              instruction
D              license


                                                                                    209
 23            答案:                D
A              public
B              collective
C              massive
D              personal
  24           答案:                A
A              that
B              those
C              where
D              when
  25           答案:                B
A              out of hand
B              in hand
C              by hand
D              under hand
  26           答案:                C
A              about
B              with
C              of
D              at
  27           答案:                B
A              employee
B              employer
C              roommate
D              worker
  28           答案:                A
A              require
B              suggest
C              encourage
D              order
  29           答案:                D
A              willing
B              reluctant
C              consider
D              hesitate
  30           答案:                C
A              occupied
B              vacant
C              blank
D              bare
145                  Customs officers at a London airport yesterday found 500,000
pounds worth of drugs which were being smuggled into Britain in boxes marked “Urgent
Medical Supplies.” The 21 suspected for some time that drugs were being brought
into the country in this way. The 22 is believed to be the work of a well-organized


                                                                                 210
international group. Four men were arrested at the airport and held for questioning
23 it is unlikely that they are organizers. In fact they declared that they were
24 of what the boxes contained and had acted in good faith in bringing 25 into
Britain. This is the third case in six months that attempts have been made to smuggle
26 goods through Customs by declaring them to be medical supplies. They are
frequently packed in special containers and a 27 is given that they may be damaged
if they are not handled with care. " 28 are determined to put a stop to this
practice", said one of the Customs officers today. 29 is no way these people are
going to get away     30 this any longer. We have the full co-operation of the
International Police who are as anxious as we are to track down the main source of
supply.

    21        答案:               A
A             authorities
B             commanders
C             leaders
D             police
    22        答案:               C
A             operation
B             behavior
C             movement
D             development
    23        答案:               A
A             but
B             so
C             because
D             as
    24        答案:               B
A             unemotional
B             unaware
C             unfamiliar
D             unknown
    25        答案:               C
A             all
B             it
C             them
D             they
    26        答案:               C
A             immoral
B             criminal
C             illegal
D             irregular
    27        答案:               A
A             warning


                                                                                  211
B              note
C              symbol
D              signature
  28           答案:               B
A              Some
B              We
C              They
D              Those
  29           答案:               C
A              It
B              This
C              There
D              That
  30           答案:               D
A              off
B              in
C              for
D              with
146            Scientists are studying how to save the storks from dying out,__21__
numbers have been decreasing rapidly because of environmental changes, poisoning and
hunting.
Their traditional feeding grounds in __22__ and wetland have become populated. The
storks are being poisoned for eating insects which __23__ have been poisoned. Others
are shot or trapped by hunters.
Scientists said it is impossible to determine how many storks remain and warned that
their decrease is “very __24__ ”.
The scientists propose to save the birds through finding out where they are at risk
and by educating the public __25__ the value of these creatures.
Most of the __26__ about the bird life has been collected by nonprofessional bird
watchers who note down what they see in their spare time.
The white stork, __27__ the name suggests, is all-white except for the black rear
half of the wing. The bird stands one-meter __28__.
Each year hundreds fly to Africa after breeding in Europe. Scientists are __29__
concerned that the numbers returning to stay in Europe have been decreasing. “We
need to find out more about the needs of these birds and the __30__ they face so we
may be able to help them,” said the scientists.

    21        答案:               A
A             whose
B             those
C             the
D             their
    22        答案:               A
A             fields


                                                                                 212
B        villages
C        buildings
D        areas
    23   答案:              C
A        they
B        ones
C        themselves
D        some
    24   答案:              C
A        desirable
B        unreasonable
C        alarming
D        awful
    25   答案:              D
A        at
B        with
C        for
D        about
    26   答案:              B
A        news
B        information
C        intelligence
D        impression
    27   答案:              A
A        as
B        that
C        which
D        so
    28   答案:              C
A        long
B        upward
C        high
D        up
    29   答案:              A
A        extremely
B        completely
C        rarely
D        readily
    30   答案:              B
A        damages
B        dangers
C        discouragement
D        destruction
147       The United States is well-known for its network of major highways


                                                                        213
designed to help a driver get from one place to another in the shortest possible time.
__21__ these wide modern roads are generally smooth and well maintained, with __22__
sharp curves and many straight sections, a direct route is always the most __23__one.
Large highways often pass __24__ scenic areas and interesting small towns.
Furthermore, these highways generally connect large urban centers which means that
they become crowded with __25__ traffic during rush hours when the “fast, direct”
way becomes a very slow route.
However, there is __26__ always another route to take if you are not in a hurry. Not
                                        ,
far from the __27__ new“superhighways” there are often older __28__heavily traveled
roads which go through the countryside. Some of these are good two-lane roads; others
are uneven roads curving through the country. These secondary routes may go up steep
slopes, along high __29__ or down frightening hillsides to towns lying in deep valleys.
Through these less direct routes, longer and slower, they generally go to places where
the air is clean and the scenery is beautiful, and the driver may have a chance to
get a fresh, clean __30__ of the world.

    21         答案:               A
A              Although
B              Since
C              Because
D              Therefore
    22         答案:               B
A              little
B              few
C              much
D              many
    23         答案:               C
A              terrible
B              possible
C              enjoyable
D              profitable
    24         答案:               D
A              to
B              into
C              over
D              by
    25         答案:               D
A              large
B              fast
C              light
D              heavy
    26         答案:               C
A              yet
B              still


                                                                                   214
C              almost
D              quite
  27           答案:                A
A              relatively
B              regularly
C              respectively
D              reasonably
  28           答案:                B
A              and
B              less
C              more
D              or
  29           答案:                B
A              rock
B              cliff
C              roads
D              paths
  30           答案:                A
A              view
B              variety
C              visit
D              virtue
148            Today, pickpocketing is one of the most rapidly increasing __21__.
Pickpockets are increasing __22__and developing better methods to practice their
skills. Approximately one million Americans lose money to pickpockets every year.
No one is really safe __23__ a skilled pickpocket. His victims, or "marks" __24__they
are called, can be rich or poor, young or old.
__25__ the 18th century, pickpockets were hanged in England. Large crowds of people
would gather to watch the hanging, __26__ was supposed to be a warning to other
pickpockets. __27__, the practice was discontinued in time.
Police officials say that most __28__ pickpockets come from South America. Many of
these expert pickpockets are trained in special schools called Jingle Bell School.
A pickpocket graduates from a J.B.S. __29__ he is able to steal a wallet from a
dressed dummy that has bells inside its pockets!
Some of the __30__ places of pickpockets are banks, airports, supermarkets, trains
and bus stations. A pickpocket will work with another pickpocket as his partner.
  21           答案:                B
A              mistakes
B              crimes
C              faults
D              headaches
  22           答案:                D
A              at random
B              out of order


                                                                                  215
C            by far
D            in number
  23         答案:              A
A            from
B            on
C            out of
D            against
  24         答案:              C
A            so
B            since
C            as
D            thus
  25         答案:              D
A            At
B            Since
C            From
D            During
  26         答案:              B
A            what
B            which
C            of which
D            among whom
  27         答案:              C
A            Therefore
B            At once
C            However
D            Because
  28         答案:              A
A            efficient
B            convenient
C            attractive
D            serious
  29         答案:              A
A            when
B            where
C            although
D            however
  30         答案:              D
A            be liked
B            liking
C            favored
D            favorite
149          Professional workers in recreation services, too, will find that to
impart positive leisure attitudes to the general public is essential          21


                                                                             216
motivating them to live their leisure 22 creative and satisfying ways. Hence,
it can be argued that the people 23 we come into contact in these various contexts
are all 24 to have exerted some influence in shaping our attitudes, interests
and even skills 25 to how we handle leisure. Influence of this kind is a form
26     leadership.
Parents, teachers in schools, work associates and communicators in or 27 the mass
media are all 28 of arousing our potential interests. For example, the degree
to which and the ways in 29 a school encourages participation in games, sports
and cultural pursuits are likely to contribute to shaping leisure attitudes on the
part of the students.
Schools usually set as their educational objective the attainment of a balanced
development of the person. The more seriously this is sought, 30 likely positive
attitudes to leisure as well as academic work will be encouraged.

    21        答案:              D
A             with
B             as
C             in
D             for
    22        答案:              A
A             in
B             on
C             for
D             with
    23        答案:              C
A             for whom
B             whom
C             with whom
D             in whom
    24        答案:              B
A             possible
B             likely
C             probable
D             like
    25        答案:              B
A             connected
B             relevant
C             associated
D             concerned
    26        答案:              A
A             of
B             in
C             with
D             to


                                                                               217
    27         答案:                D
A              applying
B              choosing
C              influencing
D              using
  28           答案:                C
A              intelligent
B              able
C              capable
D              talented
  29           答案:                C
A              that
B              what
C              which
D              how
  30           答案:                B
A              more
B              the more
C              less
D              the less
150            Miss Ebert kept the little bakery on the corner. Two 21 three times
a week, she had a customer in        22     she began to take an interest. He was a
middle-aged man 23 spectacles and a brown beard. He spoke English with a strong
German accent. His clothes were worn and wrinkled, but he looked neat and had very
good manners. He always bought two loaves of stale (不新鲜的) bread. He never asked
for anything 24 stale bread; it cost a lot less than fresh bread.
Once Miss Ebert 25 a red and brown stain on his fingers. She was sure that he was
an artist and very poor. No doubt he lived in an attic, where he 26 pictures and
ate stale bread and thought of the good things 27 eat in the bakery.
Often when Miss Ebert sat down to her evening meal, she 28 sigh and wish the artist
might share her food 29        of eating his dry bread.
One day the customer came in 30 usual and asked for his stale bread. As the sudden
noise of a fire-engine made his hurry to the door, Miss Ebert seized her opportunity.
She cut each of the loaves with a knife, inserted some butter and, when the customer
turned round, she was putting them into a paper bag.

    21        答案:               C
A             and
B             thus
C             or
D             then
    22        答案:               A
A             whom
B             who


                                                                                  218
C            which
D            that
  23         答案:               D
A            on
B            from
C            in
D            with
  24         答案:               B
A            while
B            but
C            in spite of
D            instead
  25         答案:               A
A            noticed
B            knew
C            notified
D            noted
  26         答案:               B
A            wrote
B            painted
C            studied
D            worked
  27         答案:               D
A            off
B            for
C            at
D            to
  28         答案:               C
A            should
B            will
C            would
D            could
  29         答案:               D
A            because
B            despite
C            enough
D            instead
  30         答案:               B
A            such
B            as
C            so
D            in
151          Many students find the experience of attending university lectures to
be a confusing experience. The lecturer speaks for one or two hours, perhaps


                                                                               219
illustrating the talk with slides, writing up important 21 on the blackboard,
22   reading material and giving out homework. The new student sees 23 students
continuously writing on notebooks. Very often the student leaves the lecture      24
notes which do not catch the main points and which become hard even for the 25 to
understand. Most institutions provide courses to make students efficient listeners
and note-takers. In all cases it is important to 26 the problem before actually
starting your studies. It is important to know that most students have 27 in
acquiring the language skills acquired in college study. One way of 28 these
difficulties is to attend the language and study skills classes which most
institutions provide 29       the academic year. Another basic strategy is to find a
study partner with 30 it is possible to identify difficulties, exchange ideas
and provide support.

    21        答案:               C
A             news
B             lectures
C             information
D             story
    22        答案:               C
A             attributing
B             contributing
C             distributing
D             collecting
    23        答案:               D
A             another
B             the others
C             others
D             the other
    24        答案:               B
A             without
B             with
C             on
D             by
    25        答案:               A
A             teachers
B             classmates
C             partners
D             students
    26        答案:               C
A             see
B             find
C             solve
D             describe
    27        答案:               D


                                                                                 220
A              doubts
B              suspicion
C              trouble
D              difficulties
  28           答案:                D
A              refusing
B              stopping
C              taking
D              overcoming
  29           答案:                A
A              throughout
B              by
C              with
D              after
  30           答案:                B
A              that
B              whom
C              whoever
D              whose
152            The family circumstances of Clinton's childhood years were very __21__.
Clinton's own father died in a traffic __22__ three months before Clinton was born.
His stepfather, Roger Clinton, was a habitual drunkard, __23__ caused discord in the
family. Such an experience helped Clinton become a man who knew his own __24__, had
self-restraint and self-control, and was __25__ competition. Self-reliant, diligent
and hard working, Clinton gained a good education. In the fall of 1964, he enrolled
in Georgetown University in Washington D. C., and __26__ in international politics.
After graduation, he won the famous Rhodes scholarship and pursued advanced studies
for two years in England's Oxford University. In 1971 he __27__ Yale University's
law college and obtained a doctorate in law two years __28__. During his university
days, Clinton actively __29__ the students' movement against the Vietnam War, avoided
army enlistment, and took a trip to Moscow in 1976. These experiences helped him __30__
early, but left him vulnerable to political controversies later, and branded him as
a young liberal.

    21         答案:               C
A              serious
B              happy
C              unfortunate
D              famous
    22         答案:               A
A              accident
B              event
C              affair
D              business


                                                                                   221
 23           答案:                B
A             whom
B             which
C             that
D             what
  24          答案:                A
A             mind
B             idea
C             thought
D             care
  25          答案:                A
A             adept at
B             adept to
C             adapt to
D             adapt at
  26          答案:                C
A             studied
B             learned
C             majored
D             interested
  27          答案:                A
A             entered
B             has entered
C             had entered
D             had been entered
  28          答案:                C
A             after
B             late
C             later
D             lately
  29          答案:                B
A             called on
B             participated in
C             took part
D             went on
  30          答案:                B
A             ripe
B             mature
C             unripe
D             immature
153           We thought we knew the English language, __21__ a whole book from
English into Russian when we were in Siberia. I __22__ English in prison from a
teach-yourself book, but had never heard a word of it__23__. Now that we were in London,
we found we could not understand a single word, and __24__ understood us. At first


                                                                                    222
this was very amusing, and Vladimir Ilyrich joked about __25__. __26__, he soon
got down to __27__ the language. We started going to all kinds of meetings, always
standing in the front row and __28__ studying the speaker's mouth. We went very often
to Hyde Park __29__ speakers addressed the passing crowds on different subjects. We
were particularly keen on listening to one man, who spoke with an Irish accent which
we found relatively __30__ to understand. We learnt a great deal by listening to spoken
English.

    21         答案:              A
A              having even translated
B              had even translated
C              are even translating
D              were even translating
    22         答案:              C
A              have learnt
B              had been learning
C              learnt
D              were learning
    23         答案:              C
A              spoke
B              speaking
C              spoken
D              to speak
    24         答案:              D
A              somebody
B              anybody
C              someone
D              nobody
    25         答案:              C
A              him
B              them
C              it
D              himself
    26         答案:              D
A              Therefore
B              Although
C              Consequently
D              However
    27         答案:              A
A              learn
B              learning
C              learned
D              be learned
    28         答案:              C


                                                                                    223
A              careless
B              carelessly
C              carefully
D              careful
  29           答案:              A
A              where
B              when
C              why
D              how
  30           答案:              A
A              easy
B              easiest
C              easier
D              more easy
154             To    21   with, we can expect __22__ sciences to produce a vast
increase in entirely new products of all __23__. These will range from light-weight,
high-strength materials for __24__ in the many specialized branches of engineering,
__25__ drugs and chemicals with a greatly-increased selectivity __26__ can be used
in medicine and agriculture. However, in this __27__ case in particular, it may be
predicted __28__ the wide-spread application and combination of new and more complex
products will give __29__ to unexpected inter-reactions or side-effects. For this
reason, greatly intensified programmes of research will be required in __30__ to
discover and eliminate the harmful results of such combination.

    21        答案:               B
A             talk
B             begin
C             introduce
D             research
    22        答案:               A
A             applied
B             social
C             agricultural
D             economic
    23        答案:               C
A             lines
B             levels
C             kinds
D             values
    24        答案:               C
A             work
B             help
C             use
D             shift


                                                                                 224
 25            答案:               A
A              to
B              for
C              in
D              with
  26           答案:               D
A              it
B              what
C              whether
D              which
  27           答案:               C
A              late
B              later
C              latter
D              last
  28           答案:               B
A              why
B              that
C              which
D              whether
  29           答案:               C
A              way
B              fall
C              light
D              rise
  30           答案:               B
A              general
B              order
C              question
D              nature
155               Writing in a diary, watching television, talking with friends,
speaking on the telephone, and __21__ a menu -- what do they have in common? They
are all __22__of communication. It has been__23__ that people spend more time
communicating than they spend in any other complex activity in life. __24__
communication is a word that most people have difficulty __25__and talking about.
The word communication may be used to identify activities that do not__26__people.
For example, the word may sometimes be used to describe the __27__that animals relate
to each other. __28__, it is said that electronic devices “communicate” with each
other. However, communication most often refers to activities among people. Thus,
communication may be defined as the__29__by which people exchange feelings and ideas
with one another. __30__this definition is clear and simple, much more needs to be
said.

 21           答案:               B


                                                                                  225
A        read
B        reading
C        to read
D        having read
    22   答案:             C
A        patterns
B        fashions
C        forms
D        models
    23   答案:             A
A        estimated
B        predicted
C        designed
D        counted
    24   答案:             D
A        Therefore
B        Hence
C        Moreover
D        Even so
    25   答案:             D
A        deserving
B        demonstrating
C        defending
D        defining
    26   答案:             A
A        involve
B        evolve
C        resolve
D        revolve
    27   答案:             B
A        methods
B        ways
C        habits
D        techniques
    28   答案:             C
A        Traditionally
B        Constantly
C        Similarly
D        Usually
    29   答案:             B
A        measures
B        means
C        modes
D        manners


                             226
    30         答案:               C
A              When
B              Now that
C              While
D              If
156            Every place is different. That is__21__makes geography so interesting.
It__22__us to new places, to different ways of living on the land, to new ways of
thinking about the world. Indeed, it shows us new ways of thinking about ourselves
in our environment. Like travel, it is__23__. It gives us new experiences and broadens
our understanding.
In comparing the study of geography to travel, we should note the importance of maps.
Like vacationing motorists, geographers feel much more comfortable with a good map.
Maps are among the most important tools of the__24__trade. The ability to read and
use maps is a__25__ skill, one that you will need for driving, reading the newspaper,
and doing many jobs.
The study of geography will help you to improve your map reading skills. But that
is only the beginning. The real value of geography is__26__it will give you a special
way of__27__at the world.
A geographical outlook can help you understand__28__, your neighbors, and your world.
It can make you sensitive__29__your environment and excited enough to really care.
People with knowledge and concern can__30__our world a better place to live in.

    21         答案:               A
A              what
B              that
C              which
D              all
    22         答案:               C
A              sends
B              teaches
C              introduces
D              transfers
    23         答案:               D
A              disappointing
B              tiring
C              boring
D              exciting
    24         答案:               D
A              geographer
B              geographers
C              geography's
D              geographer's
    25         答案:               C
A              simple


                                                                                   227
B               difficult
C               basic
D               rare
  26            答案:                B
A               because
B               that
C               whether
D               what
  27            答案:                D
A               getting
B               working
C               glancing
D               looking
  28            答案:                D
A               oneself
B               you
C               one
D               yourself
  29            答案:                C
A               against
B               for
C               to
D               with
  30            答案:                B
A               turn
B               make
C               design
D               improve
157                  If you are     21   most people, your intelligence      22 from
season to season. You are probably a lot sharper in the spring than you are at any
other time of year. A noted scientist, Ellsworth Huntington (1876~1947), concluded
from other men's work and his own among peoples in different climates that climate
and temperature have a definite         23 on our mental abilities.
     He found that cool weather is much more favorable for       24 thinking than is
summer heat. This does not mean that all people are less intelligent in the summer
than they are during the rest of the year. It does mean, however, that the mental
abilities of large number of people         25 to be lowest in the summer.
     Spring      26 to be the best period of the year for thinking. One reason may
be that in the spring man's mental abilities are         27 by the same factors that
bring about great changes in all nature.
     Fall is the next best season,     28 winter.     29 summer, it seems to be a good
time to take a long vacation         30     thinking.
  21            答案:                D
A               interested in


                                                                                   228
B        look like
C        probably
D        like
    22   答案:               C
A        change
B        rises
C        varies
D        decrease
    23   答案:               B
A        result
B        effect
C        limitation
D        affect
    24   答案:               C
A        serious
B        active
C        creative
D        clever
    25   答案:               D
A        looks
B        likely
C        comes
D        tend
    26   答案:               B
A        wants
B        appears
C        said
D        supposed
    27   答案:               C
A        changed
B        returned
C        affected
D        assured
    28   答案:               D
A        following after
B        followed after
C        following by
D        followed by
    29   答案:               D
A        While
B        Compared with
C        For
D        As for
    30   答案:               B


                               229
A               for
B               from
C               after
D               still
158                  With the possible exception of equal rights, perhaps the most
21 issue across the United States today is the death penalty. Many argue that it
is an effective deterrent (威慑) to murder,           22 others maintain there is no
convincing evidence that the death penalty reduces the number of murders.
     The principal argument      23 by those opposed to the death penalty, basically,
is that it is cruel and inhuman punishment, that it is the mark of a     24 society,
and finally that it is of questionable effectiveness as a deterrent to crime anyway.
     In our opinion, the death penalty is a     25 evil. Throughout recorded history
there have always been those extreme individuals in every society who were     26 of
terribly violent crimes such as murder. But some are more extreme than others.
     For example, it is one thing to        27 the life of another in a fit of blind
rage, but quite another to coldly plot and       28 the murder of one or more people
in the style of a butcher. Thus, murder,       29 all other crimes, is a matter of
relative degree. While it could be argued with some conviction, that the       30 in
the first instance should be merely isolated from society, such should not be the
fate of the latter type of murderer.
  21            答案:               C
A               severe
B               essential
C               controversial
D               complicated
  22            答案:               D
A               however
B               although
C               and
D               while
  23            答案:               C
A               thought
B               approved
C               advanced
D               alleged
  24            答案:               A
A               brutal
B               civilized
C               democratic
D               liberal
  25            答案:               B
A               dreadful
B               necessary
C               fierce


                                                                                  230
D              prevalent
  26           答案:                A
A              capable
B              liable
C              apt
D              possible
  27           答案:                B
A              murder
B              take
C              execute
D              grab
  28           答案:                C
A              work out
B              figure out
C              carry out
D              put out
  29           答案:                C
A              unlike
B              as
C              like
D              alike
  30           答案:                D
A              victim
B              suspect
C              convict
D              criminal
159                  An unusual characteristic of American university life is its
competitiveness. Institutions of the same class 21 for faculty, research funds,
students and public attention. That Harvard and Stanford, for example, actively
recruit and compete for students is quite 22 to establishments (教育机构) such
as Tokyo or Kyoto universities, 23 an entrance examination determines all. It is
almost     24    unusual in most parts of the world for one institution to hire
professors 25 from another by offering a higher salary and / or better working
conditions. In Japan, and to a lesser extent elsewhere, universities hire almost 26
their own graduates. In--breeding is rampant--a sharp contrast with most departments
in top American universities.
     Institutional competitiveness has some negative       27   particularly if your
university loses too many encounters with the market. The dark side includes too much
movement by professional stars from one university to another in 28 of personal
gain, and a consequently lower level of institutional presence. Competition also
leads to invidious (招人反感的) comparison among fields of study, with excessive 29
within the university going to those subjects where "market power" is strong (computer
sciences, yes; English, no).
     However, the benefits of American-style competition among universities outweigh


                                                                                   231
the costs. It has 30 complacency and encouraged the drive for excellence and
change.
  21          答案:              A
A             compete
B             run
C             combat
D             turn
  22          答案:              B
A             unreasonable
B             incomprehensible
C             impossible
D             insensible
  23          答案:              D
A             while
B             which
C             for
D             where
  24          答案:              C
A             completely
B             essentially
C             equally
D             partially
  25          答案:              D
A             back
B             aside
C             far
D             away
  26          答案:              C
A             collectively
B             excessively
C             exclusively
D             specially
  27          答案:              B
A             variations
B             consequences
C             reasons
D             causes
  28          答案:              A
A             pursuit
B             light
C             terms
D             search
  29          答案:              B
A             decision


                                                                         232
B               advantages
C               responsibilities
D               profits
  30            答案:               D
A               permitted
B               concluded
C               delayed
D               prevented
160                      As a rule, graduate programs in any one department or college
of a United States university are not entirely the same for each and every student.
They are 21 to be certain courses that are required 22 all graduate students
in a particular field of concentration, but the majority of courses will be assigned
with flexibility according to the individual student's study         23 . While this
flexibility of program requirements is highly advantageous to the student who has
24    on a future career objective, it can be a source of problem or even harmful 25
the student who is uncertain about future plans. In the latter situation, it is
possible that a crucial course or a special         26    to some occupation will be
overlooked or omitted from the student's program. It is therefore desirable 27
students to have career objectives well defined from the outset of their study in
the United States 28 they will be in a position to ask appropriate questions and
acquire the kind of information and device from advisers that will be most helpful
in putting together a suitable graduate program.
   29 a great selection of courses from which to choose can cause students some
feeling of insecurity--particularly if they have come from an educational system in
which the courses 30 a specific degree have been strictly prescribed.

    21         答案:               D
A              luck
B              mature
C              opposite
D              likely
    22         答案:               A
A              for
B              by
C              of
D              toward
    23         答案:               B
A              approach
B              objective
C              manner
D              course
    24         答案:               D
A              depended
B              focused


                                                                                   233
C              counted
D              decided
  25           答案:               B
A              for
B              to
C              over
D              at
  26           答案:               A
A              approach
B              anxiety
C              extent
D              survey
  27           答案:               B
A              about
B              for
C              from
D              in
  28           答案:               C
A              although
B              unless
C              so that
D              provided
  29           答案:               D
A              Enjoying
B              Giving
C              Concerning
D              Having
  30           答案:               D
A              to
B              behind
C              through
D              for
161            Friends play an important role in our lives, and although we may take
friendship for 21 , we often don't clearly know how to make friends. 22 we
get on well with a number of people, we are usually friends with only a very few--for
example, the 23 among students is about 6 per person. In all the cases of friendly
relationships, two people like one another and enjoy being together, but 24 that,
the degree of intimacy between them and the reasons for their shared interest vary
25 . As we get to know people we take into account things 26 age, race, economic
condition, social position, and intelligence. Although these factors are not of
primary importance, it is more difficult to get on with people when there is a marked
27     in age and background.
    Some friendly relationships can be kept on argument and discussion, 28 it is
usual for close friends to have similar ideas and beliefs, to have attitudes and


                                                                                  234
interests in     29 --they often talk about "being on the same wavelength". It
generally takes times to reach this point. And the more 30 involved people become,
the more they rely on one another.

    21        答案:              C
A             given
B             provided
C             granted
D             presented
    22        答案:              A
A             While
B             As
C             Since
D             Unless
    23        答案:              B
A             most
B             average
C             normal
D             common
    24        答案:              D
A             except
B             within
C             despite
D             beyond
    25        答案:              B
A             slightly
B             enormously
C             naturally
D             surprisingly
    26        答案:              C
A             in
B             as
C             like
D             with
    27        答案:              B
A             similarity
B             difference
C             association
D             relationship
    28        答案:              C
A             so
B             and
C             but
D             or


                                                                              235
    29         答案:               A
A              common
B              same
C              alike
D              similar
  30           答案:               B
A              actively
B              intimately
C              casually
D              formally
162            Most children with healthy appetites are ready to eat almost anything
that is offered them and a child rarely dislikes food 21 it is badly cooked. The
way a meal is cooked and served is most important and an attractively served meal
will often improve a child's appetite. Never ask a child 22 he likes or dislikes
a food and never discuss likes and dislikes in front of him or allow 23 else to
do so. If the mother says she hates fat meat or the father refuses vegetables in the
child's hearing, he is possible to copy this procedure, take it 24 granted that
he dislikes everything and he probably 25 . Nothing healthful should be omitted
from the meal because of a supposed dislike. At meal times it is a good 26 to
give a child a small portion and let him come back for a second helping rather than
give him as 27 as he is likely to eat all at once. Do not talk too much to the
child during meal times, but let him get on with his food; and do not 28 him to
leave the table immediately after a meal or he will soon learn to swallow his food
29   he can hurry back to his toys. Under no circumstances must a child be coaxed(哄
骗) 30 forced to eat.

    21        答案:               B
A             if
B             unless
C             that
D             until
    22        答案:               B
A             what
B             whether
C             that
D             which
    23        答案:               C
A             everyone
B             somebody
C             anybody
D             nobody
    24        答案:               C
A             with
B             as


                                                                                 236
C              for
D              over
  25           答案:               D
A              should
B              may
C              must
D              will
  26           答案:               B
A              point
B              custom
C              plan
D              idea
  27           答案:               B
A              little
B              much
C              few
D              many
  28           答案:               A
A              allow
B              agree
C              force
D              persuade
  29           答案:               C
A              lest
B              until
C              so
D              although
  30           答案:               D
A              neither
B              nor
C              but
D              or
163            Indians in the United States are faced with significant problems. First
as groups of people with their 21 languages and cultures, each tribe wants to
keep 22 its traditional and preserve some of its native customs. The 23 want
their children to be proud of being Indians, as well as to survive in the outside
world. The young people want to enter the modern world, 24 they see on television
and in movies. Like everyone 25 , they are anxious to get a good education and
a good job. 26 , the Indians see little prospect              27 success and become
frustrated because they usually go to 28 schools and often cannot adjust        29 in
the city. In addition, many Indians feel that they are discriminated against, partly
because they always see themselves 30 losers in movies and history books. They
have lost much of their self-confidence and pride, and they must acknowledge this
fact in order to get rid of their problem.


                                                                                   237
    21   答案:         A
A        own
B        self
C        selves
D        owns
    22   答案:         C
A        on
B        down
C        up
D        from
    23   答案:         C
A        adult
B        youth
C        adults
D        women
    24   答案:         D
A        that
B        in that
C        in which
D        which
    25   答案:         B
A        own
B        else
C        owns
D        body
    26   答案:         C
A        While
B        Therefore
C        However
D        Although
    27   答案:         A
A        for
B        with
C        at
D        from
    28   答案:         D
A        noble
B        senior
C        junior
D        inferior
    29   答案:         B
A        to live
B        to life


                         238
C              to lives
D              to walk
  30           答案:                B
A              for
B              as
C              and
D              but
164            It is commonly believed that school is where people go to get education.
21   , it has been said that today children interrupt their education to go to school.
The 22 between schooling and education suggested by this is important.
Education is 23 , compared with schooling. Education knows no edges. It can take
place 24 , whether in the shower or on the job, whether in a kitchen or on a tractor.
It includes both the 25__ learning that takes place in schools and the whole
universe of learning out of class. 26 the experience of schooling can be known
in advance, education quite often produces surprises. A chance talk with a 27 may
lead to a person to discover how 28 he knows of another country. People obtain
education from 29 on. Education, then, is a very 30 and unlimited term. It is
lifelong experience that starts long before the start of school, and one that should
be a necessary part of one's entire life.

    21         答案:               B
A              Then
B              However
C              Thus
D              Therefore
    22         答案:               A
A              difference
B              importance
C              use
D              problem
    23         答案:               B
A              unexpected
B              endless
C              countless
D              simple
    24         答案:               A
A              anywhere
B              anywhere else
C              somewhere
D              somewhere els
    25         答案:               C
A              part-time
B              public
C              standard


                                                                                    239
D              strict
  26           答案:                 D
A              If
B              Because
C              So
D              Though
  27           答案:                 C
A              neighbor
B              friend
C              foreigner
D              teacher
  28           答案:                 D
A              wonderful
B              well
C              greatly
D              little
  29           答案:                 A
A              babies
B              grown-ups
C              women
D              men
  30           答案:                 B
A              long
B              broad
C              narrow
D              short
165            Once upon a time, two brothers who lived on adjoining(相临) farms fell
into conflict.
One morning there was a knock on John's door. He opened it to find a man with a
carpenter's tool box. “ I'm looking for a few days' work, ” he said. “Perhaps you
would have a few small      21 here and there I could help with. Could I help you?”
“Yes, ”said the elder brother. “I 22 have a job for you. Look across the creek
on that farm. That's my neighbor. In fact, it's my 23 brother. Last week there was
a meadow (牧场) between us and he took his bulldozer (推土机) to the river levee (码
头) and now there is a creek between us. Well, he may have done this to spite me,
but I'll go him one better. 24 that pile of wood by the barn?”
The carpenter said, “I think I understand the situation. Show me the nails and the
post hole digger and I'll be able to do a job that 25 you.”
The elder brother had to go to town, so he helped the carpenter 26 the materials
ready and then he was off for the day. The carpenter worked hard all that day measuring,
sawing, nailing, and hammering.
About sunset when the farmer returned, the carpenter 27 his job. The farmer's eye
opened wide, and his jaw dropped. There was no fence there 28 .
It was a bridge - a bridge from one side of the creek to the other! A fine piece of


                                                                                    240
work ---- handrails and all ---- and the neighbor , his younger brother, was coming
across, his hand outstretched.
“You are quite a fellow to build this bridge after all I've said and done.”
The two brothers stood at each end of the bridge, and then they met in the middle,
29 each other's hand. They turned to see the carpenter lift his tool box on his
shoulder.
“No, 30 ! Stay a few days. I've a lot of other projects for you,” said the elder
brother.
“I'd love to stay on,” the carpenter said, “but I have many more bridges to build.”

    21        答案:              B
A             work
B             jobs
C             labor
D             things
    22        答案:              C
A             doing
B             did
C             do
D             does
    23        答案:              B
A             older
B             younger
C             old
D             elder
    24        答案:              A
A             See
B             Look
C             Watch
D             Think
    25        答案:              B
A             hurts
B             pleases
C             damages
D             happy
    26        答案:              A
A             get
B             make
C             buy
D             take
    27        答案:              A
A             had just finished
B             finished
C             finishing


                                                                               241
D               was to finish
  28            答案:               D
A               all
B               above
C               after all
D               at all
  29            答案:               D
A               took
B               take
C               had taken
D               taking
  30            答案:               A
A               wait
B               stay
C               keep
D               stop
166             One day in September we were doing repair work on my parents' old house
to get it ready for my youngest daughter's wedding. We had to remove a great climbing
plant that had grown 21 a roof beam(房梁),so that we could repair the roof and paint
the walls.
When my husband was taking the plant away, he found the 22 of a blackbird that had
made its home in the leaves. He then 23 something shiny among that mass of earth
and straw of the nest. He broke the earth around it into pieces with his finger tips
and, to his surprise, saw glittering gold. It was a child's bracelet(手镯).He ran
into the house to 24 me.
"You won't believe that the thieving blackbirds not only steal the best fruit we 25
to feed on, "he said, "but they also want their children to 26 in a cradle of gold!"
When my daughter came over on the eve of the wedding, we told her about this 27
occurrence.
"Don't you remember, Mother?" she said with a loud 28 ."When I was eight, you gave
me a bracelet that I lost a few days later while out playing in the yard? It was this
one!"
As the bracelet no longer fitted its owner and was dirty, I decided to take it into
my safekeeping.
In December of the following year, the young couple's baby son was baptized(受洗
礼).Among the 29 the newborn baby received, I placed his mother's bracelet, now
shining like new. I hope that if my grandson 30 loses it, one of the blackbirds
that live in my backyard is somewhere nearby.

    21         答案:               C
A              beyond
B              over
C              across
D              through


                                                                                    242
    22   答案:         A
A        nest
B        baby
C        body
D        egg
    23   答案:         D
A        moved
B        got
C        picked
D        noticed
    24   答案:         C
A        ask
B        tell
C        show
D        give
    25   答案:         B
A        buy
B        plant
C        store
D        collect
    26   答案:         A
A        lie
B        sing
C        listen
D        wait
    27   答案:         B
A        important
B        strange
C        terrible
D        funny
    28   答案:         C
A        cry
B        sigh
C        laugh
D        sound
    29   答案:         D
A        jewels
B        toys
C        clothes
D        presents
    30   答案:         D
A        almost
B        just
C        even


                         243
D              ever
167            One of the most common complaints I hear from families is that they
are not close. They may be close in proximity, but still not feel close as a 21 .
They may live next door or in the same house, but not feel emotionally.
Closeness is about attitude. We feel close when we feel understood, when we feel loved
and when we simply enjoy being together. We may live far apart and still feel close,
or we may 22 a home yet feel distant.
Closeness is a family trait that 23 over time. It is planted by love, watered by
honest sharing and fed by true listening. It grows slowly and sometimes 24 years
to mature; but it's roots grow deep. It can 25 most storm and sustain a family
through the most difficult time.
I received a letter from a reader in Hawaii. She 26 out that the CEO of one of the
island's largest banks was considering a run for governor. Since he was well-liked,
he seemed to have a good 27 of winning.
But before filing papers, he changed his mind, stating that he wanted to spend more
time with his family. Not that elected officials cannot be family-oriented, but he
felt he needed more time at home than the job 28 .
Ronald A Young, in the Honolulu Advertiser, said this about the candidate's decision:
“No matter what you accomplish in the business world or the social world, if you
fail the family, then you have not accomplished much. Failure or success does not
29 in the material wealth you provide them. It is measured by what of yourself you
give to them.”
He made a decision to give the best of himself to his family. He 30 family closeness
first, despite pressure to put more time elsewhere. It's likely a decision he'll never
regret.

    21        答案:               C
A             house
B             home
C             family
D             group
    22        答案:               A
A             share
B             stay
C             live
D             keep
    23        答案:               A
A             grows
B             changes
C             stays
D             happens
    24        答案:               C
A             pays
B             spends


                                                                                  244
C              takes
D              costs
  25           答案:                A
A              weather
B              carry
C              keep
D              protect
  26           答案:                A
A              pointed
B              set
C              put
D              gave
  27           答案:                D
A              sign
B              mark
C              score
D              chance
  28           答案:                B
A              provided
B              allowed
C              had
D              gave
  29           答案:                A
A              lie
B              result
C              say
D              happen
  30           答案:                C
A              took
B              brought
C              chose
D              held
168            My first feeling about London was a very comfortable one. The clouds
in London were __21__and low. I could see the greenness and smell the countryside
everywhere. The air was so fresh __22__ I was deeply attracted by this foreign land.
Things in Britain are greatly__23__things in China. Some Englishmen work and write
with their left hands. The cars go along the left side of the roads. What surprised
me most, __24__, was that I didn't even see one good road. This was funny considering
Britain is such a __25__country but the roads were narrow. The __26__ thing was that
there were no traffic jams, and all the cars travelled fast.
The diet in England was not the same as I had imagined it. I had thought that Englishmen
eat steak and pizza for their dinners, but I __27__ that this was not the case. People
in England eat sandwiches __28__fast food and pizza as emergency food.
Many people in England are glad to help others. If you __29__ in the street and needed


                                                                                     245
help, they would help you. If possible, they would __30__ ask you if you needed a
ride home in their car.



    21        答案:                C
A             thin
B             heavy
C             thick
D             high
    22        答案:                B
A             and
B             that
C             but
D             when
    23        答案:                B
A             the same as
B             different from
C             as many as
D             like
    24        答案:                C
A             though
B             so
C             however
D             but
    25        答案:                D
A             new
B             old
C             developing
D             developed
    26        答案:                D
A             most terrible
B             best
C             most interesting
D             strangest
    27        答案:                B
A             understood
B             found out
C             studied
D             watched
    28        答案:                A
A             as
B             for
C             so
D             such


                                                                              246
    29         答案:               A
A              were lost
B              lost
C              were losing
D              have lost
  30           答案:               B
A              ever
B              even
C              already
D              yet
169            I liked most of my teachers in college. They were, for the most part,
friendly and competent, __21__to help students. I liked them-but I don't remember
them very well, __22__Mr. Jones, my freshman English teacher. He was an enthusiastic,
sensitive man, who knew his subject and was __23__that we would learn it and love
it, too.
Mr. Jones was a tall, __24__man in his mid-forties with gray, thinning hair. Perched
precariously on his nose, his glasses gave him a serious __25__. But they didn't remain
there long, for he was always taking them off and __26__them and putting them in his
mouth when he thought over a response __27__a student's question. When he walked into
class, he was always carrying two or three books with stripes of paper sticking out
of them, marking passages he planned to read. I remember, too, the cardigan
sweaters-he __28__a dozen of them. On rainy days he substituted a blue
raincoat__29__the sweater. But what I remember best was his smile. When he smiled,
his whole face __30__; his eyes sparkled. His smile made you feel good, at ease,
somehow reassured.

    21         答案:         B
A              reluctant
B              willing
C              unhappy
D              urgent
    22         答案:         B
A              besides
B              except for
C              including
D              as well as
    23         答案:         A
A              determined
B              decided
C              remained
D              maintained
    24         答案:         D
A              snobbish(势力的)
B              steady


                                                                                    247
C              steep
D              slender(苗条的)
  25           答案:                C
A              stare
B              glance
C              look
D              gaze
  26           答案:                B
A              passing
B              polishing
C              purchasing
D              pursuing
  27           答案:                C
A              of
B              for
C              to
D              in
  28           答案:                C
A              can't have had
B              should have had
C              must have had
D              needn't have had
  29           答案:                C
A              of
B              with
C              for
D              to
  30           答案:                A
A              lit up
B              held up
C              built up
D              cleared up
170                 The world is not only hungry; it is also thirsty for water. This
may seem strange to you, since nearly 75% of the earth's surface 21 covered with
water. But about 97% of this huge 22 is seawater, 23              salt water. Man can
only drink and use the other 3% of the fresh water that comes from rivers, lakes,
underground, and other 24 .
     And we can't even use all of that, because some of it is in the form of icebergs
and glaciers. Even worse, some of it has been polluted.
However, as things stand today, this small amount of fresh water, 25 is constantly
being replaced by rainfall, is still enough for us. But our need 26 water is
increasing rapidly-almost day by day. We all have to learn how to stop wasting our
27    water. One of the first steps we should 28 is to develop ways of reusing it.
     Experiments have already been done in this 29 , but only on a small scale.


                                                                                  248
The systems that have been worked out resemble   30   used in spacecraft.

    21        答案:              C
A             are
B             was
C             is
D             were
    22        答案:              A
A             amount
B             number
C             volume
D             size
    23        答案:              A
A             or
B             but
C             and
D             also
    24        答案:              C
A             origins
B             originals
C             sources
D             resources
    25        答案:              D
A             that
B             this
C             it
D             which
    26        答案:              C
A             of
B             about
C             for
D             with
    27        答案:              A
A             precious
B             previous
C             precise
D             prior
    28        答案:              B
A             make
B             take
C             grant
D             offer
    29        答案:              B
A             case


                                                                            249
B              field
C              way
D              region
  30           答案:                D
A              what
B              ones
C              these
D              those
171                 Man can't go on increasing his number at the present rate. In the
next 30 years man will face a period of crisis. 21 experts believe that there will
be a widespread food     22   .Other experts think this is too pessimistic(悲观的),
and man can prevent things 23 worse than they are now.
One thing that man can do is to limit 24 of babies born. The need for this is
obvious, 25      it is not easy to achieve. People have to        26 to limit their
families. In the countries of the population      27 , many people like big families.
The parents think that this 28        a bigger income for the family and ensures there
will be someone in the family who will look after them in old age.
     Several governments have 29 birth control policies in recent years. Among
them are Japan, China. India and Egypt. In some        30 the results have not been
successful. Japan has been an exception. People were encouraged to limit their
families in the 1950's, which has effectively reduced the birth rate in Japan.
  21           答案:                B
A              Any
B              Some
C              More
D              All
  22           答案:                D
A              need
B              want
C              absence
D              shortage
  23           答案:                B
A              getting
B              from getting
C              to get
D              get
  24           答案:                D
A              an amount
B              a number
C              the amount
D              the number
  25           答案:                A
A              but
B              and


                                                                                   250
C              or
D              so
  26           答案:                C
A              persuade
B              be persuading
C              be persuaded
D              persuading
  27           答案:                B
A              bursting
B              explosion
C              raising
D              extension
  28           答案:                B
A              takes
B              brings
C              makes
D              earns
  29           答案:                C
A              adjusted
B              created
C              adopted
D              adapted
  30           答案:                D
A              incidents
B              examples
C              events
D              cases
172                 Human language is a system of symbols. No other animal has a complex
symbolic language that must be learned. Animal language is largely instinctive, 21
basic human language is learned speech, composed 22 sounds that symbolize things,
ideas, actions, and the like.
     We learn to read, often with considerable effort, by noticing or 23 taught
that groups of letters stand for the sounds that we already know 24 to speak. We
learn to write, with even 25 effort, by learning to form the letters, 26 are
symbols of sounds, and to put them together on paper so that others can read what
we “say”.
     Since human language is a form of human behavior, 27 is nothing absolute about
it. It has 28 lowly throughout human history and will continue to develop. In the
English language there are perhaps 600,000 29 , Possibly more, but most of them
are 30 only to specialists and are rarely used.
  21           答案:                A
A              while
B              because
C              since


                                                                                    251
D        so
    22   答案:          C
A        on
B        by
C        of
D        in
    23   答案:          B
A        having
B        being
C        are
D        been
    24   答案:          B
A        what
B        how
C        which
D        why
    25   答案:          D
A        larger
B        fewer
C        less
D        greater
    26   答案:          C
A        they
B        those
C        which
D        that
    27   答案:          A
A        there
B        it
C        which
D        one
    28   答案:          A
A        developed
B        lasted
C        survived
D        functioned
    29   答案:          A
A        sounds
B        works
C        letters
D        signs
    30   答案:          D
A        given
B        seen


                          252
C               felt
D               known
173                 Kate said“Hello”to Mr. Patel as she entered the store. She picked
up a wire basket and walked towards the back of the store 21 the rice was kept.
The room was quite large and divided by three long aisles (过道), with rows of shelves
full of goods. Besides her and Mr. Patel there were only two boys in the store. They
were both wearing long overcoats. They looked rather 22        because the overcoats
were too big for them. “ 23 ”, she heard one of them whisper to the other. She
walked on to the next aisle and found the rice she was looking for. Then she heard
something else. It 24 like a box dropping on the floor. She looked through the
small open space between goods on the shelf and saw one of the boys picking up a box.
But instead of putting it in the basket, he dropped it into the inside pocket of his
overcoat. Kate looked back and could see Mr. Patel at the door checking through a
list. Then she looked through the 25 in the shelf again. Then boys still had their
backs to her. They were putting something       26 into their pockets and then one
of them said “Let's get out of here”. They moved away from her.
     When she got to the door the two boys were 27 her. She watched them 28 for
the few things in their basket. They had both 29 their overcoats. Mr. Patel did
not seem to know what they had done. He even 30 at them as they were about to
leave. Now, Kate decided to stop them.
  21            答案:                D
A               which
B               that
C               there
D               where
  22            答案:                A
A               strange
B               young
C               nervous
D               excited
  23            答案:                C
A               Look up
B               Listen to me
C               Watch out
D               Put it down
  24            答案:                D
A               looked
B               heard
C               showed
D               sounded
  25            答案:                B
A               spot
B               space
C               goods


                                                                                  253
D              place
  26           答案:               D
A              important
B              new
C              extra
D              else
  27           答案:               C
A              looking at
B              talking to
C              in front of
D              behind
  28           答案:               A
A              paying
B              asking
C              looking
D              reaching
  29           答案:               D
A              thrown out
B                put on
C              hidden
D              buttoned
  30           答案:               B
A              shouted
B              smiled
C              laughed
D              looked
174                 Blood is very important. When doctors understand how blood goes
around inside the body, they try ways of giving blood to people who need it. They
take blood from the health people and give it to the patient in need of blood. This
course is     21      “blood transfusion (输血)”.
     But there are two 22 . First, it does not always work. Sometimes people die
when they     23 blood transfusion. Later, doctors find that we do not all have the
same kind of blood. There are four groups --- O, A, B and AB. We all have blood of
one of these groups. They also find that they can give any kind of blood to people
of group AB. But they find that they 24 give A-group blood to A-group people and
B-group blood to B-group people. If a person has O-group blood and the doctor could
give his blood to anyone else safely.
     There is 25 problem. To give blood of the right kind, doctors have to find
a person of the right blood group. Often they cannot find a person     26 . At first
they find they can keep the blood in bottles for fifteen to twenty days. They do this
by     27 it very cold. They find how to keep it longer 28 the end.
     One day, when you grow up, you may decide to give blood to a “blood bank”. In
this way, you may stop     29 dying. Or perhaps one day you may become ill and need
some blood with the same kind as     30 . Then the “blood bank” will give it back


                                                                                  254
to you.
  21      答案:         D
A         talked
B         spoken
C         said
D         called
  22      答案:         B
A         questions
B         problems
C         answers
D         results
  23      答案:         B
A         has
B         have
C         had
D         having
  24      答案:         C
A         should
B         may
C         must
D         can
  25      答案:         A
A         another
B         the other
C         one
D         other
  26      答案:         A
A         in time
B         on time
C         at time
D         for time
  27      答案:         D
A         make
B         makes
C         made
D         making
  28      答案:         A
A         in
B         by
C         at
D         to
  29      答案:         B
A         by
B         from


                          255
C              to
D              for
  30           答案:                D
A              him
B              it
C              you
D              yours
175                 There was a professor who worked in a university in Tokyo. He had
a dog. He was very kind to his dog, and the dog loved the master very much.
     Every morning the professor went to walk with his dog. Of course, the dog could
not go with the professor to the university. It followed him only as 21 as the
railway station 22 it watched him buy his ticket and disappeared in the direction
of the train. Then the dog would sit at a small square in front of the station, waiting
for its master's return. After one year, passers-by were very 23 with the dog and
all praised it for its      24 .
     One afternoon, the professor had a sudden heart attack and died at work, but the
dog still sat at the same place waiting. In the evening several persons thought about
the dog and went to see 25 it was still there. It seemed that the dog could 26
them when they said to it, “Go home, poor thing. Your master will never come to you
again”.
     Weeks became months, months became years, and still the dog waited there. People
were really moved by this sight. A famous artist made a statue of the dog and placed
it at the very place. From then on, the dog sat in the 27 of its own statue to
wait for its master.
     The years passed. One day, the dog died, but people there could not 28 that
dog. Its statue has become a 29 spot. If someone asked, “ 30 shall we meet at
the station?” Another would always answer, “At the statue of the dog.”
  21           答案:                C
A              long
B              soon
C              far
D              near
  22           答案:                D
A              that
B              which
C              when
D              where
  23           答案:                C
A              angry
B              happy
C              familiar
D              popular
  24           答案:                D
A              royalty


                                                                                    256
B              honesty
C              sincerity
D              loyalty(忠实、忠诚)
  25           答案:               A
A              if
B              that
C              why
D              how
  26           答案:               D
A              see
B              hear
C              feel
D              understand
  27           答案:               A
A              shade
B              shadow
C              shelter
D              coldness
  28           答案:               D
A              find
B               hear of
C              remember
D              forget
  29           答案:               B
A              important
B              well-known
C              waiting
D              pleasant
  30           答案:               A
A              Where
B              Why
C              When
D              How
176            A person who believes that he is incapable will not make a real effort,
because he feels that it would be useless. He won't go at a job with the confidence
21   for success. He is therefore 22 to fail, and the failure will strengthen
his belief in his incompetence.
Alfred Adler, a famous doctor, had an experience 23 illustrates this. When he
was a small boy he was poor at arithmetic. His teacher got the idea that he had no
ability in arithmetic, and told his parents what she thought in order that they would
not expect 24 much of him. 25 this way, they too developed the idea, "Isn't
it too bad that Alfred can't do arithmetic?" He accepted their mistaken estimate of
his ability, felt that it was 26 to try, and was very poor at arithmetic, just
as they expected.


                                                                                   257
One day Adler succeeded in solving a problem which 27 of the other students had
been able to solve. This gave him confidence. He 28 the idea that he couldn't
do arithmetic and was determined to show them that he could. His new 29 confidence
stimulated him to go at arithmetic problems with a new spirit. He now worked with
interest, 30 , and purpose, and he soon became extraordinarily good at arithmetic.

    21        答案:              B
A             well
B             necessary
C             in
D             good
    22        答案:              C
A             possible
B             possibly
C             likely
D             like
    23        答案:              D
A             to
B             when
C             what
D             which
    24        答案:              A
A             too
B             very
C             so
D             that
    25        答案:              B
A             On
B             In
C             By
D             From
    26        答案:              C
A             important
B             useful
C             useless
D             necessary
    27        答案:              B
A             any
B             none
C             each
D             no
    28        答案:              C
A             accepted
B             developed


                                                                               258
C               rejected
D               thought
  29            答案:                A
A               found
B               finding
C               find
D               founded
  30            答案:                C
A               love
B               feelings
C               determination
D               solution
177             Many teachers believe that the responsibilities for learning lie with
the student. 21 a long reading assignment is given, instructors expect students
to be familiar with the 22 in the reading even if they don't discuss it in class
or take an exam. The ideal student is considered to be 23 who is motivated to
learn for the sake of 24 , not the one interested only in getting high grades.
Sometimes homework is returned 25 brief written comments but without a grade.
Even if a grade is not given, the student is 26 for learning the material assigned.
When research is 27 , the professor expects the student to take it actively and
to complete it with 28 guidance. It is the 29 responsibility to find books,
magazines, and articles in the library. Professors do not have the time to explain
30     a university library works; they expect students, particularly graduate
students, to be able to exhaust the reference sources in the library by themselves.

    21        答案:               A
A             If
B             Although
C             Because
D             Since
    22        答案:               D
A             suggestion
B             context
C             abstract
D             information
    23        答案:               B
A             such
B             one
C             any
D             some
    24        答案:               C
A             fun
B             work
C             learning


                                                                                 259
D              prize
  25           答案:               D
A              by
B              in
C              for
D              with
  26           答案:               C
A              criticized
B              innocent
C              responsible
D              dismissed
  27           答案:               C
A              collected
B              distributed
C              assigned
D              finished
  28           答案:               B
A              maximum
B              minimum
C              possible
D              practical
  29           答案:               A
A              student's
B              professor's
C              assistant's
D              librarian's
  30           答案:               D
A              when
B              what
C              why
D              how
178            Coffee and tea are the most popular drinks in the world. Coffee is a
21   drink of Canadians. Many Canadians like to start their day 22 a cup of coffee.
At work, they may 23 a coffee break. Coffee break is a time to stop and relax
for a few minutes over a cup of coffee or a snack.
Why is coffee so 24 ? For one thing, it has a rich, strong taste that many people
like. It is served hot, with milk, cream or sugar. Many people like coffee in the
morning because it helps them 25 . Coffee has caffeine in it. Caffeine gives
people more energy.
Every day, millions of people all over the world drink tea. Tea is the 26 drink
of China, Japan, England and Russia. In England, it is a 27 to drink tea in the
afternoon. In Japan, drinking tea is also a social custom and there are 28 rules
for tea drinking.
Tea comes from tea leaves. We make tea by 29 boiling water on dried tea leaves.


                                                                               260
People usually drink hot tea, but it can be served cold. Some people like to drink
tea with milk or cream. Other people 30 milk or cream in tea, but they put in
honey, sugar or lemon. Tea also has some caffeine in it.

    21        答案:              A
A             favorite
B             lovely
C             general
D             fond
    22        答案:              D
A             from
B             at
C             in
D             with
    23        答案:              B
A             bring
B             take
C             carry
D             raise
    24        答案:              A
A             popular
B             frequent
C             common
D             regular
    25        答案:              B
A             move away
B             wake up
C             come in
D             look down
    26        答案:              D
A             personal
B             private
C             possible
D             national
    27        答案:              B
A             principle
B             custom
C             regulation
D             belief
    28        答案:              C
A             smart
B             strange
C             special
D             slight


                                                                               261
    29         答案:                C
A              falling
B              running
C              pouring
D              throwing
  30           答案:                A
A              hate
B              like
C              enjoy
D              mix
179            Julie had turned 8 in October and as Christmas approached, Santa Claus
was more and more 21 . During the week before Christmas, every night she announced
to her father, "I know who really brings the presents. You do!" Then, 22 a moment,
she added, "Right?"
Jerry didn't answer. 23        he nor I was sure she really wanted the truth. And we
both were reluctant to give up Santa Claus ourselves. We got to tell Julie and her
younger brother, Adam, to put out the cookies        24    Santa was hungry. We    25
about the fire being out in the fireplace so he wouldn't get burned. We issued a few
threats about his list of good children and bad. It was all part of the tension and
thrill of Christmas Eve - the night the fantasy comes true. And that fantasy of a
fat jolly man who flies through the sky in a sleigh and arrives 26 chimney with
presents - that single belief says everything about the 27 of children. How 28
to lose it. For them and for us. So Jerry and I said nothing.
Christmas Eve Julie appeared with a sheet of paper. At the top she had written, "If
you are real, sign here." It was, she said, a letter to Santa. She insisted that on
this letter each of us--her father, Adam and I 29 the words 'Santa Claus', so
if Santa were to sign it, she could compare our handwriting with his. Then she would
know she 30 .

    21        答案:              B
A             on her mind
B             in her mind
C             at her mind
D             with her mind
    22        答案:              D
A             waited
B             had waited
C             had been waiting
D             waiting
    23        答案:              B
A             Either
B             Neither
C             Both
D             None


                                                                                  262
 24             答案:                A
A               in case
B               in the case
C               in case of
D               in any case
  25            答案:                B
A               made a plan
B               made a joke
C               made a fuss
D               made a story
  26            答案:                B
A               from
B               via
C               over
D               under
  27            答案:                B
A               innocent
B               innocence
C               innovate
D               innovation
  28            答案:                C
A               bearable
B               bearably
C               unbearable
D               unbearably
  29            答案:                A
A               wrote
B               had written
C               would have written
D               write
  30            答案:                C
A               had been tricked
B               was tricked
C               had not been tricked
D               was not tricked
180             Many Chinese students don't pay much attention to spoken English at
school. They think it necessary to practice speaking English 21 class. Here is
a story to show you how important it is to speak the English language 22 in everyday
life.
A foreigner once got hungry and went into a restaurant in London. He sat down 23 .
When the waiter came, he opened his mouth, put his fingers 24 it and took them
out again in order to express that he wanted something to eat for he could not speak
25 .
     The waiter soon brought a cup of tea. The man shook his head. The waiter then


                                                                                 263
took 26 the tea and brought a cup of coffee. The man again shook his head. The
man tried again and again, but he wasn't able to make 27 understood. Finally
another man came in. He spoke English 28 . In a few minutes, there was a large
plate of meat and vegetables on the table before him.
So you 29 a man often goes hungry if he doesn't 30 a foreign language.

    21       答案:              C
A            from
B            into
C            in
D            on
    22       答案:              C
A            correct
B            free
C            freely
D            right
    23       答案:              A
A            at a table
B            on the table
C            at the table
D            on a table
    24       答案:              B
A            upon
B            into
C            to
D            onto
    25       答案:              D
A            Japanese
B            French
C            Chinese
D            English
    26       答案:              C
A            over
B            in
C            away
D            out
    27       答案:              B
A            that
B            himself
C            him
D            it
    28       答案:              A
A            clearly and fluently(流利地)
B            clear and fluently


                                                                           264
C              clearly and fast
D              clear and fast
  29           答案:               A
A              see
B              understand
C              look
D              know
  30           答案:               C
A              know
B              study
C              master
D              learn
181                   In the eighteenth century, cities    21   larger and larger.
People moved from the countryside and small towns to the 22 because there was 23
work for them to do in the cities.
On Sundays and holidays, they liked to 24 the cities and have a good time in the
countryside. But not every 25 had a horse or a wagon(四轮马车). People needed
a simpler means of transportation. 26        in many countries tried to solve this
problem.
The first bicycle, which was very simple, 27 in 1790. People called “the horse
on wheel”. Then in 1861, after many improvements being made, the bicycle became a
practical 28 of transportation.
People liked bikes because they weren't as 29 as horses and didn't need to be fed.
They could go anywhere and were easy to 30 .

    21        答案:              B
A             become
B             became
C             change
D             changed
    22        答案:              A
A             cities
B             countryside
C             towns
D             villages
    23        答案:              C
A             many
B             much
C             more
D             lots
    24        答案:              D
A             come to
B             reach
C             go away


                                                                               265
D              leave
  25           答案:               A
A              family
B              house
C              home
D              people
  26           答案:               B
A              Workers
B              Inventors
C              Teachers
D              Drivers
  27           答案:               B
A              invented
B              appeared
C              made
D              produced
  28           答案:               C
A              mean
B              way
C              means
D              ways
  29           答案:               D
A              cheap
B              easy
C              difficult
D              expensive
  30           答案:               A
A              ride
B              drive
C              get on
D              buy
182                  A lady once wrote a long story. She sent it to a famous editor
(编辑). 21 the story was returned to her. The lady was 22 . she wrote to the
editor.
     “Dear Sir: Yesterday you sent back a story of 23 . 24 do you know that the
story is not good? You didn't read it. Before I sent the story, I pasted together
pages 8, 9 and 10. This was a test to see 25 you would read the story. When the
story came back yesterday, the pages were 26 pasted together. Is this the way you
read all the stories 27 you?”
The editor wrote back. “Dear Madam: 28 when I open an egg I 29 eat all the
eggs 30 that it is bad.”

    21        答案:               B
A             In a few weeks


                                                                                266
B        After a few weeks
C        Few week later
D        A few weeks before
    22   答案:              C
A        happy
B        excited
C        angry
D        surprising
    23   答案:              C
A        my
B        yours
C        mine
D        someone else's
    24   答案:              A
A        How
B        What
C        Whether
D        How fast
    25   答案:              D
A        when
B        who
C        where
D        whether
    26   答案:              B
A        already
B        still
C        not
D        never
    27   答案:              A
A        that are sent to
B        that is sent to
C        that send to
D        that sends to
    28   答案:              C
A        In breakfast
B        When breakfast
C        At breakfast
D        Having breakfast
    29   答案:              B
A        needn't to
B        don't have to
C        haven't do
D        didn't have to
    30   答案:              D


                              267
A              to look
B              to look for
C              to invent
D              to discover
183                American people divide their days 21 several blocks 22 time,
and plan different activities 23 different times.
    American time is “on the dot”(准确地). If something is supposed to happen 24
Eight o'clock, it will begin at eight. Americans value promptness(准时)and may become
angry if a person is more than 15 minutes late 25 a good reason. If you know you
are going to be late, call   26 advance and let someone know. 27 you arrive late,
you should apologize and explain why. Americans arrive        28 time for doctors'
appointments. The doctor may keep you 29 , but if you keep the doctor waiting,
you may get a bill 30 the doctor's time!

    21        答案:              C
A             by
B             in
C             into
D             on
    22        答案:              B
A             at
B             of
C             in
D             for
    23        答案:              A
A             for
B             up
C             into
D             to
    24        答案:              A
A             at
B             on
C             by
D             in
    25        答案:              B
A             with not
B             without
C             not at
D             not with
    26        答案:              D
A             on
B             at
C             for
D             in


                                                                               268
    27         答案:               C
A              At
B              In
C              If
D              By
  28           答案:               A
A              on
B              in
C              at
D              by
  29           答案:               B
A              to wait
B              waiting
C              waited
D              wait
  30           答案:               B
A              for
B              with
C              over
D              in
184                There have been many great inventions that changed the way we live.
The 21 Great invention was one that is still very 22 today-wheel. This made
it 23 to carry heavy things and to travel long 24 . For hundreds of years after
that there were 25 inventions that had affected our life as much as the wheel had
done. Then in the early 1800's the world started to change. There was 26 unknown
land left in the world. People 27 explore much any more. They began to work to
make life 28 . In the second half of 29 many great inventions were made. Among
them were the camera, the electric light and the radio. These all 30 a big part
of our life today.

    21         答案:               A
A              first
B              second
C              third
D              fourth
    22         答案:               C
A              good
B              new
C              important
D              big
    23         答案:               B
A              easy
B              easier
C              easiest


                                                                                   269
D              the easiest
  24          答案:               D
A              way
B              road
C             distant
D              distances
  25          答案:               A
A              few
B              a few
C              many
D              more
  26          答案:               A
A              little
B              a little
C              less
D             least
  27          答案:               D
A              have to
B              have not to
C              not have to
D              did not have to
  28          答案:               B
A              good
B              better
C              best
D              the best
  29          答案:               C
A              19th century
B              the 19 century
C              the 19th century
D              19 century
  30          答案:               B
A              become
B              became
C             change
D              changed
185            The Internet began more than thirty years ago, and its 21 was to
increase communication among universities, the government and some 22 American
businesses by linking their computers together. The Internet makes it easy for them
to send large 23 of information quickly.
As time passed, more people began using the Internet. In 1981, the Internet linked
213 computers. Only nine years later, it 24 more than 350,000 computers. Today
experts say there are about 300 million computers connected to the Internet.
The Internet has changed the way people work. They can travel from place to place


                                                                                270
25 getting in touch 26 their office all the time via the Internet. A 27 report
in the America magazine, Newsweek, said more than 89 million Americana now use the
Internet at work. Companies around the world now use the Internet. One can hardly
imagine how business could be done 28 the Internet.
The Internet is becoming more    29 than any one had thought possible. And its
importance is 30 to increase more in the future.

    21        答案:              B
A             result
B             goal
C             finding
D             experiment
    22        答案:              A
A             major
B             minor
C             mentioned
D             stated
    23        答案:              A
A             amount
B             number
C             size
D             part
    24        答案:              D
A             increased
B             raised
C             limited
D              linked
    25        答案:              C
A             as
B             when
C             while
D             however
    26        答案:              D
A             to
B             on
C             into
D             with
    27        答案:              B
A             decent
B             recent
C             absent
D             present
    28        答案:              B
A             with


                                                                               271
B              without
C              through
D              on
  29           答案:               C
A              creative
B              crazy
C              important
D              smart
  30           答案:               C
A              proved
B              improved
C              expected
D              regarded
186             Without time to 21 and have fun, kids can suffer stress just like
adults, warn experts-who say as many as one in four youngsters have symptoms of burnout
(过度劳累). More and more parents are pushing their kids to be busy in structured
activities all the time. Many of these activities for children aren't recreational
(娱乐的) 22 involve competition. The kids 23 to win, not just participate, and
this can cause 24 . Today's parents have the 25 that children who don't pursue
a lot outside activities will be 26 .Parents are in a panic because they know it's
a 27 world out there. They are running scared to be sure their kids can go into
the marketplace and compete as adults, but 28 some cases they are missing the big
picture.
Kids who are unhappy and depressed grow up to be unhappy, depressed adults who don't
do well in their jobs or 29 life. And these kids won't know as adults how to relax.
Everyone needs time just to relax and refresh. When you're not stressed, you can be
30 productive. That's why it's important to help your child find a balance.

    21         答案:               B
A              loose
B              relax
C              sleep
D              spend
    22         答案:               B
A              and
B              but
C              nor
D              rather
    23         答案:               D
A              push
B              are pushing
C              have pushed
D              are pushed
    24         答案:               C


                                                                                    272
A              failure
B              threat
C              stress
D              loss
  25           答案:               D
A              attitude
B              expectation
C              concept
D              idea
  26           答案:               B
A              left alone
B              left behind
C              left out
D              left over
  27           答案:               D
A              beautiful
B              colorful
C              wonderful
D              tough
  28           答案:               A
A              in
B              at
C              on
D              under
  29           答案:               B
A              marriage
B              personal
C              public
D              sociable
  30           答案:               C
A              little
B              most
C              more
D              less
187            In the past, a city's major shopping 21 was in its downtown area.
People could get downtown     22 than they could get to other parts of the city.
Before the 1960s, the best way to travel in a city was by a car, a subway, a railroad,
or an elevated train. All of these ran on tracks that led downtown.
__23 our cities grew outward, people 24 far from the center of town needed a
place they could drive to quickly. Driving downtown was difficulty. Finding a
parking space downtown was 25 . People also needed a shopping place where they
could park easily.
To    26 the shopping needs of people living in the suburbs, groups of businesses
moved     27      out, too. Today, most suburbs have large shopping centers.


                                                                                   273
Modem and well-planned shopping centers are built on large areas of ground. They have
even more space for parking than they 28 for stores. The shopping centers have
many different kinds of stores. Often, the shoppers can do all their shopping in one
place.
     The very large shopping centers have malls (购物街) which make shopping pleasant.
The mall is an area between stores 29 for walking. Shoppers can stroll from store
to store and enjoy beautiful fountains, statues, and plants. There are benches 30
shoppers may rest. Some shopping centers have malls with roofs that protect shoppers
from the weather outside.
  21            答案:               D
A               section
B               region
C               zone
D               district
  22            答案:               A
A               more easily
B               more easy
C               most easily
D               most easy
  23            答案:               C
A               With
B               For
C               As
D               On
  24            答案:               A
A               living
B               lived
C               live
D               lives
  25            答案:               B
A               impossible something
B               something impossible
C               possible something
D               something possible
  26            答案:               B
A               fill
B               meet
C               feed
D               reach
  27            答案:               C
A               far
B               fade
C               farther
D               feather


                                                                                  274
 28             答案:              A
A               do
B               did
C               have
D               had
  29            答案:              D
A               set out
B               set about
C               set up
D               set aside
  30            答案:              C
A               now that
B               in that
C               so that
D               such that
188             How to protect children Web fans 21 unsuitable material online
22    encouraging them to use the Internet has long been discussed in the US.
For some parents, the Internet is like a jungle (热带雨林) 23 danger for their
children. But jungles contain wonders as well as danger, and with good guides, some
education, and a few precautions, the wilds of the Internet can be safely explored.
"Kids have to be online. If we tell our kids they can't have 24 to the Internet,
we're cutting them 25 their future," said an expert.
     Most kids have started to use search engines. Many of them are great for finding
tons of interesting Internet sites, and they can also 26 places where you might
not want your kids to go. There are search engines designed just for kids. A certain
software contains only sites that have been selected as safe. The most popular way
to limit access would be to use 27 is known as a "content screener (过滤器)."But
this can't be wholly reliable, and the best thing parents can do is to 28 their
kids and let them know what is OK or not OK to see or do on the Internet. 29 way
is that mum or dad is nearby when the child is 30 the Internet.
  21            答案:              A
A               from
B               for
C               with
D               on
  22            答案:              A
A               while
B               when
C               as
D               what
  23            答案:              B
A               filling with
B               filled with
C               filling of


                                                                                  275
D              filled of
  24           答案:              B
A              assess(评价)
B              access
C              way
D              approach
  25           答案:              B
A              out of
B              off from
C              off of
D              out from
  26           答案:              B
A              track
B              locate
C              spot
D              lock
  27           答案:              B
A              that
B              what
C              which
D              as
  28           答案:              C
A              talk of
B              talk about
C              talk to
D              talk over
  29           答案:              C
A              Others
B              Other
C              Another
D              The other
  30           答案:              D
A              seeing
B              watching
C              sailing
D              surfing
189            In many businesses, computers have largely 21 paperwork because
they are fast, 22 , and do not make mistakes. And they are honest. Many banks
advertise that their transactions are "untouched by human hands" and therefore safe
from human temptation. Obviously, computers have no reason to steal money. But they
also have no conscience (良心), and the growing number of computer crimes shows they
can be used to 23 .
     Computer criminals don't use guns. And even if they are caught, it is hard to
punish them because there are no     24    and often no evidence. A computer cannot


                                                                                276
remember who used it; it simply does 25 it is told. The head teller at a New York
City bank used a computer to steal 26 one and a half million dollars in just four
years. No one noticed this   27 because he moved money from one account to another.
Each time a customer questioned the balance (余额) in his account, the teller 28
a computer error, then replaced the    29    money from someone else's account. This
man was caught only because he was a gambler. When the police      30     an illegal
gambling operation, his name was in the records.
  21           答案:               B
A              repaired
B              replaced
C              reconstructed
D              recovered
  22           答案:               A
A              flexible
B              feasible
C              changeable
D              stable
  23           答案:               B
A              stealing
B              steal
C              stolen
D              being stolen
  24           答案:               C
A              observer
B              by-stander
C              witnesses
D              suspect
  25           答案:               C
A              that
B              which
C              what
D              all
  26           答案:               D
A              rather than
B              other than
C              less than
D              more than
  27           答案:               A
A              theft
B              rubbery
C              murder
D              action
  28           答案:               B
A              acclaimed(向„„欢呼)


                                                                                 277
B              claimed
C              declared
D              announced
  29           答案:               A
A              missing
B              missed
C              to miss
D              miss
  30           答案:               D
A              broke in
B              broke out
C              broke off
D              broke up
190             People tell a story about a      21    painter who was eating at an
expensive French restaurant. When the meal was over, he 22 that he didn't have
any money, so he signed his napkin (餐巾) and handed it 23 the waiter. Was the
owner of the restaurant disappointed? Not at all. He could sell "Napkin" as a work
of art for many times the cost of the dinner.
Today, anything with a famous artist's name on it is valuable. The reason is that
so many people buy art as an investment, in order to 24 it at a higher price.
And the easiest way to determine a work's value is the       25    of the artist. But
in fact, it is the opinion of a small number of critics, art dealers, or museum
directors which is 26 .
__27 , the price of an artistic work can go up quickly. For example, in 1959, a couple
bought a painting by Jasper Johns for $900. By 1989, critical opinion had decided
that Johns was a major artist ---- and the couple sold their painting for one million
dollars. With this kind of profit, it is easy to see why big companies 28 rich
people spend a lot of money investing in art. It is also easy to see that it is the
investors, and not the artists themselves, 29 make the biggest 30 .

    21         答案:               B
A              well-knowing
B              well-known
C              good-knowing
D              good-known
    22         答案:               A
A              discovered
B              covered
C              explored
D              exploited
    23         答案:               C
A              over
B              in
C              to


                                                                                   278
D               for
  24            答案:                C
A               sell
B               buy
C               resell
D               rebuy
  25            答案:                D
A               foundation
B               production
C               population(人口)
D               reputation
  26            答案:                A
A               decisive
B               decide
C               decision
D               decided
  27            答案:                D
A               As for
B               As a sudden
C               As a matter of fact
D               As a result
  28            答案:                B
A               as well
B               as well as
C               as good
D               as good as
  29            答案:                C
A               that
B               which
C               who
D               what
  30            答案:                D
A               money
B               benefits
C               value
D               profits
191             Some kids have a hard time     21 to the new freedom that they acquire
when they leave high school and come to college. Here you are able to choose           22
or not you want to go to class. However, this responsibility comes with a great price.
If you do not go to class, you may miss an important lecture and these are very critical
when it comes time for that test that is fifty percent of your grade. With this
responsibility I have learned how to manage my time more          23 .      24     hating
every minute of school, I value it      25     a time for me to prepare for the big test.
This new schedule has also changed me in that now I       26     school is worth my time.


                                                                                      279
I do not dread(害怕)going to class. Yes, it is boring some of the time but since
I only have two to four classes a day for only four days out of the week, it is not
as     27    as high school. Also many of my courses require more in depth thinking.
As an alternative to doing worksheets and    28    simple questions, college courses
call      29   analysis and thought. Almost all of my homework now is writing papers
and reading books. These essays most often entail(包括)an examination of a subject
and what it means or what it reveals to me. Thanks to this routine, I have been able
to investigate and recognize meaning more     30    and it has helped me in my thought
process.

    21         答案:               D
A              content
B              adopt
C              finding
D              adjusting
    22         答案:               C
A              where
B              when
C              whether
D              if
    23         答案:               B
A              effective
B              efficiently
C              effort
D              affect
    24         答案:               A
A              Instead of
B              Rather than
C              Instead
D              Other than
    25         答案:               C
A              for
B              upon
C              as
D              with
    26         答案:               B
A              should like
B              feel like
C              look like
D              would like
    27         答案:               A
A              unpleasant
B              pleasant
C              enjoyable


                                                                                   280
D               misfortune
  28            答案:              C
A               answered
B               answer
C               answering
D               to answer
  29            答案:              B
A               in
B               for
C               up
D               about
  30            答案:              D
A               likely
B               prepared
C               ready
D               readily
192              I took it upon myself to observe some more 'traditional' English
classes and saw very few traces of the techniques I planned to use. I still believed
in the 21 of a student-centered, communicative approach, but I realized that it
would be a struggle to implement. My first class had been a shock, to students and
teacher, so for the next class I was more forthcoming in 22 I expected, and why.
I wasn't sure about China, but I knew in America I would be fired for forcing open
a student's mouth 23 the words fell out, so I explained that speaking English
was something only they could take responsibility 24 . Minor shocks were again
dealt when I confessed I had nothing new to teach them and that I would try to speak
as    25 as possible. This all took a little more chewing than expected, but they
seemed to swallow it and were willing to try things my way.
     Then they circled the chairs and with eager nods they listened as I introduced
the lesson. Groups were formed and tasks 26 . Any minute now 27 discussion
and debate would be in full swing. Only, once again, the classroom had fallen 28 .
Nobody wanted to say anything.
     I cancelled the following class and 29 met with each student individually
in my on-campus apartment. I was determined to get to the bottom of this. What I found
was a group of intelligent young people with all the skills to speak proper English
and none of the confidence.   30 this, I took a more nurturing tone in the classroom.
I became more of a kind-hearted coach than a teacher.

    21        答案:               B
A             effect
B             effectiveness
C             efficient
D             efficiency
    22        答案:               D
A             as


                                                                                  281
B        when
C        that
D        what
    23   答案:                C
A        since
B        while
C        until
D        after
    24   答案:                A
A        for
B        to
C        of
D        with
    25   答案:                B
A        much
B        little
C        fast
D        slow
    26   答案:                C
A        assign
B        assigning
C        assigned
D        assignment
    27   答案:                D
A        live
B        living
C        alive
D        lively
    28   答案:                C
A        silence
B        silently
C        silent
D        apart
    29   答案:                B
A        instead of
B        instead
C        therefore
D        yet
    30   答案:                A
A        Understanding
B        Understand
C        Understood
D        To understand
193      With 11 Internet   courses and three master's degrees to his credit,


                                                                          282
28-year-old Charles Sturek    21 the panic he felt during his first week of e-class.
He graduated from the State University of New York at Stony Brook in May. He said
he was 22 overwhelmed               any college freshman by the time he "arrived" at
his first online session.
"I printed out all the course materials, put them in six-ring binders," Sturek said.
In a class with few set time constraints, he struggled to understand where to "be"
at any given time.
It took a face-to-face meeting with the professor to 23 online learning. Anyway,
it's an entirely different medium with few direct connections to the chalk-and-talk
set.
It has been less than a decade 24 schools first embraced the Internet for distance
learning. Now the university is among several colleges that are preparing to take
the next big step.
Distance learning is the next big thing in education, according to Paul Edelson, Stony
Brook's dean of the School of Professional Development.
For several years he has taught graduate-level courses online.
"E-learning has many benefits 25 the physical classroom", he said. These include
a better ability to     26 students in must-participate discussions and media-rich
resource materials over the Net.
It also gives time-constrained or remotely located part-time students         27    to
college level instruction they might otherwise never have.
"It fulfills the dream for higher education of improving performance of writing and
thinking skills," Edelson said.
But 28 as established universities race ahead with online programs, many are
urging caution.
Critics 29 that dropout rates for e-classes are significantly higher than that
for face-to-face classes, in some cases 30 40 per cent.

    21        答案:              B
A             reconsiders
B             recalls
C             reviews
D             remembers
    22        答案:              A
A             as „ as
B             so „ that
C             such „ that
D             such „ as
    23        答案:              B
A             get familiar with
B             get adjusted to
C             get to know
D             get to continue
    24        答案:              C


                                                                                  283
A              because
B              due to
C              since
D              before
  25           答案:              A
A              over
B              on
C              from
D              at
  26           答案:              C
A              take
B              help
C              engage
D              encourage
  27           答案:              D
A              accident
B              accent
C              accept
D              access
  28           答案:              A
A              even
B              if
C              though
D              although
  29           答案:              C
A              point to
B              point at
C              point out
D              point for
  30           答案:              B
A              exceed
B              exceeding
C              exceeded
D              exceedingly
194                 (暂时不用,下次审题时细改)The University Library is highly
automated, and the benefits of this for readers are especially __21__.
     __22__ proving access to its own collections of printed and other information
formats, the University Library __23__ extensive support services. __24__ include
reference and enquiry services, individual and group training in the __25__ use of
information technology and other sources, interlibrary loans, library publications,
photocopying __26__ other reprographic services, and binding and conservation.
     The Main Library __27__ the principal collections and services __28__ the
humanities, social sciences, sciences and engineering. There __29__ separate
libraries, administered __30__ the Main Library, for fine arts, music, literature


                                                                                284
and early modern studies, education, law, chemical engineering, electronic and
electrical engineering, social sciences, and medicine and life sciences.
  21          答案:              A
A             evident
B             incident
C             evidence
D             incidence
  22          答案:              B
A             Except
B             In addition to
C             Beside
D             In addition
  23          答案:              C
A             takes
B             applys
C             offers
D             gives
  24          答案:              D
A             This
B             That
C             Those
D             These
  25          答案:              A
A             effective
B             affective
C             effection
D             affection
  26          答案:              B
A             end
B             and
C             or
D             either
  27          答案:              C
A             locates
B             lies
C             houses
D             is
  28          答案:              A
A             for
B             to
C             in
D             on
  29          答案:              A
A             are


                                                                           285
B               is
C               were
D               was
  30            答案:               C
A               to
B               for
C               by
D               from
195                  (暂时不用,下次审题时细改)After __21__ in a crowded bus and
waiting in the noisy airport building, I was glad to be __22__ in the plane at last.
In a few minutes now we would be asked to __23__ our seat belts and to stop smoking,
and then we would soon be __24__ in the sky on our flight to Berlin.
     But I had been __25__. Ten minutes later, instead of enjoying the __26__ of the
evening sky from high above the clouds. I was sitting in a smoke-filled room with
an airline __27__ and a police officer at my side. __28__ the table in front of me
was one of my suitcases.
     The officials were very polite. They asked me to show them my passport, my __29__,
and my baggage check. Then I was requested to open the suitcase and to spread __30__
its contents on the table.
  21            答案:               B
A               going
B               traveling
C               coming
D               catching
  22            答案:               A
A               sitting
B               standing
C               running
D               siting
  23            答案:               C
A               tighted
B               tied
C               fasten
D               fasted
  24            答案:               D
A               down
B               above
C               over
D               up
  25            答案:               B
A               mistake
B               mistaken
C               mistaked
D               mistaking


                                                                                    286
 26             答案:               A
A               beauty
B               beautiful
C               pretty
D               charming
  27            答案:               B
A               office
B               official
C               officier
D               offer
  28            答案:               C
A               In
B               over
C               on
D               above
  29            答案:               B
A               pocket
B               ticket
C               book
D               notebook
  30            答案:               C
A               up
B               down
C               out
D               off
196                 (暂时不用,下次审题时细改)A superstar __21__ is someone who has
become famous in sports, or films, or popular music, someone like Michael Jackson.
In the mid nineteen __22__, Michael Jackson made a record __23__ called Thriller.
It quickly became the most popular __24__ in the history of music, and it made Michael
Jackson a superstar. The word 'super' means something that is __25__ good. And of
course, a star means a person who is famous. So people use 'superstar'to __26__ the
top people in sports, __27__ and music.
     One of the most famous sports superstars in the United States was a boxer named
Muhammad Ali. __28__ a young man, Muhammad Ali won a gold medal in the Olympics as
a boxer. Then he became the heavy-weight boxing champion of the world. __29__ he was
known as one of the most famous boxers in sports history. Muhammad Ali claimed when
he became the world champion that he was more famous __30__ the President of the United
States. He was a true superstar. Everyone knows his name.
  21            答案:               B
A               commonly
B               usually
C               unusually
D               normal
  22            答案:               C


                                                                                    287
A        eighty
B        eighting
C        eighties
D        eight
    23   答案:           A
A        album
B        family
C        house
D        home
    24   答案:           C
A        record
B        recorder
C        recording
D        recorded
    25   答案:           A
A        extremely
B        very
C        extreme
D        much
    26   答案:           B
A        description
B        describe
C        descriptive
D        describing
    27   答案:           C
A        actor
B        act
C        acting
D        active
    28   答案:           D
A        For
B        To
C        from
D        As
    29   答案:           A
A        Before long
B        No sooner
C        Quickly
D        After that
    30   答案:           B
A        much
B        than
C        over
D        many


                           288
197                 (暂时不用,下次审题时细改)The University Library is one of the
largest __21__ libraries in the country, with a bookstore of __22__ two million
volumes. There is an active collection for all subjects __23__ are taught or
researched at postgraduate level in the University. The Library also __24__ as a
national resource center in certain subject areas.
     For __25__ research in the humanities, and in the history of the social, natural
and physical sciences, the University Library has __26__ impressive special
collections of __27__ and rare primary materials, both manuscript and printed, which
attract scholars __28__ all over the world. They are supplemented __29__ the ready
availability of microform copies of __30__ materials, the originals of which are held
in other libraries or record offices.
  21           答案:                A
A              academic
B              academicly
C              learning
D              studying
  22           答案:                B
A              any
B              some
C              many
D              much
  23           答案:                C
A              what
B              who
C              which
D              why
  24           答案:                B
A              does
B              functions
C              facting
D              fact
  25           答案:                D
A              advancing
B              developing
C              developed
D              advanced
  26           答案:                A
A              particularly
B              many
C              extreme
D              particular
  27           答案:                B
A              single
B              unique


                                                                                  289
C              specially
D              uniquely
  28           答案:               C
A              to
B              for
C              from
D              about
  29           答案:               B
A              buy
B              by
C              through
D              though
  30           答案:               A
A              similar
B              similarly
C              likely
D              like
198                 (暂时不用,下次审题时细改)Americans are proud of the medical
__21__ made in this country. Medical scientists have found cures and __22__ for many
diseases. They have learned a great deal __23__ cancer and heart disease. Many lives
have been saved. American __24__ are the most modern and best-equipped medical
facilities in the world. But this degree of __25__ has been expensive.
     Medical care in the United States __26__ expensive. There is no national health
plan for Americans. __27__ there are many programs available for the purpose. Many
people __28__ health plans at the companies where they work. __29__ these plans, the
company pays a fixed sum of money regularly into a fund. Then when the __30__ needs
medical help, he can use money from the fund to pay for it.
  21           答案:               B
A              achieve
B              achievements
C              achieving
D              achieved
  22           答案:               C
A              preventing
B              prevent
C              prevention
D              preventive
  23           答案:               A
A              about
B              round
C              some
D              by
  24           答案:               D
A              clinic


                                                                                 290
B               clinics
C               hospital
D               hospitals
  25            答案:              C
A               very good
B               excellent
C               excellence
D               goodness
  26            答案:              C
A               are
B               were
C               is
D               was
  27            答案:              A
A               But
B               And
C               Both
D               Or
  28            答案:              B
A               has
B               have
C               had
D               haven't
  29            答案:              C
A               Below
B               Above
C               Under
D               Over
  30            答案:              C
A               employ
B               employer
C               employee
D               employing
199                   Although interior design has existed since the beginning of
architecture, its development into a specialized field is really quite recent.
Interior designers have become important partly because of the many functions that
might be __21__ in a single 1arge building.
     The importance of interior design becomes __22__ when we realize how much time
we spend surrounded by four walls. Whenever we need to be in doors, we want our
surroundings to be __23__ attractive and comfortable as possible. We also expect each
place to be appropriate to its use. You would be __24__ if the inside of your bedroom
were suddenly changed to look like the inside of a restaurant. And you wouldn't feel
__25__ in a business office that has the appearance of a school.
     It soon becomes clear that the interior designer's most important basic concern


                                                                                  291
is the function of the particular __26__. For example, a theater with poor sight lines,
poor sound-shaping qualities,and __27__ few entries and exits will not work for its
purpose, no matter how beautifully it might be __28__. Nevertheless, for any kind
of space, the designer has to make many of the same kind of __29__. He or she must
coordinate the shapes, lighting and decoration of everything from ceiling to floor.
__30__, the designer must usually select furniture or design built-in furniture,
according to the functions that need to be served.
  21           答案:                B
A              consisted
B              contained
C              composed
D              comprised
  22           答案:                D
A              obscure
B              attractive
C              appropriate
D              evident
  23           答案:                B
A              so
B              as
C              thus
D              such
  24           答案:                C
A              amusing
B              interesting
C              shocked
D              frightened
  25           答案:                C
A              correct
B              proper
C              right
D              suitable
  26           答案:                D
A              circumstances
B              house
C              surroundings
D              space
  27           答案:                A
A              too
B              quite
C              a
D              far
  28           答案:                D
A              painted


                                                                                    292
B              covered
C              ornamented
D              decorated
  29           答案:               C
A              solutions
B              conclusions
C              decisions
D              determinations
  30           答案:               B
A              For
B              In addition
C              As
D              Beside
200                You may meet Americans who know very little about your country.
If this __21__ the case, be patient with them. Unfortunately, little is taught about
the cultures or customs of __22__ countries in America schools. The United States
has always been separated from older countries by the vast oceans to the East and
West of the country. As a __23__ Americans have not become so familiar with different
cultures and other ways of doing things as is often the __24__ in older countries.
If Americans try to help you __25__ something that is very familiar to you, if they
__26__ your country for another of thousands of kilometers away, be patient with them.
The United States has developed into a modern nation in a very short time __27__ with
many other countries------only about 300 years. Americans have been very busy with
growth of the country, with building roads and cities, establishing free education
for __28__ children, and making inventions, discoveries, and developments to benefit
the whole world. The Nation's attention has been on the United States, not on the
world, during most of this __29__ period. It is only since World War Two (1939-1945)
__30__ Americans have been more interested in other parts of the World.
  21           答案:               A
A              is
B              yes
C              so
D              possible
  22           答案:               A
A              other
B              these
C              those
D              all
  23           答案:               B
A              fact
B              result
C              matter
D              sample
  24           答案:               D


                                                                                   293
A              problem
B              trouble
C              cause
D              case
  25           答案:                C
A              of
B              for
C              with
D              on
  26           答案:                D
A              take
B              make
C              treat
D              mistake
  27           答案:                C
A              related
B              regarded
C              compared
D              separated
  28           答案:                D
A              million
B              million of
C              millions
D              millions of
  29           答案:                B
A              300 year
B              300-year
C              300-years
D              300 years
  30           答案:                A
A              that
B              which
C              when
D              so that
201                 It seems quite clearly unjust to pay two people different amounts
of money for doing the same work. But it is not as easy as it appeals at first __21__
to introduce equal pay for equal work.
     Two people may be working side __22__ side in a factory and doing the same work,
but one may be doing it twice as fast as the __23__; or one may be making no mistakes,
while the other is making __24__. In some kinds of work, one can solve the problem
of speed if one pays by the amount of work __25__ and not by the hour: work paid for
in this __26__ is called piece-work. But it is not always possible to do this, so
it is sometimes useful to pay workers at __27__ rates, which take differences in skill
into __28__. This usually means that the younger and therefore __29__ experienced


                                                                                   294
worker gets less than the __30__ and more experienced one, which seems reasonable
enough.
  21          答案:              B
A             chance
B             sight
C             place
D             day
  22          答案:              A
A             by
B             to
C             for
D             with
  23          答案:              C
A             work
B             two
C             other
D             others
  24          答案:              C
A             a few
B             a little
C             a lot
D             lots
  25          答案:              D
A             to do
B             doing
C             to be doing
D             to be done
  26          答案:              A
A             way
B             case
C             amount
D             money
  27          答案:              C
A             no
B             same
C             different
D             high
  28          答案:              A
A             account
B             discussion
C             attention
D             action
  29          答案:              B
A             more


                                                                              295
B              less
C              very
D              too
  30           答案:                B
A              old
B              older
C              elder
D              better
202                 There is an old saying that husbands and wives start to look and
behave like each other after a time. I don't know if this was true of my mother and
father.
     __21__ of my parents had brown hair and brown eyes and low voices. My father,
__22__, was eight years older than my mother and taller and thinner. He was built
as straight as an arrow. My mother was shorter and had a rounder and __23__ face and
she looked as soft as a pillow.
     My mother was quieter and talked __24__ than my father did. She was also a much
more patient person than my father. My father was more experienced in life. He was
__25__ to doing everything quickly. My mother, on the other hand, worked and spoke
more __26__.
     They were fond of nature and sports, such as walking, gardening and swimming.
They were both __27__ in reading and music, but my father preferred history books,
while my mother liked to read romantic novels. In music, their __28__ were similar,
and they were never proud of listening to it. Most of the time they were in agreement
on bringing __29__ their children. They both believed in giving them love and neither
one believed in punishing them physically. At times, their personalities were very
much alike, but at other times, they seemed very __30__. Perhaps that is why none
of their children knows which parent he looks or behaves like.
  21           答案:                B
A              All
B              Both
C              None
D              No
  22           答案:                C
A              but
B              and
C              however
D              though
  23           答案:                C
A              thinner
B              emptier
C              fuller
D              longer
  24           答案:                A
A              less


                                                                                  296
B              fewer
C              more
D              better
  25           答案:                A
A              used
B              led
C              devoted
D              stuck
  26           答案:                B
A              carefully
B              slowly
C              eagerly
D              anxiously
  27           答案:                C
A              fond
B              rich
C              interested
D              encouraged
  28           答案:                C
A              types
B              theories
C              tastes
D              tasks
  29           答案:                A
A              up
B              to
C              in
D              on
  30           答案:                B
A              similar
B              different
C              good
D              bad
203                (暂时不用,下次审题时细改)In most cases, the doctor is __21__
to avoid some degree of emotional involvement __22__ the sick individual who has come
to him for help.
     The physician knows well the usual development of events in a __23__ sickness,
__24__ his personal reaction to the death of the patient is a __25__ thing. It is
influenced __26__ such conditions as the duration of his relationship with the patient,
the age of the person dying, and the nature of the final disease.
     The physician is __27__ not too upset by the __28__ death of a patient who has
enjoyed a long, pleasant, and __29__ life, and he may accept calmly the death of a
person in a younger age group who's got __30__ injured. However, he is always saddened
by the death of a child, or young adult, for any reason.


                                                                                   297
    21   答案:          B
A        able
B        unable
C        can
D        enable
    22   答案:          A
A        with
B        to
C        in
D        without
    23   答案:          C
A        final
B        fata
C        fatal
D        fatalness
    24   答案:          B
A        and
B        but
C        end
D        by
    25   答案:          C
A        vary
B        very
C        variable
D        various
    26   答案:          A
A        by
B        buy
C        though
D        through
    27   答案:          B
A        commonly
B        usually
C        unusually
D        ordinary
    28   答案:          C
A        like
B        likeness
C        likely
D        alike
    29   答案:          A
A        productive
B        production
C        produce


                          298
D              producing
  30           答案:                D
A              severe
B              serious
C              serial
D              seriously
204                 Robert performs his 24-foot boat past young willow trees that stick
out of the waters of the Mississippi River. Sunlight dances off maples (枫树), their
branches heavy with __21__ spring leaves. But a closer inspection discloses trouble
behind the beautiful sight.
     Rubbish is __22__ in a log jam (阻塞) and hangs from the tree's branches.
     For the next three hours Robert and his team pull plastic bags, tanks, bottles
and even bowling pins out of the water. Then they __23__ for a picnic table caught
in the trees.
     Welcome to the Mississippi River Beautification Project, begun in 1997 as
Robert's one-man effort to pick up rubbish __24__ a 400-mile stretch of the 2340-mile
river. That year, often working alone, the 22-year-old cleaned 150 miles of shoreline.
     At first the project appeared __25__ and useless. But Robert tried his best to
find supporters, and with their backing, he soon had a new boat and a five-man __26__
---the Boom Crane Crew. Last year alone the crew pulled from the water 44055-gallon
drums, 1104 tires and enough plastic bags to __27__ a football field. Much of the
waste will be recycled.
     "Robert's operation is the only one actually in __28__ on the river," says Mark
of the Mississippi River Basin Alliance, a union of environmental groups. "It's the
biggest I have ever seen in 20 years, and he is inspiring others to do the __29__."
     "The river has given me a livelihood and brought me so much joy," Robert says,"I
wanted to do something in __30__."

    21         答案:               D
A              ripe
B              brown
C              falling
D              fresh
    22         答案:               C
A              placed
B              piled
C              trapped
D              thrown
    23         答案:               C
A              come
B              save
C              head
D              fight
    24         答案:               D


                                                                                    299
A               on
B               in
C               off
D               along
  25            答案:               C
A               large
B               happy
C               impossible
D               possible
  26            答案:               B
A               family
B               team
C               grade
D               class
  27            答案:               B
A               clean
B               cover
C               build
D               spread
  28            答案:               B
A               ending
B               progress
C               discussion
D               common
  29            答案:               C
A               deed
B               favor
C               same
D               wrong
  30            答案:               A
A               return
B               turn
C               danger
D               trouble
205                 Bedtime stories are one of the delights of early childhood. But
according to Dr. Julie Spreadbury from Queensland University, parents should not
__21__ reading to their children __22__ they enter primary school. She says listening,
reading and discussing the stories help children's __23__.
     "My __24__ indicates that once children can read by themselves, most parents stop
reading __25__ them," Dr. Spreadbury says.
     "__26__ may be at the end of year 1, which is too __27__."
     Dr. Spreadbury says __28__ reading not only gives children a good start at school,
but brings parents and children closer.
     "This makes it __29__ for them to talk to parents about things that are __30__


                                                                                    300
them, or things they are celebrating in their everyday life."
  21          答案:              C
A             speed up
B             keep up
C             give up
D             hold up
  22          答案:              A
A             after
B             until
C             if
D             unless
  23          答案:              D
A             sleeping
B             understanding
C             relaxation
D             development
  24          答案:              B
A             theory
B             research
C             story
D             decision
  25          答案:              C
A             about
B             from
C             to
D             through
  26          答案:              D
A             Some
B             Most
C             They
D             That
  27          答案:              B
A             difficult
B             early
C             much
D             informal
  28          答案:              D
A             daily
B             healthy
C             fast
D             bedtime
  29          答案:              A
A             easier
B             funnier


                                                                301
C               rarer
D               clearer
  30            答案:               C
A               reading
B               promising
C               celebrating
D               receiving
206                 Sometimes people are cheated by dress. Once,a great scholar went
to a party. As he was very simply __21__,he could not go __22__. So he returned home
and put on his __23__ clothes. He went back to the party and was __24__ a warm reception.
In the __25__ of the dinner he did not eat but was talking to his clothes.The host
came and asked what was __26__. The scholar told him what happened. Since he was
admitted only __27__ his dress,he was talking to his dress. The host __28__ about
it and asked for the pardon of the scholar. Though dress may be,to some extent(某
种程度上),__29__ to judge a person,that __30__ will not be sufficient.
  21            答案:               A
A               dressed
B               picked up
C               making up
D               put
  22            答案:               C
A               outside
B               out
C               inside
D               into
  23            答案:               B
A               own
B               best
C               cheap
D               richest
  24            答案:               C
A               rejected
B               provided
C               given
D               got
  25            答案:               D
A               sense
B               case
C               event
D               time
  26            答案:               B
A               talk
B               wrong
C               reason


                                                                                     302
D               question
  27            答案:                B
A               in spite of
B               because of
C               regardless of
D               result of
  28            答案:                A
A               regretted
B               was pleased
C               was sympathized
D               thought
  29            答案:                D
A               unnecessary
B               indispensable
C               bad
D               useful
  30            答案:                A
A               alone
B               along
C               almost
D               all
207                 "Sesame Street"(芝麻街)has been called the longest street in the
world.That is because the television program by that name can now be seen in so many
parts of the world.The program became one of __21__ biggest exports soon after it
went on the __22__ in New York in 1968.In the United States more than six million
children watch the program __23__.The viewers include more than half the nation's
preschool children from every kind of economic, racial and geographical group.
     "Sesame Street"uses songs,stories,jokes and pictures to give children a basic
__24__ of numbers,  work and human relations.Although some educators object to certain
elements in the program,parents __25__ it highly.Many teachers also consider it
a great help, though some schools found that problems arise when first graders who
have __26__ with"Sesame Street"are in the same class with children who haven't watched
the program.
     Why has "Sesame Street" been much more successful than any other children's show?
Many reasons have been suggested.People mention the __27__ theories of its creators,
the support by both government and private business,and the skillful use of a variety
of TV tricks.__28__ an equally important reason is that mothers watch"Sesame Street"
__29__ their children.This is partly because top adult stars often appear on it.But
the main reason may be that it __30__ every child watching it feel able to learn,
and he wants to learn more.
  21            答案:                A
A               America's
B               its
C               children's


                                                                                  303
D        adult's
    22   答案:             B
A        way
B        air
C        radio
D        broadcast
    23   答案:             B
A        in time
B        regularly
C        on time
D        occasionally
    24   答案:             C
A        rule
B        opinion
C        understanding
D        fact
    25   答案:             B
A        1ike
B        praise
C        enjoy
D        think
    26   答案:             C
A        come
B        1earnt about
C        grown up
D        been
    27   答案:             A
A        educational
B        different
C        rejected
D        useful
    28   答案:             D
A        Especially
B        Sometimes
C        However
D        Perhaps
    29   答案:             B
A        instead of
B        along with
C        more than
D        in spite Of
    30   答案:             C
A        trains
B        causes


                             304
C              makes
D              leads
208                 Many people of my generation say that there is no hope for the
future because of the way that young people behave today.
     Their first argument is that when we were __21__ we used to look after the older
people in our community and help them.They also say that young people today don't
care about anything or anyone. __22__,I think the reason why we looked after older
                                People had to live with their parents and grandparents
people was that we had no __23__.
because they had no money.Young people today earn more and have more freedom to live
where they want.              I
                __24__ this, think that they are still interested in older people. For
example,young people often __25__ to help me when I get on and off the bus with heavy
shopping.
     Their second argument is that in our day we didn't __26__ to be given jobs, and
that young people now don't look for jobs,but just complain about unemployment.On
the other hand,things were easier in the past and it was always easy to get a job
__27__ you had friends and contacts.It is really harder today.Young people complain
about unemployment and I think they have __28__ reason to complain.
     In conclusion I think there is __29__ for the future.This generation,like
generations before them,has new __30__ as well as old problems.If they learn from
our mistake,the world will be a better place in future.
  21           答案:                B
A              ignorant
B              young
C              childish
D              innocent
  22           答案:                D
A              Moreover
B              Meanwhile
C              Therefore
D              However
  23           答案:                C
A              trouble
B              concept
C              choice
D              perception
  24           答案:                B
A              In addition to
B              In spite of
C              Due to
D              As for
  25           答案:                A
A              offer
B              hesitate
C              refuse


                                                                                   305
D              mean
  26           答案:               D
A              prepare
B              regret
C              decline
D              expect
  27           答案:               B
A              unless
B              if
C              until
D              because
  28           答案:               A
A              every
B              no
C              this
D              another
  29           答案:               C
A              possibility
B              feasibility
C              hope
D              result
  30           答案:               D
A              events
B              questions
C              hobbies
D              opportunities
209                Anna arrived too early.Usually she left things to the last minute,
__21__ today was a very special occasion. It was almost __22__ she could make the
plane __23__ sooner that she got there an hour beforehand.Thoughts raced __24__ her
mind."Do I look all right? Will he notice that I'm wearing a new trouser suit? Will
he even __25__ me?" After all,it was a year since she had last seen Joe.She took
a mirror out of her handbag and inspected her face.Too much make-up? Joe had __26__
made any comment but she knew that he did not approve of heavy make up ---- "gilding
the lily"(画蛇添足)      ,he __27__ it.It was funny how much importance she attached
to __28__ a good impression on him.After all,friends do not judge each other by
__29__. All the same,it was the first meeting after a long __30__,and she wanted
everything to go off right.
  21           答案:               B
A              and
B              but
C              for
D              as
  22           答案:               C
A              because


                                                                                 306
B        where
C        as if
D        when
    23   答案:                D
A        leave
B        take off
C        arrived
D        arrive
    24   答案:                C
A        on
B        at
C        through
D        down
    25   答案:                B
A        talk
B        recognize
C        hear
D        tell
    26   答案:                A
A        never
B        almost
C        often
D        regularly
    27   答案:                B
A        told
B        called
C        saw
D        thought
    28   答案:                D
A        offering
B        taking
C        having
D        making
    29   答案:                A
A        appearance
B        clothes
C        make-up
D        head
    30   答案:                C
A        department
B        conclusion
C        separation
D        decision
210            I do a lot   of management training each year for the Circle K


                                                                          307
Company.Among the topics we discuss in our classes is __21__ the quality employees(高
级雇员).
     "What has caused you to stay long enough to become a manager?" I asked.After
a while a new manager took the __22__ and said slowly,"It was a baseball glove."
     Cynthia said she used to take a Circle K clerk job as an interim(临时的)one while
she looked for something __23__.On her second day behind the counter,she received
a(n) __24__ from her nine-year-old son,Jessie.He __25__ a baseball glove for the
little League.She __26__ that as a single mother, money was tight, and her first
check would have to go for paying bills.
     When Cynthia arrived for work the next morning,Patricia,the store manager asked
her to come to her small office and handed her a box."I overheard you talking to
your son yesterday," she said."And I know that it is __27__ to explain things to
kids.This is a baseball glove for Jessie.I know you have to pay bills __28__ you
can buy gloves.You know we can't pay good people like you as much as we would like
to;but we do __29__ and I want you to know how important you are to us."
     Cynthia's story shows vividly that people __30__ more how much a manager cares
than how much he pays.
  21           答案:                C
A               employing
B               praising
C               keeping
D               improving
  22           答案:                C
A               position
B              decision
C               question
D               advice
  23           答案:                C
A               1ighter
B               easier
C               better
D               higher
  24           答案:                B
A               1etter
B               call
C               answer
D               email
  25           答案:                C
A               bought
B               kept
C               needed
D               offered
  26           答案:                B
A               complained


                                                                                 308
B               explained
C               understood
D               admitted
  27            答案:               B
A               easy
B               hard
C               simple
D               nice
  28            答案:               D
A               after
B               until
C               when
D               before
  29            答案:               D
A               regret
B               agree
C               worry
D               care
  30            答案:               A
A               remember
B               refuse
C               thank
D               realize
211             Dear Dio,
     Thank you for your note. I like your __21__ between death and failure.I had not
thought of these two in the same way that you describe.I thank you for bringing this
to my attention.
     Your insights are very deep __22__ you say," death is only an end but failure
can change someone's whole life."Yes,death is final.Failure is temporary.Death
leaves us with nothing.But failure can leave us with lessons which will __23__ our
lives.
     I hope that your failure to pass that terrible English test will help you __24__
it will hurt you.                                                                   It
                 Please remember that it is not being __25__ down, that is important.
is the inability to get up that counts.You will have to learn to get up,and to get
going.Failure is the "staying down".It is not the "falling down".
     From reading your letter, I __26__ your English to be very good.You write better
than some of my American friends.I do not know the reason for __27__ your English
test.Maybe you were distracted that day.It is __28__ that persons are judged on
the basis of a single test.
     You write well , you __29__ your feelings with excellence , and you think
deeply.These characteristics should help you move toward a bright career. Just don't
let yourself "stay down".Get up and let them all know that you are talented and you
are __30__ to succeed.I think you will.
     With best wishes for a fine career.


                                                                                   309
Bob
  21   答案:          B
A      idea
B      comparison
C      thought
D      reason
  22   答案:          D
A      which
B      when
C      what
D      as
  23   答案:          B
A      increase
B      improve
C      honor
D      treasure
  24   答案:          C
A      as good as
B      as well as
C      more than
D      much than
  25   答案:          C
A      fallen
B      stayed
C      knocked
D      felt
  26   答案:          A
A      judge
B      accept
C      prefer
D      expect
  27   答案:          D
A      succeeding
B      passing
C      finishing
D      failing
  28   答案:          C
A      1ikely
B      reasonable
C      a shame
D      fair
  29   答案:          B
A      find


                        310
B              express
C              speak
D              tell
  30           答案:               B
A              devoted
B              determined
C              engaged
D              supposed
212                When you discuss about eating out with your friend,first of all,
you must make it clear who will pay for the meal. If somebody suggests __21__ lunch
with his friend,he might simply say something like this:"I'm sorry, it'll have to
be some place __22__,as I have little money."The other person may say:"Ok.I'll
meet you at McDonald's." This means he has agreed __23__ the two will go Dutch(各
付各款),that is,each person pays __24__ himself.He may say,"Oh no. I want to take
you __25__ lunch at Johnson's." This means the person is to pay the bill for both
of them.
     If the other person is pleased with the invitation,there is no reason why he
shouldn't __26__ it by __27__ "Thank you".
     American customs are much the same __28__ those in other parts of the
world.American women used to expect men to pay for all the meals.But today,some
of them don't. __29__,if a woman is asked to attend a dinner or a dance outside,
the invitation itself means "Come __30__ my guest".So,as you see,it is a polite
thing to make the situation clear at the very beginning.
  21           答案:               C
A              have
B              to have
C              having
D              had
  22           答案:               B
A              nearby
B              cheap
C              nice
D              expensive
  23           答案:               C
A              with
B              to
C              that
D              where
  24           答案:               A
A              for
B              by
C              with
D              to
  25           答案:               C


                                                                               311
A               for
B               at
C               to
D               with
  26            答案:               B
A               refuse
B               accept
C               receive
D               take
  27            答案:               B
A               speech
B               saying
C               say
D               answer
  28            答案:               C
A               to
B               of
C               as
D               from
  29            答案:               B
A               But
B               However
C               When
D               So
  30            答案:               D
A               to
B               for
C               1ike
D               as
213                 In January 2002, during the first weeks of a six-month stay at the
Children's Hospital of Philadelphia for leukemia(白血病)treatment,Michael wandered
over to his hospital window in search of distraction(散心).The __21__ first 一 grader
watched a construction crew working on a 10 一 storey addition to the hospital.__22__
Michael's third-floor window, Ritehie,an iron-worker from the East Falls section
of Philadelphia,looked up and saw " this kid with no hair __23__ face was pressed
up to the window." I waved,and he smiled and waved back.I'll never forget that,
"says Ritchie,a father of three.
     As winter __24__ spring,Michael watched,fascinated,as 3,000 tons of steel
gradually formed the skeleton(框架)of the building.One day he colored a message
for the crew and held __25__ up to the window:"Hi,Local Iron Workers.I'm Mike."
Ritchie and the repair crew messaged back.Over the __26__ months,as his treatment
continued,Ritchie and the crew cheered Michael up and cheered him with __27__ signs
like "Be Strong! Mike".
     Before the construction reached the third floor,Ritchie jumped across the __28__


                                                                                  312
between the buildings and the two had a face-to-face chat.The hard hat with the tender
heart wells up (涌出眼泪)when he thinks about it."Michael __29__ my life,"says
Ritchie."I was a real hard-core(铁石心肠的)person without a lot of sympathy.But
I'd look forward to seeing this kid every day waving at me and excited about the
construction.I look at life __30__ thanks to him."Today Michael is a 10 year-old
third-grader in complete recovery."What does he hope to be when he grows up? A
construction worker," he says.
  21           答案:                B
A              strange
B              curious
C              serious
D              anxious
  22           答案:                A
A              Below
B              Above
C              Under
D              Over
  23           答案:                B
A              whom
B              whose
C              which
D              that
  24           答案:                D
A              went off
B              went out
C              turned into
D              turned to
  25           答案:                C
A              that
B              it
C              one
D              itself
  26           答案:                D
A              first
B              1ast
C              1ong
D              next
  27           答案:                B
A              discouraging
B              encouraging
C              surprising
D              interesting
  28           答案:                C
A              ground


                                                                                   313
B               floor
C               space
D               story
  29            答案:               B
A               gave
B               changed
C               saved
D               took
  30            答案:               A
A               differently
B               happily
C               sadly
D               excitedly
214                 In the company in which I work,each of us is afraid of at least
one person.The lower your __21__ is,the more people you are afraid of. But all the
people are afraid of the twelve men at the top who helped __22__ and build the company
and now own and direct it.
     All these twelve men are __23__ now and drained(耗尽)by time and success of energy
and ambition.Many have spent their whole lives here.They seem friendly, slow and
__24__ when I come upon them in the halls and always courteous(谦恭的)when they ride
with others in the public lifts.They __25__ work hard.They hold meetings,make
promotions(推销活动),and allow their names to be used on announcements that are
prepared and issued(发布)by somebody else.Nobody is sure __26__ really runs the
company, but the company does run.
     In the normal course of a business day I am afraid of Jack Green because my
department is part of his department and Jack Green is my __27__:Green is afraid
of me because most of the work in my department is done for the Sales Department,
which is more important than his department.
     Green distrusts me sometimes.He makes __28__ clear to me every now and then that
he wishes to see everything coming out of my department before it's shown to other
departments.I know he doesn't really mean this.He is __29__ busy with his own work
to pay that much attention to all of mine,and I'll bypass(避开)him on most of our
assignments rather than take up his time and delay their __30__ to people who have
an immediate need for them.
  21            答案:               A
A               position
B               pay
C               salary
D               office
  22            答案:               B
A               find
B               found
C               set
D               buy


                                                                                  314
 23           答案:               C
A             honest
B             tired
C             elderly
D             young
  24          答案:               C
A             strict
B             responsible
C             content
D             honest
  25          答案:               B
A             no more
B             no longer
C             no less
D             no shorter
  26          答案:               B
A             whom
B             who
C             that
D             which
  27          答案:               C
A             father
B             teacher
C             boss
D             workmate
  28          答案:               B
A             that
B             it
C             this
D             him
  29          答案:               A
A             too
B             very
C             quite
D             greatly
  30          答案:               B
A             production
B             delivery
C             value
D             time
215               One day a customs officer managed to get some fresh mushrooms(磨
菇). He was so __21__ what he had bought that he offered to __22__ the mushrooms with
his brother officers. When their breakfast arrived __23__, each officer found some
mushrooms on his plate.


                                                                                 315
     "Let the dog __24__ a piece first." suggested one __25__ officer who was afraid
that the mushrooms __26__ be poisonous.
     The dog seemed to __27__ his mushroom, and the officers then dared to eat their
breakfast, saying that the mushrooms had a very strange __28__ quite pleasant taste.
     An hour __29__, however, they were all astonished __30__ the gardener came in
and said seriously that the dog was dead. Immediately, the officers jumped into their
cars and rushed to the nearest hospital. Pumps(清胃器) were used and the officers
had a very hard time getting rid of the mushrooms that remained in their stomachs.
  21           答案:               C
A              sure of
B              cared about
C              pleased with
D              disappointed with
  22           答案:               A
A              share
B              cut
C              wash
D              cook
  23           答案:               B
A              tomorrow
B              the next day
C              the later day
D              next day
  24           答案:               C
A              check
B              smell
C              try
D              examine
  25           答案:               D
A              frightened
B              shy
C              conservative
D              careful
  26           答案:               C
A              must
B              should
C              might
D              may
  27           答案:               D
A              dislike
B              hate
C              want
D              enjoy
  28           答案:               B


                                                                                  316
A               then
B               but
C               and
D               or
  29           答案:               A
A               later
B               after
C              past
D               over
  30           答案:               D
A               until
B               while
C               before
D               when
216                 From the earliest time it was well __21__ to the Peruvians (秘
鲁人) that when a cut __22__ made in the thick skin of a __23__ tree, a white liquid
like milk came __24__. From this liquid a sticky mass of rubber might be made. This
rubber is __25__ and wax-like when warm so that it is difficult to give any form.
     The Peruvians made the discovery that it is very good for __26__ out water. Then
in the early period of the century they made overshoes to keep their feet dry.
     Then a certain Mr. Mackintosh developed selling coats of cloth which were lined
__27__ rubber. Today Mackintosh raincoats are still __28__ after him.
     But these first rubber shoes __29__ raincoat were unpleasantly soft and sticky
in __30__. They were also stiff and very cold in water. They were like wax although
they felt a bit stronger.
  21           答案:               B
A              seen
B               known
C               talked
D               heard
  22           答案:               A
A               was
B               has
C               will
D               is
  23           答案:               C
A               orange
B               apple
C              rubber
D               oak
  24           答案:               B
A               from
B               out
C               up


                                                                                  317
D               through
  25            答案:               A
A               soft
B               hard
C               stiff
D               tough
  26            答案:               C
A               sinking
B               finding
C               keeping
D               pouring
  27            答案:               D
A               of
B               in
C               up
D               with
  28            答案:               B
A               produced
B               named
C               sold
D               made
  29            答案:               C
A               or
B               but
C               and
D               so
  30            答案:               A
A               summer
B               March
C               1918
D               winter
217                 Since his retirement, one day was just like any other day for John
Smith. He woke __21__ precisely at 5:35 a.m.. He went downstairs __22__ his pajamas
(睡衣裤)at six o'clock and poured __23__ a cup of hot coffee from the pot which his
wife, Mary, had filled and plugged in (给......通上电源)some fifteen minutes __24__.
He reached for the newspaper as he __25__ the cup to his lips.
     This day was different.
     It was terrible! He dropped the newspaper and cup. With closed eyes, he swallowed
and began to shout: "Mary!". Mrs. Smith was __26__ hearing her husband say much of
anything. In fact for the past few days, he had hardly paid any attention at all to
many of her important questions. She rushed back the kitchen.
     "John, what is the matter? Oh, __27__ coffee all over yourself and the newspaper."
     She was shocked __28__ her husband's behavior. She wondered what he had read that
may have upset him so much. He was not amused __29__ her innocent expression. The


                                                                                    318
coffee was terrible. It was __30__ to drink. She must have purchased a new kind of
coffee at the market.
  21          答案:               B
A             from
B             up
C             on
D             in
  22          答案:               B
A             with
B             in
C             wore
D             dressed
  23          答案:               D
A             for her
B             for him
C             herself
D             himself
  24          答案:               A
A             earlier
B             ago
C             early
D             advance
  25          答案:               A
A             raised
B             rose
C             raising
D             rising
  26          答案:               D
A             unused
B             unused of
C             unaccustomed
D             unaccustomed to
  27          答案:               B
A             your spilling
B             you've spilled
C             you're pouring
D             you're spreading
  28          答案:               D
A             for
B             in
C             on
D             by
  29          答案:               C
A             to


                                                                               319
B              for
C              at
D              about
  30           答案:               C
A              too worse
B              so bad
C              too bitter
D              so bitter
218                The United States has been called a "nation of immigrants" (移
民) . Indeed, __21__ the American Indians, all Americans are immigrants or the
descendants of immigrants. All have come from other places __22__ the last 400 years
一 a short period in historic __23__.
     Americans have come from every part of the earth; all but the blacks came
__24__.Some came to __25__ punishment, religious or political. Others came to __26__
from extreme poverty and to find a better life for themselves and their children.
Some were refugees (难民) __27__ a new home. A few others were looking for adventure
or for wealth. __28__ the blacks, they were forcibly brought here as slaves.
     During their tragic and shameful __29__ of our history, Americans were not the
only ones involved; many non-Americans were also __30__ in the slave trade.
  21           答案:               C
A              away from
B              far from
C              except
D              along with
  22           答案:               D
A              for
B              since
C              until
D              within
  23           答案:               A
A              terms
B              phrases
C              idioms
D              expressions
  24           答案:               C
A              actively
B              effectively
C              willingly
D              precisely
  25           答案:               D
A              stand
B              face
C              require
D              escape


                                                                                 320
 26             答案:               A
A               get away
B               break away
C               get over
D               break down
  27            答案:               B
A               in honor of
B               in search of
C               in favor of
D               in charge of
  28            答案:               A
A               As for
B               As usual
C               As well
D               As follows
  29            答案:               A
A               page
B               piece
C               lesson
D               age
  30            答案:               A
A               active
B               direct
C               accurate
D               successful
219                 Loneliness lasting between a few minutes and a few hours is not
serious, as most people feel lonely sometimes. But some people keep feeling lonely
for years, why? It's said that there are three different __21__ of loneliness. The
first kind of loneliness is temporary, which is the most __22__ type. The second kind
is situational loneliness, which is a natural __23__ of a particular situation.
Physical problems __24__ it can cause, and it does last less than a year. The third
is chronic(长期的) loneliness, the most __25__ of all. The reason why to say so
is __26__ this kind of loneliness lasts more than two years without any specific cause.
Thanks to socializing difficulty, the chronically lonely people may think __27__
hopeless to improve their condition.
     We depend on various people for different reasons. __28__ social contacts makes
people lonely; as psychologists have found. But those who have already had many social
contacts too are __29__ for more. They wonder their popularity. While temporary and
situational loneliness can be a __30__ and healthy part of life, psychologists are
trying to find ways to help habitually lonely people who are facing the danger of
serious illness.
  21            答案:               D
A               manners
B               methods


                                                                                    321
C        styles
D        types
    22   答案:          A
A        common
B        routine
C        average
D        regular
    23   答案:          A
A        result
B        appearance
C        judgment
D        experience
    24   答案:          C
A        although
B        since
C        as
D        because of
    25   答案:          D
A        efficient
B        important
C        essential
D        severe
    26   答案:          B
A        because
B        that
C        what
D        which
    27   答案:          D
A        that
B        which
C        this
D        it
    28   答案:          B
A        Offering
B        Lacking
C        Enjoying
D        Grasping
    29   答案:          D
A        increasing
B        requiring
C        granting
D        longing
    30   答案:          B
A        capable


                          322
B               normal
C               superior
D               favorite
220                 My wife and I have always enjoyed travelling by sea, and last year
we decided to go __21__ a trip on the Mediterranean Sea. Though our holiday was rather
__22__ we thought that the high standard of accommodation(住宿), the first class
food and many interesting places we saw were well worth the price we paid.
     We found that most of the other passengers were friendly and interesting, but
there was __23__ man, a Mr. Jamis, who annoyed us and not just us but all the others
who shared our table dinner. __24__ subject we talked about, it seemed that he was
an expert at it. He had, __25__, read more books, visited more countries and studied
more languages than anyone else on board the ship.
     After a few days, we ate our meals in __26__, because nobody wanted to begin a
conversation that would soon be taken __27__ by this man.
     Then my wife had an idea. Fortunately, the ship had a library, and she suggested
that we __28__ an unusual subject, look it up in an encyclopedia and then talk about
it at dinner. If it were unusual enough, Mr. James could not possibly know anything
about it. The subject we chose was "English Agriculture in the Eleventh Century".
At dinner that night we discussed this subject with great __29__. Mr. James was silent,
we realized we had at last managed to find something he knew __30__ about.
  21            答案:               B
A               for
B               on
C               in
D               with
  22            答案:               B
A               costing
B               expensive
C               luxurious
D               economical
  23            答案:               D
A               the
B               certain
C               that
D               one
  24            答案:               B
A               What
B               Whatever
C               Any
D               Another
  25            答案:               A
A               apparently
B               actually
C               really


                                                                                    323
D              naturally
  26           答案:               C
A              quiet
B              group
C              silence
D              politeness
  27           答案:               B
A              out
B              up
C              in
D              through
  28           答案:               A
A              should think
B              would think
C              could think
D              must think
  29           答案:               B
A              warmth
B              enthusiasm
C              anxiety
D              feeling
  30           答案:               D
A              a lot
B              least
C              much
D              little
221                 The first and smallest unit that can be discussed in relation to
language is the word. In speaking, the choice of words is __21__ the utmost importance.
Proper selection will eliminate one source of __22__ breakdown in the communication
cycle. Too often, careless use of words __23__ a meeting of the minds of the speaker
and listener. The words used by the speaker may __24__ unfavorable reactions in the
listener __25__ interfere with his comprehension; hence, the transmission reception
system breaks down.
     __26__, inaccurate or indefinite words may make __27__ difficult for the listener
to understand the __28__ which is being transmitted to him. The speaker who does not
have specific words in his working vocabulary may be __29__ to explain or describe
in a __30__ that can be understood by his listener.
  21           答案:               A
A              of
B              at
C              for
D              on
  22           答案:               C
A              inaccessible


                                                                                    324
B        timely
C        likely
D        invalid
    23   答案:              B
A        encourage
B        prevents
C        destroys
D        offers
    24   答案:              D
A        pass out
B        take away
C        back up
D        stir up
    25   答案:              C
A        who
B        as
C        which
D        what
    26   答案:              A
A        Moreover
B        However
C        Preliminarily
D        Unexpectedly
    27   答案:              B
A        that
B        it
C        so
D        this
    28   答案:              C
A        speech
B        sense
C        message
D        meaning
    29   答案:              D
A        obscure
B        difficult
C        impossible
D        unable
    30   答案:              D
A        case
B        means
C        method
D        way
222                Sleep is divided into periods of so-called REM sleep,


                                                                     325
characterized by rapid eye movement and dreaming, and longer periods of non-REM sleep.
__21__ sleep is at all well-understood, but REM sleep is __22__ to serve some
restorative(恢复健康作用的)function of the brain. The purpose of non-REM sleep is
even more __23__. The new experiments, such as those __24__ for the first time at
a recent meeting of the Society for Sleep Research in Minneapolis, suggests
fascinating explanations __25__ of non-REM sleep.
     For example, it has long been known that the total sleep __26__ is 100 percent
fatal to rats, yet, __27__ examination of the dead bodies, the animals look completely
normal, A researcher has now __28__ the mystery of why the animal die. The rats __29__
bacterial infections of the blood, __30__ their immune ( 免 疫 的 ) system - the
self-protecting mechanism against disease-have crashed.
  21           答案:               B
A              Either
B              Neither
C              Each
D              Any
  22           答案:               C
A              intended
B              required
C              assumed
D              inferred
  23           答案:               C
A              subtle
B              obvious
C              mysterious
D              doubtful
  24           答案:               B
A              maintained
B              described
C              settled
D              afforded
  25           答案:               D
A              in the light
B              by virtue
C              with the exception
D              for the purpose
  26           答案:               C
A              reduction
B              destruction
C              deprivation
D              restriction
  27           答案:               A
A              upon
B              by


                                                                                   326
C               through
D               with
  28            答案:               D
A               paid attention to
B               caught sight of
C               laid emphasis on
D               cast light on
  29            答案:               A
A               develop
B               produce
C               stimulate
D               induce
  30            答案:               B
A               if
B               as if
C               only if
D               if only
223                    Manpower Inc, with 560,000 workers, is the world's largest
temporary employment agency. Every morning, its people __21__ into the offices and
factories of American, seeking a day's work for a day's pay.
     One day at a time, __22__ industrial giants(工业巨头) like General Motors and
IBM struggle to survive __23__ reducing the number of employees, Manpower, based in
Milwaukee, Wisconsin, is booming(兴旺).
     __24__ its economy continues to recover, the U.S. is increasingly becoming a
nation of part-timers and temporary workers. This "__25__" work force is the most
important __26__ in American business today, and it is __27__ changing the
relationship between people and their jobs. The phenomenon provides a way for
companies to remain globally competitive __28__ avoiding market cycles and the
growing burdens __29__ by employment rules, healthcare costs and pension plans. For
workers it can mean an end to the security, benefits and sense of __30__ that came
from being a loyal employee.
  21            答案:               A
A               swarm
B               stride
C               separate
D               slip
  22            答案:               C
A               for
B               because
C               as
D               since
  23            答案:               D
A               from
B               in


                                                                                327
C              on
D              by
  24           答案:              A
A              Even though
B              Now that
C              If only
D              Provided that
  25           答案:              B
A              durable
B              disposable
C              available
D              transferable
  26           答案:              D
A              approach
B              flow
C              fashion
D              trend
  27           答案:              C
A              instantly
B              reversely
C              fundamentally
D              sufficiently
  28           答案:              B
A              but
B              while
C              and
D              whereas
  29           答案:              A
A              imposed
B              restricted
C              illustrated
D              confined
  30           答案:              D
A              excitement
B              conviction
C              enthusiasm
D              importance
224                John went into the small shop and saw a young man talking to the
clerk. "How many roses can I get for six dollars, ma'am?" the boy asked. The clerk
was trying to __21__ that roses were expensive. Maybe the young man would be happy
__22__ carnations(康乃馨).
     "No. I have to have roses," he said. "My Mom was __23__ so much last year and
I didn't get to spend much time with her. I want to get something __24__. It has to
be red roses, because that's her __25__."


                                                                                328
     Something inside of John was __26__ by the boy's voice. John had been blessed
in his business, and he looked at the clerk and silently mouthed that he would __27__
for the boy's roses.
     John ordered his own flowers and __28__. As he drove away from the shop, he caught
a light about two blocks from the shop. As he waited at the __29__, he saw the young
man walking down the sidewalk. He watched him cross the street and __30__ a park
through two huge gates. Suddenly, he realized it wasn't a park. It was a cemetery
(墓地). He could see the young man turn there by gate and walk along the fence.
  21           答案:                A
A              explain
B              expect
C              excuse
D              sell
  22           答案:                A
A              with
B              without
C              on
D              from
  23           答案:                B
A              bad
B              sick
C              patient
D              weak
  24           答案:                B
A              nice
B              special
C              good
D              useful
  25           答案:                B
A              glad
B              favorite
C              love
D              like
  26           答案:                B
A              excited
B              motivated
C              cried
D              touched
  27           答案:                D
A              take
B              buy
C              give
D              pay
  28           答案:                C


                                                                                    329
A              got off
B              stayed in
C              went out
D              took off
  29           答案:               C
A              car
B              him
C              light
D              shop
  30           答案:               A
A              enter
B              near
C              ran
D              drove
225                (二校时老师将其改为 C,但 C 无完型,只有选词)What do you do at
the weekend? Some __21__ like to stay at home, but __22__ like to go for a walk or
play football. My friend Jack works __23__ a factory during the week. At the weekend
he __24__ the same thing. On Saturday he __25__ his car and on Sunday he goes with
his family to a village __26__ the country. His uncle and aunt have a farm there.
It isn't __27__ but __28__ so much to do on a farm. The children help with the animals
and give __29__ food. Jack and his wife help in the fields. At the end of the day,
they __30__ hungry and Jack's aunt gives them a big meal.
  21           答案:               C
A              one
B              ones
C              people
D              peoples
  22           答案:               C
A              another
B              other
C              others
D              other ones
  23           答案:               A
A              hard in
B              hardly in
C              hard on
D              hardly on
  24           答案:               D
A              makes always
B              does always
C              always makes
D              always does
  25           答案:               C
A              wash


                                                                                   330
B              watch
C              washes
D              watches
  26           答案:               C
A              into
B              on
C              in
D              at
  27           答案:               D
A              a big
B              one big
C              big one
D              a big one
  28           答案:               B
A              it's always
B              there's always
C              always it's
D              always there's
  29           答案:               D
A              it his
B              it its
C              them its
D              them their
  30           答案:               D
A              all were
B              were all
C              all are
D              are all
226                (二校时老师将其改为 C,但 C 无完型,只有选词)Mrs. Jackson is an
old woman who has a small room __21__ an old house. She __22__ there since 1974. That
was the year when her husband __23__. He had been ill __24__ many years. After his
death Mrs. Jackson had __25__ money at all. She found work in a factory. Her job was
to clean the offices. She __26__ get up at 5 o'clock __27__ the morning. Last year
she was ill and her doctor said: "__28__ work so hard." Now Mrs. Jackson sells
newspaper __29__ a big shop in the middle of town. She __30__ doesn't have much money
but she is happier now.
  21           答案:               A
A              in
B              on
C              from
D              of
  22           答案:               D
A              is living
B              lives


                                                                                  331
C             lived
D             has lived
  23          答案:               A
A             died
B             has died
C             dead
D             was dead
  24          答案:               B
A             since
B             for
C             in
D             during
  25          答案:               C
A             none
B             any
C             no
D             not
  26          答案:               C
A             must
B             must to
C             had to
D             has to
  27          答案:               C
A             of
B             at
C             in
D             on
  28          答案:               C
A             You haven't
B             Not
C             Don't
D             Better not
  29          答案:               A
A             outside
B             without
C             in front
D             out of
  30          答案:               B
A             always
B             still
C             yet
D             already
227               (二校时老师将其改为 C, C 无完型,    但            只有选词)     Brickton is a little
village __21__ from Manchester. When people __22__ to go to Manchester, they usually


                                                                                  332
go __23__ train. It takes about __24__. A lot of people live in Brickton but __25__
jobs are in Manchester. In Manchester there are __26__ cinemas than in Brickton.
People there are not very __27__ cinemas but if they want to see films, they can often
see __28__ on television. Brickton is __29__ Manchester and so the people here __30__
use their cars so often.
  21           答案:               A
A              not far
B              not long
C              not near
D              not away
  22           答案:               B
A              went
B              want
C              wanted
D              wants
  23           答案:               A
A              by
B              in
C              on
D              with
  24           答案:               B
A              an half hour
B              half an hour
C              half hour
D              half a hour
  25           答案:               B
A              its
B              their
C              it's
D              the
  26           答案:               B
A              many
B              more
C              any
D              most
  27           答案:               C
A              interested on
B              interesting on
C              interested in
D              interesting in
  28           答案:               D
A              some old
B              olds
C              old one


                                                                                   333
D              old ones
    29         答案:             D
A              more small that
B              more small than
C              smaller that
D              smaller than
    30         答案:             A
A              don't need to
B              aren't
C              don't must
D              mustn't
228
Wednesday, 24 September
Dear Sally,
    Thank you very much for your letter. I am __21__ that you have had such bad weather.
Perhaps it will be better when the spring __22__. We have had good weather. __23__
week it was very hot and on Sunday I __24__ the garden all day. Now it is 8 o'clock
__25__ but I __26__ outside to write this letter.
    Yesterday I went to the cinema. The film __27__ "Red River". It was about a place
in the south of England __28__ the river became red, but __29__ was able to explain
it. Then a journalist came and found a company __30__ some chemicals into the river.
The film wasn't very good.
    I hope you are very well.

Yours,
                                                                                  Jimmy
    21         答案:                B
A              sadly
B              sorry
C              unpleasant
D              unhappily
    22         答案:                D
A              is coming
B              will come
C              is going to come
D              comes round
    23         答案:                D
A              The last
B              In the last
C              On the last
D              Last
    24         答案:                A
A              was in
B              have been in


                                                                                     334
C              was on
D              have been on
  25           答案:               B
A              in the afternoon
B              in the evening
C              on the afternoon
D              on the evening
  26           答案:               B
A              am sitting still
B              am still sitting
C              sit still
D              still sit
  27           答案:               D
A              was calling
B              has called
C              called
D              was called
  28           答案:               A
A              where
B              there
C              in that
D              from which
  29           答案:               C
A              none
B              no people
C              nobody
D              no person
  30           答案:               A
A              had thrown
B              was thrown
C              did throw
D              throwing
229                (二校时老师将其改为 C,但 C 无完型,只有选词)I am 30 years old.
I __21__ born in 1960 in a town in the west of England. I __22__there all my life,
but I usually __23__ my holidays in London. My town is not __24__ it in 1960 or 1965.
In those days we __25__ walk from one side to __26__ in about fifteen minutes. There
__27__ two schools but __28__ big factories. Then in 1968 they built two factories
and a lot of new people came to our town. __29__ factories are very big and I now
have a job in one of __30__.
  21           答案:               C
A              am
B              have
C              was
D              were


                                                                                  335
    22   答案:             B
A        am living
B        have lived
C        lived
D        live
    23   答案:             B
A        am spending
B        spend
C        am passing
D        pass
    24   答案:             C
A        same as
B        same that
C        the same as
D        the same that
    25   答案:             B
A        can
B        could
C        was able to
D        were able
    26   答案:             B
A        another
B        the other
C        other
D        one other
    27   答案:             D
A        have been
B        has been
C        was
D        were
    28   答案:             A
A        no
B        not any
C        none
D        not
    29   答案:             C
A        All the
B        The all
C        Both the
D        The both
    30   答案:             B
A        they
B        them
C        their


                             336
D               this
230                 Have you ever had to stay __21__ a long time? I have. About six
months ago I __22__ very weak and so I went __23__ a doctor. He looked at me and asked
a lot of questions: "Have you been working __24__?" "Have you __25__anything special?",
and so on. Finally he __26__ that it was not very serious but that I __27__ not to
meet other people. I had to stay in bed for two weeks and take some medicine __28__.
It wasn't so bad because my friends came and talked to me __29__ the window. I am
glad my bedroom is on the __30__.
  21           答案:                C
A               in the bed for
B               in the bed since
C               in bed for
D               in the bed since
  22           答案:                A
A               felt
B               filled
C               fell
D               feel
  23           答案:                B
A               and see
B               to see
C               for see
D               for to see
  24           答案:                A
A               too hard
B               too hardly
C               too much hard
D               too much hardly
  25           答案:                C
A               ate or drank
B               ate or drunk
C              eaten or drunk
D               eat or drank
  26           答案:                D
A               told
B               said me
C               told to me
D               told me
  27           答案:                A
A               ought
B               would
C               should
D               must
  28           答案:                D


                                                                                   337
A              all the days
B              every days
C              all days
D              every day
  29           答案:               A
A              through
B              along
C              though
D              across
  30           答案:               D
A              flat ground
B              ground flat
C              floor ground
D              ground floor
231                I have a brother who is __21__ me. We __22__. Yesterday was an
important day __23__ and our friends. In the morning __24__ of us had a big exam at
the technical college, then __25__ there was a big meeting at the youth club at 9
o'clock. (That is where we usually go when we want to __26__ ourselves.) A rich woman
had given us some money and yesterday we __27__ decide what to do __28__. Many people
wanted to buy something new for our club, but my brother and I wanted to give the
money to another club that has __29__. In the end we decided to give half the money
to the poor club and __30__ half for ourselves.
  21           答案:               D
A              so old as
B              so old that
C              the same age that
D              the same age as
  22           答案:               B
A              both are 16
B              are both 16
C              are 16 both
D              are 16 the both
  23           答案:               B
A              to us
B              for us
C              with us
D              on us
  24           答案:               A
A              most
B              much
C              more
D              few
  25           答案:               A
A              last night


                                                                                  338
B              the last night
C              last evening
D              the last evening
  26           答案:               A
A              enjoy
B              meet
C              like
D              change
  27           答案:               A
A              had to
B              must
C              should
D              would
  28           答案:               A
A              with it
B              with them
C              for it
D              for them
  29           答案:               C
A              something
B              anything
C              nothing
D              everything
  30           答案:               B
A              keep another
B              keep the other
C              hold another
D              hold the other
232                The price of hotels in Britain is going up __21__ at any other time
since the war. There are a number of reasons for this but the __22__ all is the
Government's economic policy. Managers in factories see __23__ so they are attracted
to the idea of owning __24__ businesses. __25__ Britain's weather is often
disappointing, the tourists industry is growing. Many people __26__ like to combine
a __27__ holiday with the opportunity of improving their English. It is therefore
not surprising that businessmen are buying hotels. The only thing __28__ worries me
is the kind of treatment their guests are __29__ to receive since __30__ of them know
anything about hotel management.
  21           答案:               C
A              more fast than
B              more fast that
C              faster than
D              faster that
  22           答案:               A
A              most important of


                                                                                   339
B        more important of
C        most important from
D        more important from
    23   答案:               D
A        too fall their standard of living
B        falling their standard of living
C        their standard of living to fall
D        their standard of living falling
    24   答案:               D
A        his proper
B        his own
C        their proper
D        their own
    25   答案:               B
A        In spite of
B        Although
C        Even
D        However
    26   答案:               A
A        in the Continent
B        in overseas
C        abroad
D        foreign
    27   答案:               B
A        fortnight
B        fortnight's
C        two weeks
D        two weeks's
    28   答案:               A
A        that
B        what
C        as
D        who
    29   答案:               D
A        like
B        probable
C        probably
D        likely
    30   答案:               C
A        little
B        at little
C        few
D        a few
233          These days most people, especially young girls, like __21__ slim.


                                                                           340
Our grandparents' tastes were different __22__ ours but nowadays __23__ seems to enjoy
__24__ that people. That is why many companies have developed special foods to help
people to slim. The only thing __25__ is wrong __26__ this is what __27__ said to
me the other says: "I don't mind __28__ these foods if they will help me to lose weight
but why do they taste so awful?" The reason __29__ this is that the manufacturers
have to include a lot of vitamins to satisfy the law, so the only sensible advice
I could give my friend was "Eat normal food, but __30__ less."
  21           答案:                A
A              to look
B              to be looked
C              that they look
D              that they are looking
  22           答案:                C
A              of
B              that
C              from
D              as
  23           答案:                D
A              anyone
B              anybody
C              none
D              no one
  24           答案:                B
A              looking
B              looking at
C              to look
D              to look at
  25           答案:                B
A              it
B              that
C              what
D              as
  26           答案:                D
A              about
B              at
C              in
D              with
  27           答案:                A
A              a friend of mine
B              a friend of me
C              friend of mine
D              one friend of me
  28           答案:                C
A              eat


                                                                                    341
B              to eat
C              eating
D              the eating
  29           答案:                A
A              for
B              of
C              that
D              why
  30           答案:                D
A              to eat
B              eating
C              be eating
D              eat
234                 Have you ever thought how books are __21__? Well, after a book is
written, it passes __22__ the hands of many different workers. Each one __23__ very
carefully, for there must not be any __24__ in the book, it is read many times by
different people before it is finished.
     Millions of books are printed in our country every year. So people can get __25__
to read. Now may I ask you a question? How well do you take __26__ of books?
     What have you learned about the care of books? Perhaps you bought __27__ some
new books. Have you put paper covers on them? Do you open them __28__? Sometimes new
books break along the back if you open them suddenly __29__ the middle. I hope that
you do not __30__ the pages carelessly. If you do, you may tear them.
  21           答案:                D
A              sold
B              bought
C              given
D              made
  22           答案:                A
A              through
B              to
C              in
D              from
  23           答案:                C
A              does
B              are
C              works
D              work
  24           答案:                A
A              mistakes
B              question
C              wrong
D              thing
  25           答案:                B


                                                                                   342
A               many
B               enough
C               a lot of
D               great
  26            答案:                A
A               care
B               after
C               out
D               to
  27            答案:                B
A               more
B               yourself
C               well
D               nicer
  28            答案:                D
A               it
B               book
C               paper
D               carefully
  29            答案:                B
A               to
B               in
C               at
D               of
  30            答案:                C
A               break
B               throw
C               turn
D               put
235                 Mr. and Mrs. Smith were singers, and they travelled to a lot of
countries. When they went __21__ plane, people checked them and their belongings,
__22__ they did not want them to take guns on to the plane with them.
     One day Mr. Smith came to __23__ the plane, and the men searched him and his things
first. When he was ready __24__ on the plane, then Mrs. Smith arrived. She was late
and in a hurry, __25__ the people searched her and her bag __26__. Mr. Smith heard
her laugh and say __27__ the men happily, "Oh, that's very good! I've __28__ those
scissors here and there __29__ several days, and now you __30__ them for me! Thank
you very much!"
  21            答案:                A
A               by
B               on
C               in
D               with
  22            答案:                B


                                                                                     343
A        before
B        because
C        if
D        when
    23   答案:           A
A        take
B        make
C        do
D        have
    24   答案:           C
A        got
B        getting
C        to get
D        to getting
    25   答案:           D
A        while
B        or
C        and
D        but
    26   答案:           B
A        certain
B        carefully
C        angrily
D        terribly
    27   答案:           C
A        at
B        with
C        to
D        over
    28   答案:           A
A        looked for
B        found
C        looked on
D        looked at
    29   答案:           D
A        on
B        in
C        since
D        for
    30   答案:           B
A        will find
B        have found
C        find
D        are finding


                           344
236                Kate and Sandy are American students. They __21__ sisters. They
live in town now. Kate is older than Sandy. She likes __22__ in town very much. Kate
thinks living in town is __23__ than living in the country. There are more parks,
shops and cinemas __24__ town than in the country. She especially likes the lights
in town. She thinks the lights __25__ are more beautiful than the stars. She likes
reading and reads __26__ than Sandy. Often Kate reads until very late at night.
     Sandy likes the country __27__. She thinks the country life is quiet. There is
less noise and __28__ cars. She likes to visit her Aunt Peggy. She often helps her
aunt __29__ her work. Sandy likes running. She runs faster than Kate. In the country
Sandy can run longer than in town. She also thinks running in the country is the __30__
exciting thing to do.
  21           答案:                B
A              interesting
B              more interesting
C              beautiful
D              more beautiful
  22           答案:                D
A              of
B              on
C              at
D              in
  23           答案:                A
A              at night
B              at the night
C              in night
D              in the night
  24           答案:                D
A              quickly
B              much quickly
C              quicker
D              more quickly
  25           答案:                C
A              good
B              well
C              better
D              best
  26           答案:                A
A              fewer
B              less
C              more
D              slower
  27           答案:                D
A              for
B              at


                                                                                    345
C              to
D              with
  28           答案:                B
A              more
B              most
C              less
D              least
  29           答案:                C
A              am
B              is
C              are
D              were
  30           答案:                A
A              living
B              to live
C              having lived
D              working
237                John lived with his mother in a big house, and __21__ his mother
died, the house became __22__ big for him. So he bought a __23__ one in the next street.
There was a very nice old clock in his first house, and when the men came to __24__
furniture to the new house, John thought, "I'm not going to let them __25__ my
beautiful clock in their truck. Perhaps they will break it, and then mending it will
be very __26__." So he picked it up and began to carry it down the road in his arms.
     It was heavy, so he stopped two or three times to have a __27__. Then suddenly
a small boy came down the road. He stopped and looked __28__ John for a few seconds.
Then he said to John, "You are a foolish man, __29__ you? Why don't you buy a watch
__30__ everybody else?
  21           答案:                C
A              if
B              before
C              after
D              as soon as
  22           答案:                A
A              too
B              much
C              very
D              quite
  23           答案:                A
A              smaller
B              bigger
C              shorter
D              longer
  24           答案:                C
A              have


                                                                                     346
B              pass
C              take
D              buy
  25           答案:                B
A              to carry
B              carry
C              carries
D              carried
  26           答案:                C
A              cheap
B              cheaper
C              expensive
D              more expensive
  27           答案:                B
A              look
B              rest
C              text
D              word
  28           答案:                D
A              after
B              for
C              up
D              at
  29           答案:                A
A              aren't
B              don't
C              won't
D              are you
  30           答案:                A
A              as
B              to
C              the same like
D              for
238                 The bell rang loudly. Everybody packed their schoolbags and got
__21__ to go home. Usually David's mother would fetch him home __22__ school but today
she was not there. David waited for 15 minutes __23__ he walked home.
     When he reached home, he knocked on the door as he did not bring his keys.
Surprisingly, no one __24__ the door. David thought his mother was in the toilet
so he waited patiently. After a few minutes there was __25__ no response. Just as
he was about to go to the nearby coffee shop __26__ his father worked to get the keys,
he heard the voice of his neighbour, John.
     David told him that no one was at home and John's mother suggested that David
__27__ in their house till his mother came back. David and John played happily __28__
evening when David's mother came back.


                                                                                   347
     David thanked John and his family before he went back into his house. David's
mother told David that she __29__ a backache and she had to see a doctor. __30__
this experience, David learnt an important lesson, "Neighbours are people who help
each other."
  21           答案:              A
A              ready
B              about
C              help
D              will
  22           答案:              C
A              to
B              in
C              from
D              at
  23           答案:              A
A              before
B              after
C              when
D              while
  24           答案:              B
A              came
B              answered
C              got
D              knocked
  25           答案:              C
A              almost
B              already
C              still
D              always
  26           答案:              A
A              where
B              which
C              that
D              whose
  27           答案:              B
A              sit
B              stay
C              come
D              live
  28           答案:              D
A              in the
B              before
C              at
D              till


                                                                               348
 29            答案:                C
A              affected
B              has had
C              had
D              has
  30           答案:                A
A              From
B              About
C              To
D              Of
239                Research has shown that excessive (过分的) noise __21__ people's
hearing. In fact many young people now suffer from deafness from regularly going to
discos where the __22__ of noise is so high that they have to shout to make themselves
__23__. Unfortunately, in spite of modern __24__, noise is very much part of our modern
world 一 planes flying overhead, traffic thundering along busy roads, television,
portable radios, all produce noise __25__ which we have become so accustomed that
we hardly __26__ it. In fact people going on country holidays have been known to
complain that it is too quiet. They actually miss the noises they are used to in their
daily lives. The problem is that noise, though it does not necessarily cause deafness,
causes __27__ and this can __28__ the long run prove harmful.__29__, the decision
about more or less noise cannot be left to the scientists alone. It is __30__ to us
to decide what kind of world we want to live in.
  21           答案:                B
A              spoils
B              damages
C              ruins
D              destroys
  22           答案:                C
A              amount
B              rate
C              1evel
D              standard
  23           答案:                C
A              noticed
B              known
C              heard
D              found
  24           答案:                A
A              technology
B              machinery
C              technique
D              skill
  25           答案:                B
A              for


                                                                                    349
B              to
C              in
D              at
  26           答案:               C
A              imagine
B              find
C              notice
D              feel
  27           答案:               D
A              nerve
B              strain
C              tension
D              stress
  28           答案:               D
A              by
B              as
C              on
D              in
  29           答案:               A
A              However
B              Moreover
C              Yet
D              Anyway
  30           答案:               B
A              owing
B              up
C              due
D              liable
240                  Industrial safety does not just happen. Companies __21__ low
accident rates plan their safety programs, work hard to organize them, and continue
working to keep them __22__ and active. When the work is well done, a __23__ of
accident-free operations is established __24__ time lost due to injuries is kept at
a minimum.
     Successful safety programs may __25__ greatly in the emphasis placed on certain
aspects of the program. Some place great emphasis __26__ mechanical guarding. Others
stress safe work practices by observing rules or regulations. Still __27__ depend
on an emotional appeal to the worker. But, there are certain basic ideas that must
be used in every program if maximum results are to be obtained.
     There can be no question about the value of a safety program. From a financial
standpoint alone, safety      __28__. The fewer the injury claims, the __29__ the
workman's insurance rate. This may mean the difference between operating at __30__
or at a loss.
  21           答案:               D
A              at


                                                                                 350
B        in
C        on
D        with
    22   答案:            A
A        alive
B        vivid
C        mobile
D        diverse
    23   答案:            B
A        regulation
B        climate
C        circumstance
D        requirement
    24   答案:            A
A        where
B        how
C        what
D        unless
    25   答案:            B
A        alter
B        differ
C        shift
D        distinguish
    26   答案:            C
A        in
B        above
C        on
D        over
    27   答案:            D
A        some
B        many
C        even
D        others
    28   答案:            C
A        comes off
B        turns up
C        pays off
D        holds up
    29   答案:            A
A        better
B        fewer
C        more
D        worse
    30   答案:            D


                            351
A              an advantage
B              a benefit
C              an interest
D              a profit
241                 In order to work here the foreigner needs a work permit, which must
be applied for by his prospective employer. The problem here is that the Department
of Employment has the right to __21__ or refuse these permits, and there is little
that can be __22__ about it; it would be extremely unwise __23__ a foreign visitor
to work without a permit, since anyone doing so is __24__ to immediate deportation
            .
(驱逐出境) There are some __25__ to this rule, most notable people from the Common
Market countries, who are __26__ to work without permits and who are often given
temporary residence permits of up to five years. Some __27__ people, such as doctors,
foreign journalists, authors and others, can work without permits.
     The problem with the Act is not just that some of its rules are unfair but also
__28__ it is administered, and the people who administer it.
     An immigration official has the power to stop a visitor __29__ these shores coming
into the country. If this happens the visitor has the __30__ to appeal to the
Immigration Appeal Tribunal ( 移 民 上 诉 特 别 法 庭 ) . While the appeals are being
considered, the visitor has no choice but to wait sometimes for quite a long time.
  21           答案:                D
A              allow
B              admit
C              present
D              grant
  22           答案:                B
A              made
B              done
C              explained
D              talked
  23           答案:                A
A              for
B              to
C              as
D              in
  24           答案:                C
A              apt
B              likely
C              liable
D              inclined
  25           答案:                B
A              exemptions
B              exceptions
C              excerptions
D              Expositions


                                                                                    352
 26            答案:                C
A               prescribed
B               qualified
C               entitled
D               certified
  27           答案:                D
A               more
B               fewer
C               others
D               other
  28           答案:                A
A               the way
B               that
C               the time
D               what
  29           答案:                D
A               out of
B               to
C               from
D              off
  30           答案:                C
A               honor
B               force
C               right
D               authority
242                 One of the biggest problems the Fire Services faces is to keep
emergency exits in many buildings free. Increasingly, actions are taken against
companies or factories which __21__ a deaf ear to the warnings of the Fire Services.
"We're __22__ of the very high rents and land costs, the need to maximize the use
of space and the fact that production deadlines have to be __23__, and the need to
find space for storing goods, " said a Fire Officer, "but we're equally concerned
__24__ the fact that people within the premises (房屋) must, in the __25__ of a fire,
have a clear and positive means of escape." Therefore certain parts of the premises
must be kept clear.
                                                                  (防护措施)
     Indeed, factory owners and businessman should take precautions          against
fires. In an effort to __26__ home the importance of protecting the premises against
fires, the Fire Officer noted that seven out of ten business firms which __27__ from
a major fire close __28__ within twelve months. Even __29__ the company does not go
out of __30__, it may suffer other losses.
  21           答案:                A
A               turn
B               set
C               put
D               give


                                                                                 353
    22   答案:              B
A        conscious
B        aware
C        known
D        comprehensible
    23   答案:              B
A        filled
B        met
C        accomplished
D        attained
    24   答案:              A
A        with
B        in
C        at
D        over
    25   答案:              B
A        case
B        event
C        time
D        occasion.
    26   答案:              D
A        get
B        reach
C        take
D        drive
    27   答案:              C
A        lose
B        survive
C        suffer
D        recover
    28   答案:              C
A        off
B        over
C        down
D        in
    29   答案:              B
A        although
B        if
C        when
D        after
    30   答案:              C
A        work
B        way
C        business


                              354
D              1ife
243                 Every human being, no matter what he is doing, gives off body heat.
The usual problem is __21__ dispose of it. But the designers of the Johnstown campus
of the University of Pittsburgh set themselves the __22__ problem-how to collect
body heat. They have designed a collection system which uses not only body heat, but
the heat given off by such objects __23__ light bulbs and refrigerators as well. The
system works so well that no conventional fuel is needed __24__ the campus' six
buildings comfortable.
     Some parts of most modern buildings-theatre and offices as well as classrooms
-are more than amply (足够地) heated by people and lights and sometimes must be
air-conditioned __25__ in winter. The technique of saving heat and redistributing
it is called "heated recovery". A few modern buildings recover __26__, but the
university's system is the first to recover heat from some buildings and re-use it
in __27__. Along the way, Pitt has 1earned a great deal about some of its heat producers.
The harder a student studies, the more heat his body __28__. Male students give off
more heat than female students, and the larger a student, the more heat he __29__.
It is likely to __30__ that the hottest prospect for the Johnstown campus would be
a hard-working, over-weight male genius (天才).
  21           答案:                A
A              how to
B              how
C              what
D              what to
  22           答案:                D
A              similar
B              wrong
C              opposing
D              opposite
  23           答案:                D
A              for example
B              like
C              of
D              as
  24           答案:                C
A              make
B              to be made
C              to make
D              making
  25           答案:                A
A              even
B              so
C              ever
D              much
  26           答案:                D


                                                                                     355
A              loss
B              cold
C              temperature
D              heat
  27           答案:                C
A              the other
B              other
C              others
D              the others
  28           答案:                B
A              takes in
B              gives off
C              gives in
D              takes out
  29           答案:                A
A              produces
B              manufactures
C              designs
D              receives
  30           答案:                B
A              start
B              conclude
C              end
D              begin
244                Every morning, Steve goes to work __21__ train. As he has a long
way __22__, he __23__ buys a newspaper __24__ helps to make the time pass more quickly.
One Thursday morning, he turned to the sports page. He wanted to read the report __25__
an important football match. The report was so interesting that he forgot __26__.
He realized this when he looked out of the window and saw the sea. He got off at the
next station and had to wait a long time __27__ a train going back. Of course, he
arrived very late __28__ the office. His boss was very __29__ when he told him __30__
he was late.
     "Work is more important than football!" he shouted.

    21         答案:               B
A              in
B              by
C              for
D              with
    22         答案:               C
A              to leave
B              to walk
C              to go
D              to run


                                                                                    356
 23            答案:                A
A              always
B              seldom
C              sometimes
D              never
  24           答案:                B
A              what
B              which
C              as
D              it
  25           答案:                D
A              to
B              for
C              at
D              on
  26           答案:                C
A              to get on
B              getting away
C              to get off
D              to get home
  27           答案:                A
A              for
B              about
C              of
D              on
  28           答案:                D
A              with
B              by
C              for
D              at
  29           答案:                B
A              happy
B              angry
C              glad
D              hungry
  30           答案:                C
A              what
B              when
C              how
D              why
245                 George Stephenson was born in 1781. He was __21__ a poor English
worker's family. His father looked __22__ a steam engine. He worked hard indeed,
__23__ he could not support his family. Where could he get the money __24__ send George
to school? George began to learn his ABC when he was seventeen. __25__ his 18th


                                                                                    357
birthday, he could write his own name.
    George had to work when he was only a small child. The work was much too hard
__26__ him. He worked for 12 hours every day. After a day's work he often felt __27__
tired to stand.
    He worked and studied very hard. He __28__ all this time learning about the steam
engine.
    __29__ he studied hard, he invented many things. The railway locomotive(火车
头)was the greatest __30__ of them.

    21        答案:               D
A             by
B             with
C             in
D             from
    22        答案:               C
A             for
B             at
C             after
D             into
    23        答案:               C
A             and
B             so
C             but
D             because
    24        答案:               A
A             to
B             for
C             with
D             by
    25        答案:               B
A             To
B             On
C             By
D             Up
    26        答案:               B
A             to
B             for
C             by
D             with
    27        答案:               D
A             very
B             so
C             much
D             too


                                                                                  358
    28         答案:                C
A               took
B               gave
C               spent
D               sent
  29           答案:                B
A               Although
B               Because
C               Since
D               But
  30           答案:                A
A               one
B               things
C               person
D               engine
246                 Polly went to school __21__ she was six years old. She liked her
first day __22__. Her teacher, Miss Yates, was very nice, and the other children in
her class were __23__, too. But at the end of the second day, when the other children
__24__ the classroom, Polly stayed behind and waited.
     Miss Yates had some work to do and did not __25__ Polly at first, but then she
looked up and saw her.     "Why __26__ you go with the others, Polly?" She asked kindly.
"Did you want to ask me __27__?"
     "Yes, Miss Yates," Polly said.
     "What is it?" Miss Yates asked.
     "What did I do in school today?" Polly said.
     Miss Yates laughed. "What did you do in school today?" she said. "__28__ did you
ask me that, Polly?"
     "Because I'm going __29__ now," Polly answered, "and my mother is going to __30__
me."

    21         答案:               B
A              at
B              when
C              just
D              where
    22         答案:               A
A              very much
B              very well
C              too
D              much better
    23         答案:               D
A              young
B              bad
C              clever


                                                                                    359
D              nice
  24           答案:               D
A              came to
B              went to
C              leave
D              left
  25           答案:               C
A              listen to
B              look at
C              see
D              wait for
  26           答案:               A
A              didn't
B              did
C              do
D              don't
  27           答案:               D
A              a word
B              a sentence
C              my name
D              a question
  28           答案:               A
A              Why
B              How
C              When
D              Where
  29           答案:               D
A              to school
B              to my room
C              to the classroom
D              home
  30           答案:               C
A              tell
B              give
C              ask
D              teach
247                One day Mr Parker said to himself, "I haven't seen my brother David
__21__ a long time, and he's living in a new house now. I'm going to drive there and
see him this afternoon."
     He __22__ his brother's address, got into his car and started __23__. He drove
for a long time, but he didn't find the house __24__ he stopped and asked __25__ to
help him.
     "Go straight __26__ this road for two miles(英里)," the man said, "then turn
left, and then take the second road __27__ the right."


                                                                                   360
    Mr Parker went straight along the road and turned left __28__ two miles, but then
he got lost again. He drove for __29__ mile, and at last he saw a road on his right
and stopped. A woman was coming __30__ him, so he said to her, "Excuse me, is this
the second road on the right?"

    21        答案:               D
A             in
B             by
C             within
D             for
    22        答案:               C
A             had
B             made
C             took
D             carried
    23        答案:               B
A             with
B             out
C             along
D             into
    24        答案:               D
A             before
B             after
C             because
D             so
    25        答案:               A
A             somebody
B             anybody
C             everybody
D             nobody
    26        答案:               D
A             by
B             with
C             under
D             along
    27        答案:               A
A             on
B             in
C             at
D             by
    28        答案:               D
A             about
B             within
C             out of


                                                                                  361
D              after
  29           答案:               B
A              each
B              another
C              more
D              other
  30           答案:               C
A              about
B              from
C              towards
D              by
248                Hank lived in a small town, __21__ he got a job in a big city and
moved __22__ with his wife and his two children.
     On the first Saturday in their new home Hank __23__ his new red car out of the
garage(车库)and was washing it __24__ a neighbor came __25__. When he saw Hank's
new car, the neighbor stopped and looked at it for a minute. Then Hank turned and
saw him.
     The neighbor said, "That's a nice car. Is it __26__?"
     "Sometimes," Hank answered.
     The neighbor was surprised. "Sometimes?" he said. "__27__ do you mean?"
     "Well," answered Hank slowly, "when there's a party __28__, it belongs to my
daughter, Jane. When there's football game __29__, it belongs to my son, Joe. When
I've washed it, and it looks really nice and clean, it belongs to my wife. And when
it needs gas, it's __30__."

    21        答案:               D
A             and so
B             and yet
C             so that
D             but then
    22        答案:               B
A             here
B             there
C             to that
D             to it
    23        答案:               D
A             got
B             made
C             had
D             took
    24        答案:               A
A             when
B             while
C             as


                                                                                 362
D               because
  25            答案:               C
A               to
B               at
C               by
D               with
  26            答案:               C
A               you
B               your
C               yours
D               yourself
  27            答案:               A
A               What
B               Which
C               When
D               Where
  28            答案:               A
A               in town
B               in the town
C               off town
D               by the town
  29            答案:               B
A               any where
B               somewhere
C               everywhere
D               nowhere
  30            答案:               D
A               me
B               my
C               I
D               mine
249                 One day a crow(乌鸦)found piece of meat and flew up into a tree
with it. Just then a fox passed __21__. He saw the crow with __22__ meat in her bill
(嘴).
     "I should like __23__ that meat myself," thought the fox. "Perhaps I can get it
by a trick. "So he went __24__ to the tree and began to talk to the crow.
     "How beautiful you are!" said he, "I never saw such a fine bird __25__ you. __26__
bright eyes you have! How your feathers(羽毛)shine!"
     "I have heard about your beautiful __27__. Oh, queen of the birds, won't you sing
a song for me?"
     The crow was so pleased that she did not stop __28__. She opened her mouth to
show how well she could sing. Down fell the meat to the ground.
     This was just __29__ the fox wanted. He didn't wait to hear the rest of the song
__30__ ran away with the meat.


                                                                                    363
    21   答案:            A
A        by
B        through
C        on
D        to
    22   答案:            D
A        a
B        an
C        one
D        the
    23   答案:            B
A        having
B        to have
C        had
D        to be had
    24   答案:            B
A        down
B        up
C        by
D        with
    25   答案:            A
A        as
B        like
C        with
D        of
    26   答案:            B
A        How
B        What
C        Which
D        So
    27   答案:            C
A        noise
B        sound
C        voice
D        mouth
    28   答案:            C
A        think
B        thinking
C        to think
D        for thinking
    29   答案:            B
A        that
B        what


                            364
C               which
D               how
  30            答案:                D
A               so
B               and
C               then
D               but
250                 Tom had a garden behind his house. It had no light __21__. One night
he went out to the garden __22__ his bike, and lost his watch __23__. He left his
bike, went to the street and began to __24__.
     One of his friends saw him in the street outside his house, and __25__ him, "Hello,
Tom. What are you looking for?"
     "My watch," answered Tom. "It is a gold watch."
     "Oh, yes," said his friend. "I remember it. I'll help you to look for it. Where
did you lose it?"
     "In my garden."
     "But why __26__ look for it there?"
     "__27__ stupid! It was quite dark in my garden, so __28__ find my watch there?
__29__ is light __30__ the lamps in the street."

    21         答案:                B
A              in that
B              in it
C              at it
D              at that
    22         答案:                D
A              for getting
B              getting
C              get
D              to get
    23         答案:                B
A              here
B              there
C              in which
D              at that
    24         答案:                D
A              look for
B              look it
C              look at
D              look around
    25         答案:                A
A              said to
B              asked for
C              asked to


                                                                                     365
D               spoke for
  26           答案:                C
A               do you
B               not you
C               don't you
D               won't you
  27           答案:                D
A              Not to be
B               Don't to be
C               Don't to
D               Don't be
  28           答案:                A
A               how can I
B               how I can
C               how could I
D               how I might
  29           答案:                B
A              There here
B               Here there
C               There where
D               Where there
  30           答案:                C
A               of
B               with
C               from
D               by
251                 One day a cap-maker was __21__ his way to the market to sell his
caps. The way was __22__ a forest __23__ there were many monkeys. The day was hot,
and the man wanted to rest a little. He saw a large tree, then put his caps on the
ground, took __24__ and put it on his head. Then he lay down and soon fell asleep.
     When the man woke up, he __25__ find his caps. "Where are my caps?" he cried and
looked up. And what did he see? He saw many monkeys in the tree, and __26__ monkey
had a cap on its head. "Give me back my caps!" cried the man. But the monkeys did
not understand him. They only laughed. The man got very angry, took off __27__ cap,
threw it on the ground and cried, "If you want all my caps, you __28__ take this cap
too!"
     And what do you think? The little animals did __29__. Each monkey took off its
cap and threw it on the ground. The man was very glad. He quickly picked up all his
caps and __30__ his way.

    21        答案:               A
A             on
B             in
C             at


                                                                                  366
D        of
    22   答案:             C
A        to go inside
B        to go into
C        to go through
D        to go over
    23   答案:             D
A        at what
B        at where
C        in that
D        in which
    24   答案:             B
A        one of it
B        one of them
C        each one
D        everyone
    25   答案:             A
A        could not
B        might not
C        must not
D        should not
    26   答案:             A
A        each
B        every
C        one
D        some
    27   答案:             B
A        his that
B        his own
C        himself
D        one of the
    28   答案:             C
A        can
B        must
C        may
D        will
    29   答案:             C
A        as it
B        likely
C        the same
D        different
    30   答案:             D
A        walked back
B        turned back


                             367
C              went out
D              went on
252                 John left the United States in 1969 to work in Africa. Africa was
hot, and when John came back to the United States in 1979, he said __21__, "It's __22__
here than it was __23__ I left. I'm going to buy an electric heater(电暖气). __24__,
everything is much more expensive."
    John went to a store the next day to buy an electric heater. The salesman showed
him three __25__ four different kinds and then said, "And this is our best electric
heater. It costs __26__ money, but it saves half of your electricity, and electricity
is very expensive now, __27__?"
    "Yes, it's very expensive," John answered, "and it's becoming worse every year."
He looked at the electric heater carefully, __28__ for a few seconds and then said,
"Well, I'll take two of __29__, please, and then I'll save __30__ my electricity."

    21         答案:                B
A              by himself
B              to himself
C              for himself
D              with himself
    22         答案:                C
A              more colder
B              much more colder
C              much colder
D              much cold
    23         答案:                A
A              before
B              after
C              since
D              within
    24         答案:                D
A              Too
B              Yet
C              Same
D              Also
    25         答案:                C
A              and
B              by
C              or
D              but
    26         答案:                A
A              a lot of
B              many
C              same
D              some


                                                                                    368
    27          答案:               D
A               is it
B               is that
C               isn't so
D               isn't it
  28            答案:               D
A               think
B               thought
C               to think
D               thinking
  29            答案:               A
A               these
B               those
C               this
D               that
  30            答案:               D
A               half of
B               none of
C               any of
D               all of
253                 Mike was a small boy, and he hated soap and water. Three or four
times every day his mother said to him, "Mike, your hands are very __21__ again. Go
and wash them." But Mike never really washed them well. He only __22__ his hands in
the water for a few seconds and then took them __23__ again.
     Mike's uncle and aunt lived in another city. One day they __24__ stay with Mike's
parents, and they brought their small son, Ted, with them. Ted was a year __25__ than
Mike, and he didn't like soap and water __26__.
     The boys sat with their parents __27__ a few minutes, but then they went outside.
When they were alone, Mike looked at Ted's __28__ and then said proudly, "My hands
are dirtier than __29__."
     "Of course they are," Ted __30__ angrily. "You're a year older than I am."

    21         答案:               B
A              clean
B              dirty
C              big
D              small
    22         答案:               A
A              put
B              took
C              brought
D              washed
    23         答案:               C
A              away


                                                                                   369
B              in
C              out
D              off
  24           答案:               D
A              got to
B              arrived at
C              were
D              came to
  25           答案:               A
A              younger
B              smaller
C              taller
D              more
  26           答案:               B
A              too
B              either
C              also
D              very
  27           答案:               B
A              in
B              for
C              after
D              before
  28           答案:               A
A              hands
B              feet
C              face
D              arms
  29           答案:               D
A              you are
B              you
C              your
D              yours
  30           答案:               B
A              asked
B              answered
C              spoke
D              told
254                Ted worked in a factory in a big town. He liked __21__ very much,
and was very good __22__ it. When he was free, he went down to the small river behind
the factory and tried to catch __23__ fish, but there were very few __24__, because
the water was very dirty. Then one summer he went to the sea __25__ his holidays and
stayed at a small cheap hotel.
     "I've never fished in the sea __26__," he thought. "It will be different __27__


                                                                                  370
fishing in our river."
    On the first day he caught __28__ fish and was very happy. He gave them to the
hotel, and they cooked them for all the guests, and they enjoyed __29__ very much.
After that, he did __30__ every day. But when Ted got his bill(帐单)at the end of
the week, he saw on it:
    "For oil to cook the fish ( 7 days ): ? 3.50."

    21        答案:              A
A             a lot of
B             much
C             enough
D             all the
    22        答案:              B
A             it
B             them
C             that
D             those
    23        答案:              A
A             that
B             this
C             them
D             those
    24        答案:              C
A             fish
B             to fish
C             fishing
D             for fishing
    25        答案:              B
A             in
B             at
C             for
D             with
    26        答案:              D
A             much
B             a lot of
C             any
D             some
    27        答案:              B
A             here
B             there
C             at there
D             in there
    28        答案:              A
A             during


                                                                               371
B               within
C               inside
D               among
  29            答案:                B
A               ago
B               before
C               in front
D               earlier
  30            答案:                D
A               as
B               with
C               like
D               from
255                  Mr Clark worked in an office, and he did a lot of important and
difficult work, but then he began __21__ things, and this __22__ his work very
difficult. One day he said to himself, "I'm going to go and __23__ Dr Martin __24__
this."
     He waited in the doctor's waiting-room __25__ the other patients, __26__ the nurse
said to him, "You __27__ go in and see Dr Martin now."
     Mr Clark hurried into Dr Martin's office, and the doctor said, "Please sit down,
Mr Clark. What can I do __28__ you?"
     "Oh, doctor," said Mr Clark, "It's terrible. I can't remember anything for __29__
half a minute, and it's making my work very difficult. What can I do? Can you help
me?"
     The doctor said, "When did this start, Mr Clark?"
     "When did __30__ start?" Mr Clark asked.

    21         答案:               B
A              forget
B              to forget
C              in forgetting
D              for forgetting
    22         答案:               C
A              gave
B              put
C              made
D              started
    23         答案:               D
A              look for
B              visit
C              find
D              see
    24         答案:               B
A              for


                                                                                    372
B              about
C              with
D              of
  25           答案:               A
A              with
B              from
C              towards
D              by
  26           答案:               C
A              but then
B              so that
C              and then
D              and yet
  27           答案:               A
A              can
B              should
C              might
D              must
  28           答案:               C
A              to
B              in
C              for
D              with
  29           答案:               D
A              sooner than
B              faster than
C              shorter than
D              longer than
  30           答案:               B
A              where
B              what
C              which
D              how
256                One day Mr White saw a lady in the street __21__ ten children. He
was surprised __22__ all the children were wearing the same __23__ ----white hats,
dark blue coats and grey trousers.
     "Are all those children __24__?" he asked the woman.
     "Yes, they are," she answered.
     "Do you always dress them in the same clothes?" asked Mr White.
     "Yes," answered the mother. "When we had __25__ four children, we dressed them
in the same clothes because we did not want to __26__ any of them. It was easy to
see our children when they were among __27__ children because they were all wearing
the same clothes. And now, when we have ten, we dress them like this because we do
not want to take other children home too by __28__. When there are other children


                                                                                 373
among __29__, it is easy to see them, because their clothes are __30__."

    21        答案:              C
A             have
B             has
C             with
D             of
    22        答案:              D
A             which
B             and
C             while
D             because
    23        答案:              B
A             coats
B             clothes
C             dress
D             shirts
    24        答案:              B
A             your
B             yours
C             other
D             others
    25        答案:              C
A             already
B             yet
C             only
D             as
    26        答案:              A
A             lose
B             lost
C             leave
D             left
    27        答案:              A
A             other
B             others
C             another
D             the other
    28        答案:              B
A             chance
B             mistake
C             hand
D             bike
    29        答案:              D
A             other


                                                                           374
B              others
C              our
D              ours
  30           答案:                D
A              same
B              like
C              ours
D              different
257                 Nora was sixteen years old. She had a little brother. Her brother's
name was Jim. Jim was sometimes naughty(顽皮的), but he __21__ Nora laugh a lot ,
and she loved him and was always very nice __22__ him.
     One afternoon she was walking from her house to the store __23__ she saw a small
boy __24__ the street towards her. He was going very fast. When he came __25__ her,
she was surprised __26__ it was Jim.
     "Hi, Jim," Nora shouted to him. "__27__ are you running like that?"
     Jim didn't stop, but he waved to his sister and shouted, "I'm trying to stop two
boys __28__ fighting."
     Nora was surprised again. She laughed and said, "That's an important job for a
little boy, isn't it? You don't do things __29__ that very often. Who are the two
boys?"
     "They're Tom and me," answered Jim __30__ he continued running down the street
very quickly.

    21         答案:               D
A              had
B              did
C              led
D              made
    22         答案:               B
A              toward
B              to
C              with
D              for
    23         答案:               C
A              as
B              while
C              when
D              until
    24         答案:               C
A              run along
B              to run along
C              running along
D              ran along
    25         答案:               D


                                                                                    375
A              to
B              by
C              at
D              near
  26           答案:               A
A              to see
B              in seeing
C              for seeing
D              by seeing
  27           答案:               D
A              How
B              How fast
C              When
D              Why
  28           答案:               C
A              with
B              by
C              from
D              through
  29           答案:               A
A              like
B              as
C              of
D              from
  30           答案:               B
A              when
B              as
C              after
D              until
258                Dick was a sailor on a big ship. It went to Japan and Australia,
__21__ Dick was often on the ship for several months __22__. When he woke up in the
morning and looked out, he only saw the sea, __23__ sometimes a port.
     When he was twenty-four, Dick __24__ and bought a small house __25__ a garden
in his wife's town. It was __26__ the sea. Then he had to go back to his ship, and
he __27__ home for two months. He went from the port to the town by bus, and was very
happy to see his wife again.
     The next morning he slept __28__ 9 o'clock. Then he woke up suddenly and looked
out of the window. There were trees a few feet __29__. He was very frightened and
jumped __30__ bed, shouting, "We've hit land!"

    21        答案:               D
A             as
B             for
C             because


                                                                                  376
D        so
    22   答案:              A
A        at a time
B        every time
C        all the time
D        at any time
    23   答案:              C
A        and
B        but
C        or
D        while
    24   答案:              C
A        became married
B        found married
C        got married
D        turned married
    25   答案:              D
A        by
B        beside
C        about
D        with
    26   答案:              B
A        far out of
B        far away from
C        far down in
D        far up into
    27   答案:              B
A        did come
B        did not come
C        did not go
D        did not get
    28   答案:              D
A        at
B        to
C        by
D        until
    29   答案:              B
A        out
B        away
C        off
D        along
    30   答案:              A
A        out of
B        out from


                              377
C              away from
D              away into
259                 Bill and Fred were students __21__ a university and they were
friends. They didn't have much money, so when it was __22__ for __23__ summer vacation,
Bill said, "Let's __24__ our vacation in trailer(活动住房), Fred. It's cheaper than
a hotel. I can borrow my father's trailer." Fred was very happy, so they got into
the trailer and began their vacation.
    They wanted to get up early the next day __25__, but they did not have an alarm
clock.
    "That's all right, Bill," Fred said. "I'll put these pieces of bread on the roof
of the trailer tonight and they'll __26__ in the morning."
    Bill was very surprised, but he __27__ anything.
    Fred was right. __28__ it began to get light, small birds __29__ to eat the bread,
and their noise on the roof of the trailer woke Bill and Fred up __30__.

    21         答案:               D
A              in
B              on
C              of
D              at
    22         答案:               B
A              day
B              time
C              place
D              month
    23         答案:               B
A              its
B              their
C              theirs
D              them
    24         答案:               A
A              take
B              have
C              do
D              give
    25         答案:               D
A              go fish
B              to go fish
C              go fishing
D              to go fishing
    26         答案:               B
A              wake us down
B              wake us up
C              get us up


                                                                                    378
D               get us down
  27            答案:               C
A               said not
B               did say
C               didn't say
D               wasn't saying
  28            答案:               C
A               while
B               at the time
C               as soon as
D               as early as
  29            答案:               B
A               came up
B               came down
C               went up
D               went down
  30            答案:               B
A               very quick
B               very quickly
C               very short
D               very immediately
260                 Krylov, a great Russian writer, was very poor when he was young.
One day __21__ of winter he __22__ by a window in his house, __23__ he heard some
women outside crying. He put his head out of the window, and saw a lot of people __24__
towards his house. They were carrying a __25__ man, and the women were crying, "Oh,
why are you leaving us to go to a place without light and without a fire and without
__26__? It will be dark there, and you will be cold and hungry. Nobody will look __27__
you, nobody will be kind __28__ you, and nobody will love you there!"
     "Ah!" said Krylov to his wife. "They are __29__ about our house. They are bringing
the dead man here! quick, __30__ the door! Don't let them in!"

    21         答案:               B
A              in middle
B              in the middle
C              at middle
D              at the middle
    22         答案:               A
A              was sitting
B              sat
C              had sat
D              sits
    23         答案:               A
A              when
B              after


                                                                                    379
C              as soon as
D              as
  24           答案:                C
A              come
B              came
C              coming
D              had come
  25           答案:                D
A              died
B              death
C              die
D              dead
  26           答案:                D
A              a food
B              many foods
C              enough foods
D              food
  27           答案:                C
A              up
B              for
C              after
D              like
  28           答案:                D
A              of
B              for
C              at
D              to
  29           答案:                B
A              saying
B              talking
C              telling
D              speaking
  30           答案:                A
A              lock
B              locking
C              will lock
D              to lock
261                 It was two weeks before Christmas, and Mrs Smith was very busy.
She bought a lot of Christmas cards __21__ to her friends and to her husband's friends,
and __22__ on the table in the living-room. Then, __23__ her husband came home from
work, she said to him, "Here are the Christmas cards __24__ friends, and here are
some stamps, a pen and our book of address. Will you please write the cards __25__
I am cooking the dinner?"
     Mr Smith did not say __26__, but walked __27__ the living-room and went to his


                                                                                    380
study(书房). Mrs was very angry __28__ him, but did not say anything __29__.
    Then a minute later he came back with a box full of Christmas cards. All of them
had addresses and stamps on them.
    "These __30__ last year," he said, "I forgot to post them."

    21        答案:               A
A             to send
B             to be sent
C             for sending
D             for being sent
    22        答案:               C
A             put that
B             to put those
C             put them
D             to put them
    23        答案:               B
A             while
B             when
C             before
D             whenever
    24        答案:               B
A             for your
B             for our
C             to your
D             to our
    25        答案:               A
A             while
B             when
C             as
D             as soon as
    26        答案:               D
A             something
B             nothing
C             everything
D             anything
    27        答案:               C
A             into
B             inside
C             out of
D             out from
    28        答案:               D
A             for
B             from
C             by


                                                                                 381
D              with
  29           答案:               C
A              also
B              as he
C              either
D              neither
  30           答案:               A
A              are from
B              are of
C              were from
D              were of
262                 An old man went to the hospital. When the doctor came to __21__
him, he said, "Well, Mr Jones, you're going to have some injections(注射), and then
you'll feel __22__. A nurse will come and give you the first __23__ this evening,
and then you'll get __24__ one tomorrow morning."
     In the evening a young nurse came to Mr Jones' bed and said to him, "I'm going
to give you your first injection __25__, Mr Jones. __26__ do you want it?"
     The old man was surprised. He __27__ the nurse for several seconds, and then he
said, "Nobody's ever let me choose __28__ before. Are you really going to let me choose
now?"
     "Yes, Mr Jones," the nurse answered. She was __29__. "Where do you want it?"
     "Well, then," the old man answered __30__ a smile, "I want it in your left arm,
please."

    21         答案:               C
A              look at
B              look for
C              see
D              find
    22         答案:               D
A              more good
B              much good
C              very better
D              much better
    23         答案:               A
A              one
B              it
C              that
D              those
    24         答案:               C
A              other
B              either
C              another
D              neither


                                                                                    382
    25         答案:               B
A              then
B              now
C              already
D              yet
  26           答案:               B
A              Which
B              Where
C              When
D              How
  27           答案:               D
A              looked for
B              looked around
C              looked in
D              looked at
  28           答案:               B
A              which
B              that
C              where
D              it
  29           答案:               C
A              with a rush
B              with difficulty
C              in a hurry
D              in her ease
  30           答案:               D
A              in
B              by
C              of
D              with
263                Peter Blake is a successful businessman, but he __21__ to be very
poor. He had nowhere to live and __22__ working in a pub when he __23__ to start his
own business. Peter had always __24__ interested in plants and flowers, __25__ he
decided to set up a company __26__ cared for the plants in big offices. At first he
worked on his __27__, but soon he took __28__ two people to help him. The company
has been growing __29__ for the last ten years. Peter is now very rich, __30__ he
complains that now he doesn't work with plants but with a computer every day!

    21        答案:               C
A             would
B             should
C             used
D             use
    22        答案:               B


                                                                                 383
A        did
B        was
C        been
D        has been
    23   答案:            B
A        had decided
B        decided
C        was deciding
D        has decided
    24   答案:            D
A        was
B        had
C        being
D        been
    25   答案:            A
A        so
B        but
C        because
D        although
    26   答案:            B
A        who
B        which
C        whose
D        what
    27   答案:            A
A        own
B        self
C        him
D        himself
    28   答案:            C
A        up
B        over
C        on
D        in
    29   答案:            B
A        on
B        up
C        over
D        into
    30   答案:            C
A        therefore
B        so
C        but
D        moreover


                            384
264                Molly Wilson __21__ a dancer and a mother for many years when she
__22__ to sail round the world to raise money for charity.
    As a child she __23__ as a ballet dancer, but at 15 years old she had grown too
tall for classical ballet, so she __24__ a member of a pop dance team.
    She __25__, and __26__ she had children she retired from show business to bring
them __27__. They grew up, and when they were 18 they left home.
    She says, "When I decided to do the round-the-world race, my husband thought I
was bored because the children had left home. He was also worried __28__ I had never
sailed __29__. I was not bored, but I __30__ some people who told me about the race.
They had taken part in it, but they had only done one section, say, from New Zealand
to Australia. I wanted to do the whole ten-month journey."

    21        答案:                C
A             is
B             was
C             had been
D             has been
    22        答案:                B
A             decides
B             decided
C             had decided
D             has decided
    23        答案:                D
A             training
B             had been trained
C             was training
D             was trained
    24        答案:                D
A             become
B             had become
C             has become
D             became
    25        答案:                B
A             gets married
B             got married
C             was marrying
D             had married
    26        答案:                C
A             before
B             when
C             after
D             until
    27        答案:                D
A             down


                                                                                 385
B               in
C               out
D               up
  28           答案:               D
A               although
B               however
C               so
D               because
  29           答案:               A
A               before
B               ago
C               since
D               after
  30           答案:               B
A               met
B               had met
C               meet
D               has meet
265                 The ancient Olympic Games __21__ part of a religious festival in
honour __22__ the Greek god Zeus, the father of all Greek gods and goddesses. The
festival and games __23__ in Olympia, a religious Sanctuary.
     In the ancient games, athletes received prizes worth large amounts of money. In
fact the word "athlete" is an ancient Greek word, __24__ "one who competes __25__
a prize".
     The marathon was not an event of the ancient Olympic Games. The marathon is a
modern event that was first __26__ in the Olympic Games in 1896. It was __27__ a village
called Marathon __28__ the Persians __29__ by a small Greek army. The news of the
victory was brought to Athens by a soldier, who ran the 26 miles from the village
of Marathon to the capital. 26 miles was __30__ adopted as the distance of the modern
marathon race.

    21         答案:                D
A              is
B              are
C              was
D              were
    22         答案:                B
A              for
B              of
C              with
D              after
    23         答案:                C
A              hold
B              held


                                                                                     386
C              were held
D              are held
  24           答案:               A
A              meaning
B              mean
C              to mean
D              meant
  25           答案:               B
A              of
B              for
C              as
D              in
  26           答案:               A
A              introduced
B              introducing
C              introduce
D              to introduce
  27           答案:               D
A              name for
B              name after
C              named for
D              named after
  28           答案:               C
A              that
B              which
C              where
D              when
  29           答案:               A
A              were defeated
B              are defeated
C              defeated
D              defeats
  30           答案:               D
A              because
B              furthermore
C              however
D              therefore
266                 A survey was carried out last year __21__ the British Medical
Association, an organisation of doctors. It showed that most people do not do enough
exercise. In 1995, 60% of people walked more than one mile a day. Now, that number
has fallen __22__ to only 20%. __23__ more people are going to the gym, fewer people
are walking. Doctors say we need __24__ for 20 minutes three times a week. __25__
is an easy form of exercise that everyone can do. If you __26__ one mile each day,
you will improve your health very quickly. Doctors say we need to tackle this problem


                                                                                  387
head __27__ and try __28__ people fitter(更健康)because not doing enough exercise
is responsible __29__ many of the country's health problems. Doctors suggest you go
__30__ a walk every day after dinner.

    21        答案:               C
A             Walk
B             To walk
C             Walking
D             Walked
    22        答案:               A
A             walk
B             walked
C             to walk
D             walking
    23        答案:               D
A             down
B             in
C             up
D             on
    24        答案:               C
A             making
B             make
C             to make
D             made
    25        答案:               B
A             to
B             for
C             at
D             with
    26        答案:               B
A             at
B             for
C             and
D             to
    27        答案:               C
A             in
B             with
C             by
D             to
    28        答案:               A
A             sharply
B             slightly
C             below
D             up


                                                                                388
 29            答案:               D
A              So
B              Therefore
C              But
D              Although
  30           答案:               B
A              exercising
B              to exercise
C              exercised
D              exercises
267                 More and more people __21__ to install burglar alarms in their
houses if they want to get insurance. Insurance companies __22__ people in certain
areas to install the alarms before they will give them insurance for the past year.
This is __23__ to increasing crime in some parts of the country. This can be a problem
for people __24__ are struggling __25__ ends meet(收支平衡). The alarms, __26__
can be very expensive, need to be installed by an electrician. It is __27__ that 20%
of homes have alarms installed, and that another 20% of people plan __28__ but have
not installed them __29__. The insurance companies told people __30__ the alarms on
all doors and windows.
  21           答案:               B
A              must
B              have
C              had
D              has
  22           答案:               A
A              have been asking
B              have been asked
C              asked
D              ask
  23           答案:               D
A              caused
B              because
C              lead
D              due
  24           答案:               B
A              which
B              who
C              where
D              what
  25           答案:               A
A              to make
B              making
C              made
D              makes


                                                                                   389
 26            答案:               C
A              who
B              that
C              which
D              what
  27           答案:               D
A              estimate
B              to estimate
C              estimating
D              estimated
  28           答案:               A
A              to have them installed
B              to have them installing
C              to have been installing them
D              to have them install
  29           答案:               C
A              still
B              already
C              yet
D              since
  30           答案:               B
A              install
B              to install
C              installed
D              installing
268                 Many people are unaware __21__ a lot of the foods they eat every
day, __22__ bread, ham and cheese, have been altered by using new technology. Food
can be changed. It can be made to taste __23__ or to look different - carrots can
be made to taste of chocolate and apples can be made redder. Some food that appears
the same has been __24__ improved, for example, fish can be made to grow faster. Should
we be pleased or worried? Will new technology bring benefits, or is it about to go
__25__ control?
     Genetically engineered(转基因的)foods are produced by taking genetic material
from one species and transferring it __26__ another. For example, an 'antifreeze'
gene which appears naturally in Arctic fish has been introduced into tomatoes and
strawberries __27__ they don't freeze in cold weather; a human gene has been
introduced into pigs to make them __28__ more quickly.
     Some claim great advantages. They point out that crops can be made stronger and
more disease resistant, __29__ pesticides can be reduced. They also maintain that
food can be made more nutritious or that the fat content can __30__ to make it
healthier.
  21           答案:               A
A              that
B              what


                                                                                    390
C        for
D        of
    22   答案:              B
A        such that
B        such as
C        so that
D        so as
    23   答案:              C
A        difference
B        differently
C        different
D        differing
    24   答案:              A
A        scientifically
B        science
C        scientific
D        scientifical
    25   答案:              D
A        under
B        into
C        out
D        out of
    26   答案:              B
A        for
B        to
C        out
D        into
    27   答案:              C
A        such that
B        in order to
C        so that
D        so as to
    28   答案:              A
A        grow
B        to grow
C        growing
D        grown
    29   答案:              D
A        because
B        cause
C        result
D        so
    30   答案:              B
A        be reducing


                              391
B               be reduced
C               reduced
D               reducing
269                 Dealing with waste is a huge global problem. Unfortunately, many
people don't usually think much about what happens __21__ their old fridge when they
update to the latest model. A few just dump it __22__ the street without another
thought.
     As a result, Britain currently has over a million old fridges __23__ in dumps
in fields and in warehouses because the country does not have enough equipment to
dispose __24__ them. New European Union regulations say that from 1 January 2002,
all material that depletes(损害)the ozone layer(臭氧层), such as CFC coolants
               ,
(含氟冷却剂) __25__ from fridges before they are put in landfill sites. It is __26__
to take quite a while to solve the problem.
     But it is not only fridges __27__ are difficult to get rid of. What about old
computers, TVs and other hi-tech junk? For example, Guangdong Province, in the
southeast of China, has been suffering from problems __28__ by imported waste
electrical goods like computers. Workers there __29__ old computers to extract the
recyclable parts like chips, and precious metals __30__ gold and platinum.
  21            答案:              B
A               at
B               to
C               of
D               on
  22            答案:              A
A               in
B               at
C               from
D               off
  23            答案:              D
A               rotted
B               rot
C               rotten
D               rotting
  24            答案:              C
A               away
B               off
C               of
D               at
  25            答案:              D
A               must remove
B               must be removing
C               must have removed
D               must be removed
  26            答案:              D


                                                                                 392
A              liking
B              like
C              likeness
D              likely
  27           答案:               A
A              that
B              what
C              which
D              why
  28           答案:               C
A              causing
B              cause
C              caused
D              has caused
  29           答案:               B
A              have broken up
B              have been breaking up
C              have been broken up
D              are breaking up
  30           答案:               B
A              as
B              like
C              for
D              than
270                 In some cities, workaholism (废寝忘食工作) is so common that
people don't consider it unusual. They accept the lifestyle as __21__. Workaholism
can be a __22__ problem. Because true workaholics would rather work than do anything
else. They __23__ have no idea of how to relax (enjoy movies, sports, or other types
of entertainment). Most of all, they __24__ to sit and do nothing. The lives of
workaholics are usually stressful, and this tension and worry can cause __25__
problems such as heart attacks and stomach diseases. Typical workaholics don't pay
much attention to their families. Their marriages may end in __26__ as they spend
little time with their families.
     Is workaholism __27__ dangerous? Perhaps not. Some studies show that many
workaholics have great energy and interest in work. __28__ do workaholics enjoy their
jobs so much? Advantages to work are numerous, but one of the most important is that
it offers __29__ financial security. It provides people with the self-confidence to
have produced a challenging piece of work. They are able to say "I __30__ it".
Psychologists claim that work gives people an identity.

    21        答案:               D
A             strange
B             boring
C             pleasant


                                                                                  393
D        normal
    22   答案:            B
A        slight
B        serious
C        obvious
D        difficult
    23   答案:            B
A        still
B        probably
C        certainly
D        mostly
    24   答案:            D
A        dream
B        decide
C        intend
D        hate
    25   答案:            A
A        physical
B        cultural
C        social
D        mental
    26   答案:            C
A        happiness
B        silence
C        failure
D        surprise
    27   答案:            B
A        sometimes
B        always
C        seldom
D        hardly
    28   答案:            B
A        When
B        Why
C        How
D        Where
    29   答案:            D
A        no more
B        more or less
C        no more than
D        more than
    30   答案:            A
A        made
B        failed


                            394
C               caught
D               valued
271                 Paris is the capital of France. It is also one of the __21__ cities
in the world. Paris is an international center. What stylish women are wearing in
Paris will be worn by women __22__ the world. Paris is also a famous world center
of education. For instance, it is the headquarters of UNESCO-the United Nations
__23__, Scientific, and Cultural Organization.
     The Seine River divides the city into two parts. Thirty-two bridges __24__ this
river. The oldest and perhaps most well-known is the Pont Neuf, which was built in
the sixteenth century. The Sorbonne, a famous university, __25__ on the left Bank
of the river. The beautiful white church Sacre Coeur lies __26__ the hill on the right
Bank of the Seine.
     There are many other famous places in Paris, __27__ the famous museum, the Louvre,
as well as the cathedral of Notre Dame. However, the most famous landmark in this
city __28__ the Eiffel tower.
     Paris is named after a group of people __29__ the Parisii. They built a small
village on an island in the middle of the Seine River about two thousand years ago.
This island is __30__ Notre Dame is located. Today around eight million people live
in Paris.
  21            答案:               B
A               more famous
B               most famous
C               famousest
D               famouser
  22            答案:               C
A               whole over
B               over all
C               all over
D               above over
  23            答案:               D
A               Economical
B               Education
C               Economic
D               Educational
  24            答案:               B
A               lie
B               cross
C               cover
D               pass
  25            答案:               A
A               is located
B               located
C               is locating
D               locates


                                                                                    395
 26            答案:               C
A              on top
B              at top of
C              on top of
D              top of
  27           答案:               D
A              as such
B              such like
C              well as
D              such as
  28           答案:               B
A              had to be
B              must be
C              need be
D              can be
  29           答案:               A
A              called
B              to be called
C              calling
D              being calling
  30           答案:               D
A              which
B              how
C              that
D              where
272                In the American family the husband and wife usually share important
decision-making. When the children are __21__ enough, they take part as well.
Foreigners are often surprised by the permissiveness (宽容) of American parents.
Children are often allowed to do pretty much __22__ they wish without strict control
by their parents. Children are encouraged to be __23__ at an early age. Some people
believe that American parents carry this freedom __24__ far. Others think that a
strong parental image would not __25__ American values. Because Americans emphasize
the importance of independence, young people are expected to __26__ their families
by the time they have __27__ their late teens or early twenties. This pattern of
independence often raises serious __28__ for the aging parents of a small family.
The average American is expected to live __29__ the age of 70. The job-retirement
age is usually 65. The children have left home, married, and __30__ their own
households. Often the major problem of many elderly couples is not economic, but they
feel useless and lonely with neither an occupation nor a close family ties.
  21           答案:               C
A              senior
B              junior
C              old
D              young


                                                                                   396
    22   答案:               D
A        when
B        that
C        which
D        what
    23   答案:               B
A        dependent
B        independent
C        sure
D        secure
    24   答案:               A
A        too
B        almost
C        nearly
D        so
    25   答案:               C
A        gain
B        welcome
C        suit
D        estimate
    26   答案:               D
A        break up
B        break into
C        break through
D        break away from
    27   答案:               A
A        reached
B        come
C        arrived
D        developed
    28   答案:               B
A        events
B        problems
C        matters
D        affairs
    29   答案:               D
A        on
B        up
C        from
D        beyond
    30   答案:               C
A        set forth
B        set aside
C        set up


                               397
D               set down
273                 Being not far from the sea, London is famous __21__ its fogs. The
worst of them __22__ on December 4,1952. All movement in the town came to a stop.
It was almost impossible to drive or ride in __23__. The streets which led into the
center were filled with __24__ that moved two miles an hour. Soon, however, the traffic
was stopped. Being left by their __25__, the buses and cars stood empty in the streets.
Many who usually travel by bus took underground (地铁). But there were __26__ many
people there that the gates had to be closed. Being caught in the fog, people felt
their way along the walls of houses with one hand, while they put out __27__ in front
of them so as __28__ knock against something or somebody.
     At the Opera House (大歌剧院) they got through the first act of La Traviata before
so much fog had spread into the building that the __29__ could not see the conductor
(乐队指挥).
     It was a __30__ fog, indeed, and as many as 4,000 people in London lost their
lives.
  21            答案:               C
A               because
B               as
C               for
D               of
  22            答案:               B
A               happen
B               happened
C               was happened
D               happens
  23            答案:               B
A               everything
B               anything
C               something
D               nothing
  24            答案:               D
A               carts
B               bikes
C               trucks
D               buses
  25            答案:               B
A               owner
B               drivers
C               engineer
D               passengers
  26            答案:               B
A               such
B               so
C               quite


                                                                                    398
D              too
  27           答案:               C
A              another
B              the others
C              the other
D              other
  28           答案:               C
A              to
B              not
C              not to
D              don't
  29           答案:               D
A              someone
B              drivers
C              managers
D              singers
  30           答案:               A
A              terrible
B              afraid
C              terribly
D              frightened
274                John is a famous writer now. But he said he was not a __21__ student
when he was young. He was often late for __22__ and didn't like doing his homework.
Sometimes, he slept in class while the teacher was teaching. He didn't understand
much, __23__ he always thought he understood everything. One day the teacher __24__
the students a question, "When Jack was ten years old, __25__ brother Bob was twenty,
Jack is fifteen now and __26__ is his brother Bob?" John said, "That's easy. Bob is
twice as old as Jack, so he is now thirty."
     Another time, the __27__ in a science class asked, "When it thunders (打雷),
__28__ do we always see the light before we __29__ the sound?"
     "But, Miss," said John quickly, "don't you __30__ our eyes are in front of our
ears?"
  21           答案:               A
A              good
B              tall
C              rich
D              fat
  22           答案:               C
A              sleep
B              lunch
C              class
D              play
  23           答案:               D
A              so


                                                                                    399
B              and
C              or
D              but
  24           答案:               B
A              sent
B              asked
C              told
D              found
  25           答案:               C
A              your
B              my
C              his
D              her
  26           答案:               B
A              how many
B              how old
C              what
D              who
  27           答案:               A
A              teacher
B              farmer
C              nurse
D              policeman
  28           答案:               D
A              what
B              when
C              where
D              why
  29           答案:               C
A              break
B              make
C              hear
D              smell
  30           答案:               D
A              read
B              hope
C              study
D              know
275                  What do we know about the sea? We __21__ that it looks very
beautiful when the sun is shining __22__ it. We also learn that it can be very terrible
when there is a strong wind. What __23__ things do we know about it?
     The first thing to remember is that the sea is very big. __24__ the map of the
world, there is __25__ sea than land. The sea covers three quarters of the __26__.
     Some parts of the sea __27__ very shallow. But some places are very deep. There


                                                                                    400
is one place near Japan. It is nearly 11 kilometers deep. The __28__ mountain in the
world is about 9 kilometers high. If we put the mountain into the sea at that place,
there would be __29__ kilometers of water above it!
     The sea is salty. There is one sea called the Dead Sea. It is very salty. It is
__30__ salty that swimmers cannot sink! Fish cannot live in the Dead Sea.
  21           答案:               A
A              know
B              say
C              hope
D              wish
  22           答案:               C
A              in
B              at
C              on
D              below
  23           答案:               B
A              another
B              other
C              the other
D              others
  24           答案:               D
A              Look after
B              See
C              Watch
D              Look at
  25           答案:               C
A              smaller
B              fewer
C              more
D              less
  26           答案:               B
A              land
B              world
C              water
D              mountain
  27           答案:               A
A              are
B              is
C              has been
D              were
  28           答案:               D
A              longest
B              oldest
C              tallest


                                                                                 401
D              highest
  29           答案:                B
A              20
B              2
C              11
D              9
  30           答案:                C
A              much
B              too
C              so
D              very
276                 Time spent in a bookshop can be enjoyable. If you go to a __21__
shop, no assistant will come near to you and say, "Can I help you?" You __22__ buy
anything you don't want. You may try to find out __23__ the book you want is. But
if you fail, the assistant will lead you there and then he will go away. It seems
that he is __24__ selling any book at all.
     There is a story which tells us about a good shop. A medical student __25__ a
very useful book in the shop, __26__ it was too expensive for him to buy. He couldn't
get it from the library, either. So every afternoon, he went there to read __27__
at a time. One day, however, he couldn't find __28__ from its usual place and was
leaving when he saw an assistant signing to him. To his surprise, the assistant pointed
to the book __29__, "I put it there so as not to be sold out," said the assistant.
Then he __30__ the student to go on with his reading.
  21           答案:                A
A              good
B              bad
C              cheap
D              expensive
  22           答案:                B
A              shouldn't
B              needn't
C              mustn't
D              can't
  23           答案:                C
A              what
B              which
C              where
D              when
  24           答案:                D
A              surprised at
B              not surprised at
C              interested in
D              not interested in
  25           答案:                B


                                                                                    402
A               bought
B               found
C               read
D               took
  26            答案:               A
A               but
B               and
C               so
D               or
  27            答案:               B
A               little
B               a little
C               few
D               a few
  28            答案:               A
A               the book
B               the shop
C               the assistant
D               the shopkeeper
  29            答案:               C
A               in a bookshop
B               in his hand
C               in a corner
D               in his pocket
  30            答案:               A
A               left
B               let
C               helped
D               taught
277                 Many people have to work __21__. Some people do not mind, others
think it is terrible.
     One man thinks that working at weekends can be __22__. He is George Smith. Mr
Smith works in an office, in Brighton, England.
     On Saturday, May 24, 1986, he went to the office to do some work. After he __23__
the lift, it stopped between floors. Mr Smith could not get out of the lift. He began
to shout, but __24__ heard him. Then Mr Smith remembered that it was a holiday in
England. No one was going to come to work __25__ Tuesday.
     There was __26__ for Mr Smith to do. He had to wait until one of his workmates
came to work and found him. With nothing to __27__, Mr Smith was very hungry and had
to sleep most of the time.
     Early on Tuesday morning, one of his workmates came into work and found the lift
__28__. When the lift was opened, Mr Smith came out cold, weak, and tired. He had
been in the lift for __29__ hours!
     Now Mr Smith says, "I only use the lift if they have __30__ in them."


                                                                                   403
    21   答案:              B
A        from Monday to Friday
B        at weekends
C        on weekdays
D        from morning till night
    22   答案:              A
A        dangerous
B        happy
C        angry
D        free
    23   答案:              B
A        got off
B        got into
C        got out of
D        got to
    24   答案:              C
A        someone
B        everyone
C        no one
D        either
    25   答案:              D
A        in
B        to
C        from
D        until
    26   答案:              A
A        nothing
B        something
C        anything
D        everything
    27   答案:              B
A        read or write
B        eat or drink
C        cook
D        know the time
    28   答案:              C
A        was not there
B        was not closed
C        was not working
D        was working
    29   答案:              C
A        nearly 24
B        about 40


                                   404
C              over 60
D              over 94
  30           答案:               D
A              pans
B              beds
C              exits
D              telephones
278                One day John and Bill were fishing. John took his __21__ Black with
him on the riverbank. When the dog saw a bird, he would run __22__ it and try to __23__
it. "All the fish are afraid and __24__ away," said Bill. "Be quiet, Black." John
shouted at the dog, __25__ Black did not listen to him. "Shall we go now, Bill?" asked
John, "Next time I shall not bring him here __26__."
     "Wait," said Bill, "A fish is biting my line." "Be careful!" shouted John. But
it was too __27__. The boy fell into the water. "Help! Help!" Bill shouted. But John
couldn't swim, either. __28__ Black came out. He jumped into the water and __29__
the boy onto the bank and __30__ his life.

    21         答案:               B
A              fish
B              dog
C              cat
D              friend
    22         答案:               D
A              into
B              onto
C              away
D              after
    23         答案:               C
A              smell
B              play
C              catch
D              shout
    24         答案:               B
A              walk
B              swim
C              fly
D              run
    25         答案:               C
A              and
B              or
C              but
D              so
    26         答案:               C
A              too


                                                                                    405
B              either
C              again
D              also
  27           答案:                A
A              late
B              dangerous
C              fast
D              safe
  28           答案:                D
A              Right now
B              At times
C              Since then
D              Just then
  29           答案:                C
A              saw
B              tried to help
C              pulled
D              swam together
  30           答案:                D
A              gave
B              made
C              came to
D              saved
279                 Billy is a boy of fifteen. His parents died three years ago. One
day when he was walking in the street, he __21__ a wallet. He returned it to the owner,
Mr Baker. He gave his __22__ to the boy. As the boy had no job, Mr. Baker made him
work for him in his __23__. Billy worked so hard that Mr. and Mrs. Baker were __24__
with him.
     Mr. Baker loved planting __25__. The week before last, he brought a few trees
home, planted them in the __26__ himself and watered them every day. Several days
__27__, he had to leave for another city. Before he started, he said to Billy, "Take
good care of the trees. Some boys near our house always want to steal them."
     "Don't __28__ about them." answered Billy. Six days passed and Mr. Baker came
back. He asked," __29__ anyone ever come to steal the trees?" "No, sir," said Billy,
"To stop someone from stealing the trees, I __30__ them up six days ago. I have hidden
them for almost a week!"

    21         答案:               A
A              found
B              bought
C              carried
D              wanted
    22         答案:               C
A              walked


                                                                                    406
B        pity
C        thanks
D        excuses
    23   答案:              D
A        factory
B        office
C        town
D        home
    24   答案:              A
A        pleased
B        angry
C        strict
D        popular
    25   答案:              D
A        flowers
B        grass
C        vegetables
D        trees
    26   答案:              A
A        garden
B        office
C        city
D        room
    27   答案:              B
A        ago
B        later
C        before
D        after
    28   答案:              D
A        think
B        talk
C        learn
D        worry
    29   答案:              C
A        Did
B        Does
C        Has
D        Will
    30   答案:              B
A        sent
B        pulled
C        put
D        picked
280           A generation gap (代沟)has become a serious problem. I read a


                                                                      407
__21__ about it in the newspaper. Some children have killed themselves after quarrels
with __22__. I think this is because they don't often have a talk with each other.
Parents now __23__ more time in the office, __24__ they don't have much time to stay
with their children. As time passes, they both feel that they don't have the __25__
topics to talk about. I want to tell parents to be more with your __26__, get to know
them and __27__ them. And for children, show your __28__ to your parents. They are
the people who love you. So __29__ them your thoughts. In this way, you __30__ have
a better understanding of each other.

    21        答案:               C
A             message
B             call
C             report
D             letter
    22        答案:               D
A             friends
B             teachers
C             classmates
D             parents
    23        答案:               A
A             spend
B             stay
C             work
D             have
    24        答案:               D
A             because
B             if
C             but
D             so
    25        答案:               B
A             interesting
B             same
C             true
D             good
    26        答案:               B
A             business
B             children
C             work
D             office
    27        答案:               C
A             get on with
B             look after
C             understand
D             lave


                                                                                  408
 28             答案:               D
A               interest
B               secret
C               trouble
D               feelings
  29            答案:               A
A               tell
B               ask
C               answer
D               say
  30            答案:               A
A               can
B               should
C               must
D               would
281                 "Where is the university?" This is a question that many visitors
to Cambridge ask. But no one can give them a __21__ answer, for there is no wall to
be found __22__ the university. The university is the city. You can find classroom
buildings, __23__, museums and offices of the university all over the city. And most
of its members are the students and __24__ of the thirty-one colleges.
     Cambridge was already a __25__ town long before the first students and teachers
arrived 800 years ago. It grew up by the river Granta, and the river was once __26__
the Cam. A __27__ was built over the river as early as 875. So the town got its name
"Cambridge".
     In the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries more and more land was used for college
buildings. The town grew much __28__ in the nineteenth century after the opening of
the railway in 1845. Cambridge became a __29__ in 1951 and now it has a population
of over 100,000. Many young students in other countries __30__ to study at Cambridge.
Thousands of people from all over the world come to visit the university town. It
has become a famous place all around the world.
  21            答案:               B
A               true
B               clear
C               right
D               real
  22            答案:               A
A               around
B               in
C               near
D               by
  23            答案:               D
A               cinemas
B               parks
C               zoos


                                                                                   409
D              libraries
  24           答案:               D
A              parents
B              farmers
C              workers
D              teachers
  25           答案:               C
A              interesting
B              usual
C              developing
D              common
  26           答案:               B
A              said
B              called
C              spoken
D              talked
  27           答案:               A
A              bridge
B              building
C              station
D              house
  28           答案:               C
A              smaller
B              slower
C              faster
D              cleaner
  29           答案:               A
A              city
B              college
C              university
D              country
  30           答案:               C
A              stop
B              hate
C              hope
D              need
282                Many years ago there was a poor man. He had an orange tree __21__
his garden. On the tree there were many fine oranges. __22__ he found one __23__ his
oranges was much bigger __24__ the others. It was as __25__ as a football. Nobody
had ever seen __26__ orange. The poor man took the orange to the king. The king was
so happy __27__ he gave the man a lot of money for it.
     When a rich man heard of it, he said to himself, "It's only an orange. Why has
the king given so much money __28__ it? I'll take my gold cup to the king. He'll give
me __29__ money."


                                                                                  410
     The next day when the king received the gold cup, he said to the rich man, 'What
a beautiful cup! I'll show you __30__, please take this great orange."
  21           答案:                B
A               on
B               in
C               over
D               with
  22           答案:                A
A               One day
B               Yesterday
C               When
D              This morning
  23           答案:                C
A               for
B               in
C               of
D               among
  24           答案:                B
A               of
B               than
C               like
D               as
  25           答案:                A
A              big
B               bigger
C               smaller
D               smalles
  26           答案:                C
A               so big
B               such big
C               such a big
D               such an big
  27           答案:                B
A               when
B              that
C               as
D               while
  28           答案:                D
A               to
B               buy
C               get
D               for
  29           答案:                D
A               many


                                                                                  411
B              lots of
C              a little
D              more
  30           答案:                C
A              the cup
B              beautiful thing
C              something beautiful
D              nice something
283                 Last year Tom left school. He came to Taipei to __21__ a job. He
went from one company to another but __22__ wanted him. Now he had little money. He
had to go back to his small town. So he came to the station. He felt __23__ and tired.
It was very late at night and __24__ was full of people. They were waiting __25__
tickets of the last train. He bought the last ticket, and he was very happy.
     At that time, a woman with a crying baby walked to him. She asked him to sell
her the ticket. He gave her the ticket. He thought they needed it __26__ he did. After
__27__ left, he sat on the bench and didn't know __28__ to go. Just then, an old man
came and said, "Young man, I __29__ what you did to the woman. I have a big company.
I need a good young man like __30__. Would you like to work for me?"

    21         答案:               C
A              find
B              see
C              look for
D              buy
    22         答案:               B
A              everyone
B              no one
C              nothing
D              something
    23         答案:               C
A              happy
B              interesting
C              sad
D              glad
    24         答案:               D
A              the city
B              the company
C              the farm
D              the station
    25         答案:               A
A              to buy
B              to sell
C              to give
D              to pass


                                                                                   412
    26         答案:               B
A              less than
B              more than
C              smaller than
D              worse than
  27           答案:               C
A              Tom
B              the bus
C              the train
D              the old man
  28           答案:               D
A              what
B              which
C              why
D              where
  29           答案:               A
A              have seen
B              don't know
C              don't like
D              have done
  30           答案:               B
A              the woman
B              you
C              the baby
D              her
284                It's half past four in the afternoon. __21__ is ready. There are
many things __22__ the table like plates, bowls and glasses. We can see some __23__,
eggs and fish on the plates. There are some dumplings, noodles and rice. Oh, there
is a big round cake in the middle of the __24__. There is __25__ to drink, there are
five glasses there. __26__ of the glasses is full of milk, two of them are full of
coffee and other two __27__ full of coke. There are two bottles of apple juice. That's
great. They are all our __28__ food and drink. I'd like __29__ them very much. Why
are there so many nice things? It's __30__ birthday.

    21         答案:               D
A              Breakfast
B              Lunch
C              Dessert
D              Meal
    22         答案:               B
A              in
B              on
C              under
D              at


                                                                                   413
    23             答案:               D
A                  meats
B                  muttons
C                  beefs
D                  meat
    24             答案:               B
A                  plates
B                  table
C                  bowl
D                  bottle
    25             答案:               C
A                  anything
B                  things
C                  something
D                  nothing
    26             答案:               C
A                  Some
B                  Two
C                  One
D                  Three
    27             答案:               A
A                  are
B                  is
C                  have
D                  has
    28             答案:               D
A                  good
B                  fine
C                  well
D                  favorite
    29             答案:               A
A                  to have
B                  have
C                  eat
D                  drink
    30             答案:               B
A                  I
B                  my
C                  me
D                  mine
285                     "Good Time" is a program on ABC Radio.
         Jim Green is an announcer for the program. Most of the girls __21__ boys like
the      program. They __22__ like Jim Green. Some of them often make phone calls to him
and      thank him __23__ his work. There are lots of __24__ to him every day, too.


                                                                                     414
     Jim Green gets up at 6:00 every morning. He has bread and a glass of milk __25__
breakfast. He leaves home at 6:30 and __26__ his office at 7:15.
     The program __27__ at 7:30.He plays the new records of the pop songs and modern
music for his listeners. At 8:00 it's time __28__ the news.
     Jim finishes work at 10:30. He goes home __29__ his car. He __30__ newspaper and
listens to music after supper. He thinks his life is very interesting.
  21           答案:                A
A               and
B               with
C               but
D               about
  22           答案:                C
A               too
B               to
C               also
D               so
  23           答案:                B
A               to
B               for
C               of
D               and
  24           答案:                B
A               letter
B               letters
C               friends
D               words
  25           答案:                C
A               at
B              with
C               for
D               to
  26           答案:                C
A               goes
B               gets
C               gets to
D               gets up
  27           答案:                A
A               begins
B               finishes
C               over
D              start
  28           答案:                B
A               to
B               for


                                                                                  415
C              of
D              in
  29           答案:                B
A              with
B              in
C              on
D              takes
  30           答案:                B
A              looks
B              reads
C              sees
D              watches
286                 Our school has a big library. It has many __21__ on different
subjects. Students can read books and newspapers in the __22__ room. They can also
borrow books from the library. But they must __23__ them on time. If they __24__ books,
they must pay for them. Miss Susan works in the library. She is very helpful and __25__
to the students.
     One morning she was __26__ at the desk when Amy hurried in. She told Miss Susan
that she couldn't find the library book " Harry Potter "__27__. At that moment, Lucy
came into the library with Amy's book. She __28__ it in the classroom. Amy was very
__29__. She thanked Lucy and said that she would be more __30__ from then on.
  21           答案:                A
A              books
B              pictures
C              teachers
D              students
  22           答案:                D
A              meeting
B              waiting
C              sitting
D              reading
  23           答案:                B
A              give
B              return
C              lend
D              borrow
  24           答案:                D
A              buy
B              leave
C              forgot
D              lose
  25           答案:                C
A              bad
B              strict


                                                                                    416
C              kind
D              ready
  26           答案:                 D
A              playing
B              studying
C              sleeping
D              working
  27           答案:                 C
A              nowhere
B              somewhere
C              anywhere
D              everywhere
  28           答案:                 B
A              left
B              found
C              bought
D              looked for
  29           答案:                 B
A              sad
B              happy
C              sorry
D              angry
  30           答案:                 B
A              helpful
B              careful
C              thankful
D              forgetful
287                 Helen was seven years old. One day one of her teeth began to hurt.
She __21__ in class at school, and her teacher __22__ kindly, "What's the matter,
Helen?" "One of my teeth hurts, "answered Helen.
     "Tell your mother about __23__, " said the teacher, "and then go to see the
dentist."
     That afternoon Helen told her mother about her tooth, and her mother __24__ her
to the dentist's a few hours __25__. The dentist looked at the tooth and then said
to Helen. "It's very __26__. I'm going to pull it __27__, and then you're going to
get a new tooth. It will be as nice as __28__ next year." Then he did it with no trouble.
The next day Helen's teacher asked her about the tooth. She said to her, "Does it
__29__ hurt, Helen?" "I don't know. You'd better ask the dentist, "Helen answered.
     "Why?" the teacher asked.
     "Because the dentist has __30__ it, " Helen answered.
  21           答案:                 A
A              cried
B              talked
C              shouted


                                                                                      417
D        laughed
    22   答案:          D
A        spoke
B        told
C        shouted
D        asked
    23   答案:          C
A        her
B        him
C        it
D        them
    24   答案:          B
A        brought
B        took
C        put
D        got
    25   答案:          C
A        only
B        ago
C        later
D        before
    26   答案:          D
A        hurt
B        well
C        healthy
D        bad
    27   答案:          C
A        on
B        in
C        out
D        off
    28   答案:          D
A        the other
B        the one
C        another
D        the others
    29   答案:          C
A        much
B        very
C        still
D        also
    30   答案:          A
A        kept
B        pulled


                          418
C              done
D              thrown
288                 It is well known that the English go out with an umbrella or a
raincoat. Why? __21__ the weather in Britain often changes quickly. It is not very
usual for the same kind of weather to __22__ long.
     Spring can be rainy or windy, __23__ the weather is getting warmer and you can
hope more sunny days. In fact, there __24__ as much sunshine in spring as in summer.
Summer is __25__ time for visitors to go to the seaside and other places of interest.
The weather can be sunny and nice. People often go out to have a walk or swim. Autumn
is a beautiful season, __26__ trees in the woods and parks changing colour. During
autumn it is still nice to be outside, too. In winter, it gets colder. It might snow,
especially on high land and in the north. There are __27__ very high winds in this
season.
     January and February are the coldest __28__ of the year, while the warmest __29__
often July and August. The difference __30__ temperature between winter and summer
is not so great in Britain. The average temperature for winter is about 4.5℃, and
for summer about 15.5℃.
  21           答案:                C
A              For
B              As
C              Because
D              Since
  22           答案:                B
A              make
B              stay
C              change
D              take
  23           答案:                A
A              but
B              and
C              or
D              for
  24           答案:                B
A              can
B              can be
C              have
D              can have
  25           答案:                D
A              the earliest
B              the latest
C              the worst
D              the best
  26           答案:                A
A              with


                                                                                   419
B              like
C              without
D              from
  27           答案:               A
A              also
B              too
C              either
D              as well
  28           答案:               C
A              seasons
B              weather
C              months
D              monthes
  29           答案:               B
A              is
B              are
C              was
D              were
  30           答案:               D
A              for
B              on
C              by
D              in
289                Every year students in many countries learn English. Some of these
students are children, __21__ students are young people. Why do all these people want
to learn __22__? It is not __23__ to answer this question. Many boys and girls learn
English at school. It is one of their __24__. Many people learn English because it
is __25__ in their work. Some young people learn English __26__ their higher studies
because some of their books are written __27__ English. Other people learn English
because they want to __28__ newspapers in English. Some people learn English because
they want to __29__ in the USA, England or Australia. English is very __30__ in our
life.
  21           答案:               B
A              all
B              the other
C              both
D              other
  22           答案:               A
A              English
B              Chinese
C              maths
D              Japanese
  23           答案:               B
A              hard


                                                                                  420
B               easy
C               good
D               nice
  24            答案:               D
A               books
B               classes
C               schools
D               subjects
  25            答案:               B
A               good
B               useful
C               fine
D               pleased
  26            答案:               A
A               for
B               of
C               to
D               from
  27            答案:               A
A               in
B               with
C               at
D               of
  28            答案:               D
A               look
B               see
C               look at
D               read
  29            答案:               B
A               go
B               work
C               like
D               come
  30            答案:               D
A               help
B               helping
C               helps
D               helpful
290                 Someone say "Time is money.", but I think time is __21__ important
than money. Why? Because when money is spent, we can get it back. However, when time
is __22__, it'll never __23__. That is __24__ we must not waste time.
     It goes without saying that the __25__ is usually limited. Even a second is very
important. We should make full use of our time to do __26__ useful.
     But it is a pity that there are a lot of people who do not know the importance


                                                                                   421
of time. They spent their limited time smoking, drinking and __27__. They do not know
that wasting time means wasting part of their own __28__.
    In a word, we should save time. We shouldn't __29__ today's work for tomorrow.
Remember we must __30__ time.

    21        答案:               D
A             much
B             most
C             many
D             much more
    22        答案:               C
A             lost
B             bought
C             gone
D             finished
    23        答案:               A
A             return
B             carry
C             take
D             bring
    24        答案:               D
A             what
B             that
C             because
D             why
    25        答案:               B
A             money
B             time
C             day
D             food
    26        答案:               B
A             nothing
B             something
C             anything
D             everything
    27        答案:               C
A             reading
B             writing
C             playing
D             working
    28        答案:               D
A             time
B             food
C             money


                                                                                  422
D              life
  29           答案:               B
A              stop
B              leave
C              let
D              give
  30           答案:               B
A              lose
B              save
C              spend
D              take
291                We know that trees are useful in our everyday life. They __21__
us many things, such as wood, oxygen, rubber, medicines and many other things. They
can __22__ tell us a lot about our climate. The following are the reasons. If you
__23__ a tree, you can see that it has many rings. Most trees grow one new ring __24__
year. Because of the reason, we know __25__ a tree is. A tree over a hundred years
old means that it has more than a hundred __26__. When the climate is dry or very
cold, the trees do not grow very much and their rings are usually __27__. When it
is wet and warm, the rings are much thicker. If the rings are suddenly very thin or
suddenly very thick, this means that the __28__ changed suddenly. If we look at the
rings on this tree, we can learn about the __29__ for a hundred years. We can see
__30__ our climate is changing today.

    21         答案:               C
A              tell
B              ask
C              give
D              get
    22         答案:               D
A              not
B              too
C              to
D              also
    23         答案:               A
A              cut across
B              climb up
C              walk past
D              look at
    24         答案:               A
A              every
B              many
C              the first
D              from
    25         答案:               C


                                                                                   423
A              how big
B              how long
C              how old
D              how much
  26           答案:                D
A              trees
B              leaves
C              people
D              rings
  27           答案:                D
A              big
B              thick
C              small
D              thin
  28           答案:                A
A              climate
B              trees
C              rings
D              animals
  29           答案:                C
A              people
B              things
C              climate
D              life
  30           答案:                A
A              how
B              why
C              when
D              while
292            One day the wind starts an argument with the sun. "I'm much __21__ than
you are!" says the wind. "No," answered the sun, "I'm much stronger than you!"
While they are arguing, they see a man walking down the road. He is wearing a heavy
__22__. The sun says to the wind, "Now let __23__ see which of us can make the man
take off the coat, then we will know __24__ is stronger."
First the __25__ tries. It begins to blow very hard. It blows so hard that the man
pulls his coat round him. The wind is __26__ with the man. Then the wind says to the
sun, "Now it's your __27__. Let me see if you can make him take off his coat." The
sun __28__ to shine on the man, soon it gets very hot! The man __29__ his coat. The
argument is __30__.

    21         答案:               D
A              strong
B              strongest
C              strongly


                                                                                   424
D        stronger
    22   答案:          C
A        trousers
B        hat
C        coat
D        shoes
    23   答案:          A
A        us
B        we
C        ourselves
D        our
    24   答案:          B
A        whose
B        who
C        when
D        what
    25   答案:          D
A        sun
B        rain
C        cloud
D        wind
    26   答案:          C
A        happy
B        worried
C        angry
D        sad
    27   答案:          D
A        way
B        home
C        hope
D        turn
    28   答案:          B
A        began
B        begins
C        begin
D        beginning
    29   答案:          A
A        takes off
B        takes down
C        puts on
D        puts down
    30   答案:          B
A        out
B        over


                          425
C   on
D   off




          426

				
DOCUMENT INFO
Shared By:
Categories:
Tags:
Stats:
views:1
posted:10/21/2011
language:English
pages:426
gjmpzlaezgx gjmpzlaezgx
About